The URL can be used to link to this page

Home My WebLink AboutCNEW2008-01724GEOTECHNICAL ENGINEERING REPORT DCI-ACE Center College Station, Texas Prepared by: LFC, Inc. Prepared For: Heights Venture Architects, LLP 1111 North Loop West, Suite 800 Houston, Texas 77008 Attention: Mr. Michael A. Kravetz January 2008 Project No. 07-2184 1 1 1 u 1 January 7, 2008 Mr. Michael A. Kravetz Heights Venture Architects, LLP 1111 North Loop West, Suite 800 Houston, TX 77008 Re: GEOTECHNICAL ENGINEERING REPORT DCI-ACE Center College Station, Texas LFC Project No. 07-2184 Dear Mr. Kravetz: Submitted herewith are the results of our geotechnical investigation conducted for the referenced project. This investigation was performed in accordance with our proposal 07-2197 dated December 16, 2007. Engineering analyses and recommendations for site grading, foundations, and pavements are contained in the narrative section of the report. Results of our field and laboratory investigation are submitted in detail in the Appendices of the report. We appreciate the opportunity to be of service to you on this project, and we would appreciate the opportunity to provide the materials engineering -testing and geotechnical observation services during the construction phase of this project. Please contact us if you have any questions or need any additional services. Respectfully Submitted, A, 'o Daryl Poduska, P.E. Geotechnical Services Manager 4;4A Kenneth B. Riner, P.E. Chief Operating Officer �•`-E OF ..................................... DARYL J. PODUSKA ` 93080 ' ,1z 'CENSEP°' P 1 17314 SH 249 SurrE 23o HOUSTON TEXAS 77o64 TEL Z81-807-i44i FAX 281-807-4188 WWW.LFC-INC.COM Table of Contents Page 1.0 Introduction...........................................................................................................1 2.0 Field Operations and Laboratory Testing..............................................................1 3.0 General Site Conditions........................................................................................2 3.1 Site Geology......................................................................................................2 3.2 Subsurface Soil Conditions................................................................................2 3.3 Groundwater......................................................................................................2 4.0 Analysis and Recommendations...........................................................................3 4.1 Seismic Site Classification.................................................................................3 4.2 Potential Vertical Soil Movements.....................................................................3 4.3 Foundation System - General............................................................................3 4.3.1 Foundation System - Slab..............................................................................3 4.3.2 Foundation System — Shallow Footings.........................................................4 4.3.3 Foundation System — Drilled Piers.................................................................5 4.3.4 Slab -on -Grade Recommendations.................................................................7 4.4 Pavement Design Recommendations...............................................................8 4.4.1 Rigid Pavement..............................................................................................8 4.4.2 Recommendations for Pavement Subgrade..................................................8 Fill Recommendations.......................................................................................9 General..............................................................................................................9 4.5 4.6 4.7 5.1 5.2 7.0 Appendices Appendix A -Project Location Diagram Appendix B -Boring Location Diagram Appendix C -Boring Log(s) Appendix D -Unified Soil Classification System Appendix E -Field Operations and Laboratory Testing GEOTECHNICAL ENGINEERING REPORT DCI-ACE Center College Station, Texas 1.0 Introduction The proposed project will consist of the construction of a new 20,000 square foot building and associated parking and drive areas located at the northeast corner of the intersection of Wellborn Road and Navarro Road in College Station, Texas. We have assumed that building loads will be light and that cuts of less than one foot will be required to bring the building pad to grade. The general location of the site is shown on the Project Location Diagram, located in the Appendix A of this report. The principal purposes of this investigation were to evaluate the general soil conditions at the proposed site and to develop geotechnical recommendations for the design and construction of building foundations and pavements. To accomplish its intended purposes, the study was conducted in the following phases: (1) drill sample borings to evaluate the soil conditions at the boring locations and to obtain soil samples; (2) conduct laboratory tests on selected samples recovered from the borings to establish the pertinent engineering characteristics of the soils; and (3) perform engineering analyses, using field and laboratory data, to develop design criteria. 2.0 Field Operations and Laboratory Testing The subsurface investigation consisted of six borings, B-1 through B-6. Borings B-1, B- 2, and B-3 were drilled on December 21, 2007 and January 3, 2008, to a depth of 25- feet below ground surface (bgs) within the footprint of the proposed building. Borings B- 4, B-5, and B-6 were drilled on December 21, 2007, and January 3, 2008, to a depth of 10-feet bgs in the parking and drive areas. The locations of the borings are shown on the Boring Location Diagram in Appendix B. Sample depths, description of soils, and classification (based on the Unified Soil Classification System) are presented on the boring logs in Appendix C. Terms and symbols used in the Unified Soil Classification System are presented in Appendix D. Laboratory soil tests were performed on selected samples recovered from the borings to verify visual classification and determine the pertinent engineering properties of the soils encountered. Classifications test results are presented on the boring logs. Descriptions of the procedures used in the field and laboratory phases of this study are presented in the Appendix E of this report. Project No. 07-2184 Page 1 1 3.0 General Site Conditions 1 3.1 Site Geology Based on available surface geology maps and our experience, it appears this site is located in the Yegua Formation. The Yegua Formation can generally be characterized as sandstone, clay, and lignite. Geologic maps indicated that the nearest mapped geologic fault is located approximately 7-miles southeast of the project site. A geologic fault study was beyond the scope of this investigation. 3.2 Subsurface Soil Conditions Descriptions of the various strata and their approximate depths and thickness are shown on the boring logs. A brief summary of the stratigraphy indicated by the borings is given below. Borings B-1 and B-4, drilled within the northern half of the site, encountered similar subsurface conditions. Low plastic sandy clay (CL) was encountered from the ground surface to a depth of 6-feet bgs. At 6-feet bgs, clayey sand (SC) and low plastic sandy clay was encountered to the bottom of the borings at 15-feet bgs. Borings B-2, B-3, B-5, and B-6, drilled within the southern half of the site, encountered similar subsurface conditions. Low plastic sandy clay (CL) was encountered from the ground surface to depths between 4- and 8-feet bgs. High plastic sandy clay (CH) was encountered at depths between 4- and 8-feet bgs and extended to the bottom of the borings at 10- and 25-feet bgs. Atterberg (plastic and liquid) limits were performed on six samples obtained at depths between 2- and 6-feet bgs. The plasticity index of these samples was between 21 and 50 with an average of 30 indicating that the soils generally have a moderate to high potential for shrinking and swelling with changes in soil moisture content. 3.3 Groundwater The borings were advanced using auger drilling and intermittent sampling methods in order to observe groundwater seepage levels. Groundwater was not encountered at any of the four borings at the time of drilling. Future construction activities may alter the surface and subsurface drainage characteristics of this site. It is difficult to accurately predict the magnitude of subsurface water fluctuations that might occur based upon short-term observations. IProject No. 07-2184 Page 2 The groundwater level should be expected to fluctuate throughout the years with variations in precipitation. 4.0 Analysis and Recommendations 4.1 Seismic Site Classification The seismic site classification is based on the 2006 International Building Code (IBC) and is a classification of the site based on the type of soils encountered at the site and their engineering properties. Per Table 1613.5.2 of the 2006 IBC, the seismic site classification for this site is D. 4.2 Potential Vertical Soil Movements Potential Vertical Rise (PVR) calculations were performed in general accordance with the Texas Department of Transportation (TxDOT) Method Tex-124-E. The Tex-124-E method is empirical and is based on the Atterberg limits and moisture content of the subsurface soils. The PVR calculated using the referenced method is about 3-inches assuming a dry moisture condition. 4.3 Foundation System - General The proposed building may be supported on slab foundations, shallow footings, or on underreamed drilled piers. Recommendations for the three foundation types are presented below. 4.3.1 Foundation System - Slab The proposed building can be supported on a reinforced ground -supported slab foundation. The slab foundation should be conventionally reinforced or post -tension reinforced. The slab foundation should be designed with exterior and interior grade beams adequate to provide sufficient rigidity to the foundation system to sustain the vertical soil movements expected at this site as described above. All grade beams and floor slabs should be adequately reinforced with steel to minimize cracking as normal movements occur in the foundation soils. The slab should be designed using a net dead load plus sustained live load bearing pressure of 1,750 pounds per square foot (psf) or a net total load pressure of 2,600 psf, whichever condition results in a larger bearing surface. These bearing pressures are Project No. 07-2184 Page 3 based on a safety factor of 3 and 2, respectively, against shear failure of the foundation bearing soils. Grade beams should be founded a minimum of 2-feet below existing grade. A slab constructed on -grade will be subject to potential slab movements of about 3- inches based upon the information gathered during this investigation. Subgrade treatment will be required to reduce the PVR to 1-inch or less. Subgrade treatment recommendations are provided in the section titled "Slab -on -Grade Recommendations". The recommended foundation design parameters based on information published in the Post Tensioning Institute (PTI) Design and Construction of Post -Tensioned Slabs -on - Ground, 2"d Edition, are as follows: Edge Moisture Variation Distance Center Lift 5.0 feet Edge Lift 5.0 feet Differential Swell Center Lift: 2.2 inches Edge Lift: 1.5 inches 4.3.2 Foundation System — Shallow Footings Shallow strip and spread footing foundations can be used for support of the proposed building bearing at a depth of 2-feet beneath existing grade. Continuous strip footings can be proportioned using a net dead load plus sustained live load bearing pressure of 1,750 psf or a net total load bearing pressure of 2,600 psf, whichever condition results in a larger bearing surface. Individual spread footings can be proportioned using a net dead load plus sustained live load bearing pressure of 2,250 psf or a net total load bearing pressure of 3,350 psf, whichever condition results in a larger bearing surface. These bearing pressures are based on a safety factor of 3 and 2, respectively. Individual spread footings should be at least 30 inches wide, and continuous strip footing foundations should be at least 16 inches wide. Although a detailed settlement analysis is beyond the scope of this study, settlement for foundations constructed as described above should be about 1 inch or less. Resistance to lateral loads may be provided by the soil adjacent to the footings. We recommend using an equivalent fluid weight of 200 pounds per cubic foot (pcf) for lateral resistance. An allowable coefficient of sliding friction of 0.3 between the concrete footings and underlying soil may be combined with the passive resistance. The geotechnical engineer should monitor foundation construction to verify conditions are as anticipated and that the materials encountered are suitable for support of foundations. Soft or unsuitable soils encountered at the foundation bearing level should be removed to expose suitable, firm soil. Foundation excavations should be dry and free of loose material. Excavations for foundations should be filled with concrete before I Project No. 07-2184 Page 4 the end of the workday or sooner if necessary to prevent deterioration of the bearing surface. Prolonged exposure or inundation of the bearing surface with water will result in changes in strength and compressibility characteristics. If delays occur, the excavation should be deepened as necessary and cleaned, in order to provide a fresh bearing surface. If more than 24 hours of exposure of the bearing surface is anticipated tin the excavation, a "mud slab" should be used to protect the bearing surfaces. If a mud slab is used, the foundation excavations should initially be over -excavated by approximately 4 inches and a lean concrete mud slab of approximately 4 inches in thickness should be placed in the bottom of the excavation immediately following exposure of the bearing surface by excavation. The mud slab will protect the bearing surface, maintain more uniform moisture in the subgrade, facilitate dewatering of excavations if required, and provide a working surface for the placement of formwork and reinforcing steel. 4.3.3 Foundation System — Drilled Piers Drilled pier foundations (auger -excavated, underreamed, steel reinforced, cast -in -place concrete piers) bearing in native soil may be utilized at this site for the proposed building. The underreamed piers should be founded at a depth of 8- to 10-feet beneath the existing grade. However, borings B-1 and B-4 encountered clayey sand at a depth of 6-feet bgs. Therefore, the shafts and underreamed portion of the piers may not remain stable and potentially collapse at depths below 6-feet. If the excavations will not ' remain stable, it may be necessary to construct the piers as straight shafts or reduce the bearing depth to 6- to 8-feet bgs. The construction difficulties, and the impact to the project schedule and cost, that may be associated with drilled piers should be weighed when considering the selection of drilled pier foundations. The piers may be proportioned using a net dead load plus sustained live load bearing pressure of 3,000 psf or a net total load pressure of 4,500 psf, whichever condition results in a larger bearing surface. These bearing pressures are based on a safety factor of 3 and 2, respectively, against shear failure of the foundation bearing soils. Foundation settlement for drilled piers constructed as described above should. be less than 1 inch. Because of the potential for the upper two feet of the soil to shrink and pull away from drilled piers during dry periods, we recommend soil resistance to lateral loads on drilled piers be ignored in the upper 2-feet of the soil profile. For resistance of lateral loads on drilled piers, we recommend the following parameters that include a factor of safety of 3. I Project No. 07-2184 Page 5 Effective Allowable Angle of Strain at Horizontal Modulus of Depth Soil Type Soil Unit Cohesion Internal % Peak Subgrade Reaction (ft) Weight (pcf) �'� (psf) Friction, m (degrees) Strength, £so (tons per cubic foot) 0-2 Sandy Clay 120 0 0 NA NA F2 — 10 Sandy Clay 120 525 0 0.007 110 (1) — Effective soil unit weight based on assumed groundwater depth greater than 10-feet. The uplift resistance provided by an underreamed drilled pier is the sum of resistance provided by the shear strength of the soil, the weight of the soil above the bell, and the weight of the drilled pier itself. The following equation may be used to calculate the allowable uplift resistance: Ws We Fa = cN„A�, + + FS FS, Where: Fa = allowable uplift resistance, Ibs c = allowable cohesion, psf Nu = bearing capacity factor = 3.55Db <_ 9 b Db = depth to base of bell, ft Bb = diameter of the bell, ft Au = projected area of bell, ft2 = ir(eb 4 - 8s Bs = diameter of the drilled pier shaft, ft Ws = weight of soil above bell, Ibs Wc = weight of drilled pier, lbs FS1, FS2 = safety factors A safety factor of 3 has been applied to the allowable cohesion value and is appropriate for sustained loading conditions. However, the allowable cohesion values may be increased by 50 percent, resulting in a safety factor of 2, for transient loading conditions. We recommend a soil weight safety factor, FS1, of 1.2 and a drilled pier weight safety factor, FS2, of 1.1. The uplift force on the piers due to swelling of the active clays can be approximated by assuming a uniform uplift pressure of 900 psf acting over the perimeter of the shaft to a depth of 8 feet. The shafts should contain sufficient full length reinforcing steel to resist uplift forces. The piers should be provided with an underream diameter to shaft diameter ratio not less than 2 to 1, and not greater than 3 to 1. For uplift considerations, piers should not be spaced closer than two underream diameters (edge to edge) based on the diameter of the larger underream. Closer pier spacings may result in reduced uplift capacity. We should be contacted to review closer pier spacings on a case -by -case basis. Project No. 07-2184 Page 6 The construction of all piers should be observed as a means to verify compliance with design assumptions and to verify: 1. the bearing stratum; 2. underream size; 3. the removal of all smear zones and cuttings; 4. that groundwater seepage, when encountered, is correctly handled; and 5. that the shafts are vertical (within acceptable tolerance). Groundwater was not encountered at any of the boring locations during the subsurface investigation. Therefore, groundwater may be encountered during pier excavation, and the risk of groundwater seepage is increased during or after periods of precipitation. Submersible pumps may be capable of controlling seepage in the pier excavation to allow for concrete placement. Concrete should be placed in the shafts immediately after excavation to reduce the risk of significant groundwater seepage, deterioration of the foundation -bearing surface, and underream collapse. We should be contacted for further evaluation and recommendations if materials other than clay are encountered at the design foundation bearing level, or if groundwater seepage and/or underream collapse occurs. Concrete should be placed immediately after the excavation has been completed. In no event should a pier excavation be allowed to remain open for more than 8 hours. Concrete should have a slump of 5 to 7 inches, and should not be allowed to strike the shaft sidewall or steel reinforcement during placement. 4.3.4 Slab -on -Grade Recommendations Based on the information gathered during this investigation, a slab constructed on - grade will be subject to potential slab movements of about 3-inches. To reduce the PVR to 1-inch or less, we recommend that the upper 3-feet of the building pad subgrade consist of select fill. In areas where fill of less than 3-feet is required to bring the building pad to grade, we recommend that the existing soils be excavated to a depth of 3-feet below the top of the finished building pad subgrade and replaced with select fill. Based on the laboratory testing conducted for this investigation, the native clay soils will not meet specifications for select fill outlined in the section titled "Fill Recommendations". Therefore, select fill will have to be imported from off -site. However, as an alternative to importing select fill, the native soil may be blended with lime to reduce the plasticity to meet select fill requirements. Based on our experience, we expect that it will require between 3- and 5-percent lime (by dry unit weight) to reduce the plasticity of the native clay soils to select fill requirements. However, we recommend that a lime series determination test be performed to determine the amount of lime required. Project No. 07-2184 Page 7 The subgrade is prone to drying after being exposed and should be kept moist prior to slab placement. A moisture barrier should be used beneath the slab foundation in areas where floor coverings will be utilized (such as, but not limited to, wood flooring, tile, linoleum, and carpeting). 4.4 Pavement Design Recommendations Recommendations for rigid pavement and preparation of the pavement subgrade are provided in the following sections. 4.4.1 Rigid Pavement A minimum 5-inch section of Portland cement concrete (PCC) is recommended for parking areas for automobiles and light trucks, and 6 inches for drive lanes and areas subjected to light to medium truck traffic. A minimum 7-inch section is recommended in areas receiving frequent heavy trucks and dumpsters. Concrete with a minimum 28 day compressive strength of 3,500 pounds per square inch should be used. 4.4.2 Recommendations for Pavement Subgrade All topsoil, existing pavement and structures, vegetation, and any unsuitable materials should be removed. The pavement subgrade should be proofrolled with a fully loaded tandem axle dump truck or similar pneumatic -tire equipment to locate areas of loose subgrade. In areas to be cut, the proofroll should be performed after the final grade is established. In areas to be filled, the proofroll should be performed prior to fill placement fill and after the final pavement subgrade is established. Areas of loose or soft subgrade encountered in the proofroll should be removed and replaced with engineered fill, or moisture conditioned (dried or wetted, as needed) and compacted in place. Low plastic sandy clay is expected to be encountered or exposed at the pavement subgrade. The pavement subgrade should be placed in loose lifts not exceeding 8- inches and should be uniformly compacted to a minimum of 95 percent maximum dry density (per ASTM D-698) and within ±2 percent of the optimum moisture content. If pumping of the subgrade is observed, or the subgrade is difficult to compact, we recommend a minimum of 6 percent lime (by dry soil weight) be blended into the subgrade to a depth of 6 inches to improve the subgrade performance. Lime tstabilization should be performed in accordance with Harris County Standard Specifications, Item 220, "Lime Stabilized Subgrade", or equivalent. 11 Project No. 07-2184 Page 8 4.5 Fill Recommendations Any fill placed in the building pad area should consist of select fill. Select fill should consist of soil with a liquid limit less than 35 and a Plasticity Index between 7 and 20. The select fill should be placed in loose lifts not exceeding 8-inches and should be compacted to at least 95 percent maximum dry density (per ASTM D-698) and at a moisture content within ±2 percent of the optimum moisture content. The subgrade to receive select fill should be scarified to a depth of 6 inches and compacted to at least 95 percent maximum dry density (per ASTM D-698) and at a moisture content between optimum and 3 percent above optimum. General fill may be placed in improved areas outside of the building pad. General fill should consist of material approved by the Soils Engineer and with a liquid limit less than 50. General fill should be placed in loose lifts not exceeding 8-inches and should be uniformly compacted to a minimum of 95 percent maximum dry density ( per ASTM D-698) and within ±2 percent of the optimum moisture content. Select fill and general fill should consist of those materials meeting the requirements stated. Select fill and general fill should not contain material greater than 4-inches in any direction, debris, vegetation, waste material, environmentally contaminated material, or any other unsuitable material. Materials considered unsuitable for use as select fill or general fill include low and high plastic silt (ML and MH), silty clay (CL-ML), organic clay and silt (OH and OL), and highly organic soils such as peat (Pt). These soils may be used for site grading and restoration in unimproved areas as approved by the Soils Engineer. Soil placed in unimproved areas should be placed in loose lifts not exceeding 10-inches and should be compacted to at least 92 percent maximum dry density (per ASTM D-698) and at a moisture content within ±4 percentage points of optimum. 4.6 General Every attempt should be made to limit the extreme wetting or drying of the subsurface soils because swelling and shrinkage of these soils will result. Standard construction practices of providing good surface water drainage should be used. A positive slope of the ground away from any foundation should be provided. Also, ditches or swales should be provided to carry the run-off water both during and after construction. Lawn areas should be watered moderately, without allowing the clay soils to become too dry ' or too wet. Stormwater runoff should be collected by gutters and downspouts, and should discharge away from the buildings. fRoot systems from trees and shrubs can draw a substantial amount of water from the clay soils at this site, causing the clays to dry and shrink. This could cause settlement beneath grade -supported slabs such as floors, walks and paving. Trees and large Project No. 07-2184 Page 9 bushes should be located a distance equal to at least one-half their anticipated mature height away from grade slabs. 4.7 Density Tests Field Density tests should be made by the Soils Engineer or his representative. Density tests should be taken in each layer of the compacted material below the disturbed surface. If the materials fail to meet the density specified, the course should be reworked as necessary to obtain the specified compaction. 5.0 Site Preparation and Grading 5.1 Site Preparation Preparation of the site for construction operations should include the removal and proper disposal of all obstructions that would hinder preparation of the site for construction. These obstructions should include all abandoned structures, foundations, debris, water wells, septic tanks and loose material. It is the intent of these recommendations to provide for the removal and disposal of all obstructions not specifically provided for elsewhere by the plans and specifications. All concrete, trees, stumps, brush, abandoned structures, roots, vegetation, rubbish and any other undesirable matter should be removed and disposed of properly. All vegetation should be removed and the exposed surface should be scarified to an additional depth of at least 6 inches. It is the intent of these recommendations to provide a loose surface with no features that would tend to prevent uniform compaction by the equipment to be used. 5.2 Site Grading Site grading operations, where required, should be performed in accordance with the recommendations provided in this report. The site grading plans and construction should strive to achieve positive drainage around all sides of the proposed buildings. Inadequate drainage around structures built on -grade can cause excessive vertical differential movements to occur. 6.0 Construction Observations T In any geotechnical investigation, the design recommendations are based on a limited amount of information about the subsurface conditions. In the analysis, the Project No. 07-2184 Page 10 geotechnical engineer must assume the subsurface conditions are similar to the conditions encountered in the borings. However, during construction quite often anomalies in the subsurface conditions are revealed. Therefore, it is recommended that LFC, Inc. be retained to observe earthwork and foundation installation and perform materials evaluation and testing during the construction phase of the project. This enables the geotechnical engineer to stay abreast of the project and to be readily available to evaluate unanticipated conditions, to conduct additional tests if required and, when necessary, to recommend alternative solutions to unanticipated conditions. Until these construction phase services are performed by the project geotechnical engineer, the recommendations contained in this report on such items as final foundation bearing elevations, final depth of undercut of expansive soils for non - expansive earth fill pads, and other such subsurface -related recommendations should be considered as preliminary. It is proposed that construction phase observation and materials testing commence by the project geotechnical engineer at the outset of the project. Experience has shown that the most suitable method for procuring these services is for the owner to contract directly with the project geotechnical engineer. This results in a clear, direct line of communication between the owner and the owner's design engineers, and the geotechnical engineer. 7.0 Report Closure The analyses, conclusions and recommendations contained in this report are based on site conditions as they existed at the time of the field investigation and further on the assumption that the exploratory borings are representative of the subsurface conditions throughout the site; that is, the subsurface conditions everywhere are not significantly different from those disclosed by the borings at the time they were completed. If during construction, different subsurface conditions from those encountered in our borings are observed, or appear to be present in excavations, we must be advised promptly so that we can review these conditions and reconsider our recommendations where necessary. If there is a substantial lapse of time between submission of this report and the start of the work at the site, if conditions have changed due either to natural causes or to construction operations at or adjacent to the site, or if structure locations, structural loads or finish grades are changed, we urge that we be promptly informed and retained to review our report to determine the applicability of the conclusions and recommendations, considering the changed conditions and/or time lapse. Further, it is urged that LFC, Inc. be retained to review those portions of the plans and specifications for this particular project that pertain to earthwork and foundations as a means to determine whether the plans and specifications are consistent with the recommendations contained in this report. In addition, we are available to observe construction, particularly the compaction of structural fill, or backfill and the construction hl IProject No. 07-2184 Page 11 of foundations as recommended in the report, and such other field observations as might be necessary. This report has been prepared for the exclusive use of the Client and their designated agents for specific application to design of this project. We have used that degree of care and skill ordinarily exercised under similar conditions by reputable members of our profession practicing in the same or similar locality. No warranty, expressed or implied, is made or intended. Project No. 07-2184 Page 12 l 1 r 1 Appendix A - Project Location Diagram 17 11 I , I 1 l 1 1 1 1 1 1 I 1 1 1 1 N a6 M Dim, 9w 141 1 -� Ifi9 2)e 19/ J9 1 W JD A, Project Site 269 2 269 oEw kw W,werM � ltSa 2t3 n«,m. v9pp. JOD MArd 9nox •. � 1J1 0 �P N0 PROJECT LOCATION DIAGRAM DCI-ACE CENTER Wellborn Road and Navarro Drive, College Station, Texas DATE: 12/19/07 Project No. 07-2184 Appendix B - Boring Location Diagram P --�-�N 4PO4'3V W 715.38'---'-----�_ OAD 1�' vt+oScarE BJFFEP , --- -- N 46'57*17' W 194.bl'-� - r W O 2 SCALE WELLBORN R Wwm B-01 through B-03 drilled to 25-foot depth 0 zo -5z 140 B-04 through B-06 drilled to 10-foot depth BORING LOCATION DIAGRAM Project No. 07-2184 DCI-ACE CENTER Date - 12/27/07 Wellborn Road and Navarro Drive, College Station, Texas Appendix C - Boring Log(s) BORING NUMBER B-01 LFC-* LFC, Inc. PAGE 1 OF 1 CLIENT Heights Venture Architects, LLP PROJECT NAME DCI-ACE Center PROJECT NUMBER 07-2184 PROJECT LOCATION Wellborn Rd. & Navarro Dr., College Station, TX DATE STARTED 1/3/08 COMPLETED 1/3/08 GROUND ELEVATION HOLE SIZE DRILLING CONTRACTOR Van and Sons GROUND WATER LEVELS: DRILLING METHOD Auger 0-15 feet AT TIME OF DRILLING --- LOGGED BY J. Reyes CHECKED BY DJP AT END OF DRILLING -- NOTES Groundwater not encountered at time of drilling. AFTER DRILLING — ATTERBERG H a o z uj = LIMITS w H _O Z ZV?O a. O MATERIAL DESCRIPTION amWCy m v CC=Y v N W O U O Uz v O Oz O J�Z nMz < a 0~ n �J z 0 Medium stiff, moist, dark gray, Low Plastic Sandy CLAY (CL) with organics from 0 to 2 feet ST 0.75 0.3 20 Becomes stiff to very stiff ST 1.5 0.7 16 42 12 31 Becomes gray with iron stains 5 ST 3.25 1.3 16 Medium dense, light gray, fine grained, Poorly Graded Clayey SAND (SC) / Sandy CLAY (CL) ST 2.25 0.4 23 2.75 0.4 17 ST 10 i ST 4.5 0.8 18 0 15 - Bottom of hole at 15.0 feet. C U u r o_ V C 7 J J t L 7 L Y BORING NUMBER B-02 LFC-* LFC, Inc. PAGE 1 OF 1 CLIENT Heights Venture Architects, LLP PROJECT NAME DCI-ACE Center PROJECT NUMBER 07-2184 PROJECT LOCATION Wellborn Rd. & Navarro Dr., College Station, TX DATE STARTED 12/21/07 COMPLETED 12/21/07 GROUND ELEVATION HOLE SIZE DRILLING CONTRACTOR Van and Sons GROUND WATER LEVELS: DRILLING METHOD Auger 0-25 feet AT TIME OF DRILLING -- LOGGED BY J. Reyes CHECKED BY DJP AT END OF DRILLING -- NOTES Groundwater not encountered at time of drilling. AFTER DRILLING — ATTERBERG ►— a o z Lu o LIMITS w ~ CO w m w o z W z z W z ~ p U 1 o MATERIAL DESCRIPTION a 0OW Uj y� Ye N V a LO� p X U', w �� a� �z U m0> UZ U W O p } Oz �� p— Hwp to O U) w x o a p 20 U �-3 aJ g? z 0 D_ LL Stiff, moist, dark gray, Low Plastic Sandy CLAY (CL) with organics from 0 to 2-feet ST 1.75 0.7 21 3.0 1.3 19 ST Becomes light gray wtih iron stains and silt seams 5 ST 1.75 0.7 22 49 18 31 1.0 0.3 22 ST Stiff, moist, light brown, High Plastic Sandy CLAY (CH) with iron stains and silt seams ST 3.75 1.3 32 10 Becomes very stiff n ST 4.5 2.3 30 V 15 z i 9 Y L y Becomes dark gray with silt seams L Q p ST 3.25 1.3 27 20 Y _7 J J L L L n ST 4.5 2.3 35 25 Bottom Ot hole at 15.0 teet. BORING NUMBER B-03 LFC* LFC, Inc. PAGE 1 OF 1 CLIENT Heights Venture Architects, LLP PROJECT NAME DCI-ACE Center PROJECT NUMBER 07-2184 PROJECT LOCATION Wellborn Rd. & Navarro Dr., College Station, TX DATE STARTED 12/21/07 COMPLETED 12/21/07 GROUND ELEVATION HOLE SIZE DRILLING CONTRACTOR Van and Sons GROUND WATER LEVELS: DRILLING METHOD Auger 0-25 feet AT TIME OF DRILLING --- LOGGED BY J. Reyes CHECKED BY DJP AT END OF DRILLING -- NOTES Groundwater not encountered at time of drilling. AFTER DRILLING -- ATTERBERG F- a o z W o LIMITS W } a O �- j m W a z (K Z ~ O p J MATERIAL DESCRIPTION C3O' O cn Y �- � v7W j-W HW� '. Z O 2O � Z W a (L d Z u— 0 Stiff to very stiff, moist, gray, Low Plastic Sandy CLAY (CL) with organics from 0 to 2 feet ST 2.5 0.8 17 4.5 2.3 19 ST Stiff to very stiff, moist, gray, High Plastic CLAY (CH) with 5 iron stains and silt seams ST 2.5 1.3 26 75 24 50 Becomes light brown ST 2.5 1.0 40 4.5 2.3 36 ST 10 Stiff to very stiff, moist, brown, High Plastic Sandy CLAY 0 (CH) with silt seams i V ST 3.5 0.8 31 n 15 z i 1' L Z L 'c Becomes dark gray ST 4.5 2.3 26 20 D Y J L W Lu W °W ST 4.5 2.3 25 25 tiottom of nose at z5.0 teet. BORING NUMBER B-04 LFC* LFC, Inc. PAGE 1 OF 1 CLIENT Heights Venture Architects, LLP PROJECT NAME DCI-ACE Center PROJECT NUMBER 07-2184 PROJECT LOCATION Wellborn Rd. & Navarro Dr., College Station, TX DATE STARTED 1/3/08 COMPLETED 1/3/08 GROUND ELEVATION HOLE SIZE DRILLING CONTRACTOR Van and Sons GROUND WATER LEVELS: DRILLING METHOD Auger 0-15 feet AT TIME OF DRILLING -- LOGGED BY J. Reyes CHECKED BY DJP AT END OF DRILLING --- NOTES Groundwater not encountered at time of drilling. AFTER DRILLING -- ATTERBERG H a o z Lu o LIMITS w v ~m wo 3z� (L z ¢� ~� �z ~ z v_ � w Q J MATERIAL DESCRIPTION -1 g > >> �� Lu v 2 j a(0 Lu H U w o a- 5 O— m0 v? U O Oz C7 g F- cn Lu c� <z Lu a H o 20 a? 0 LL Medium stiff, moist, dark gray, Low Plastic Sandy CLAY (CL) with organics from 0 to 2 feet ST 2.5 0.4 19 Becomes medium stiff to stiff ST 1.75 0.5 20 35 15 21 Becomes gray with iron stains 5 ST 1.75 0.7 20 Medium dense, light gray, fine grained, Poorly Graded Clayey SAND (SC) / Sandy CLAY (CL) ST 1.5 0.4 18 1.75 0.3 21 ST 10 D ] C 4.0 0.5 23 n 15 Bottom of hole at 15.0 feet. i 9 Y L Z J Q a V 7 Y 7 :9 J J w 'J 0 w n w BORING NUMBER B-05 . LFQ* LFC, Inc.PAGE 1 OF 1 CLIENT Heights Venture Architects, LLP PROJECT NAME DCI-ACE Center PROJECT NUMBER 07-2184 PROJECT LOCATION Wellborn Rd. & Navarro Dr., College Station, TX DATE STARTED 12/21/07 COMPLETED 12/21/07 GROUND ELEVATION HOLE SIZE DRILLING CONTRACTOR Van and Sons GROUND WATER LEVELS: DRILLING METHOD Auger 0-10 feet AT TIME OF DRILLING --- LOGGED BY J. Reyes CHECKED BY DJP AT END OF DRILLING --- NOTES Groundwater not encountered at time of drilling. AFTER DRILLING -- ATTERBERG ►— a o z w o LIMITS w wo oz� z �z p� U t=X i=-� a Lu aC9 0 MATERIAL DESCRIPTION wm g > Ci J ¢ w. o- N w p H N U w L) F �� a.p <z 0� w m0> Uz v" o" }" Oz a �p 0 � D: 0 a E- p M0 U �� n�J g? z 0 Very stiff, moist, dark gray, Low Plastic Sandy CLAY (CL) with organics from 0 to 2 feet ST 4.0 1.8 23 3.0 1.3 16 41 19 22 ST Stiff to very stiff, moist, light gray, High Plastic Sandy CLAY 5 (CH) with silt seams ST 1.75 0.7 32 3.75 1.3 37 ST Becomes light brown ST 4.5 2.3 30 10 0 Bottom of hole at 10.0 feet. 3 z n N n z i Y L Z j .0 Q :J Y D ❑ 0 J U Fw- 0 LO w y w NUMBER B-06 LFC, Inc. PAGE 1 OF 1 LFC*BORING CLIENT Heights Venture Architects, LLP PROJECT NAME DCI-ACE Center PROJECT NUMBER 07-2184 PROJECT LOCATION Wellborn Rd. & Navarro Dr., College Station, TX DATE STARTED 12/21/07 COMPLETED 12/21/07 GROUND ELEVATION HOLE SIZE DRILLING CONTRACTOR Van and Sons GROUND WATER LEVELS: DRILLING METHOD Auger 0-10 feet AT TIME OF DRILLING -- LOGGED BY J. Reyes CHECKED BY DJP AT END OF DRILLING - NOTES Groundwater not encountered at time of drilling. AFTER DRILLING - ATTERBERG f- a o z W o LIMITS w w m w 0 z W W � z p; t� ~ n. p MATERIAL DESCRIPTION a ►�- N> N z o (� 2z U Uz U O } Oz d J gJ WZ w ra a. o �' a g— z 0 Stiff to very stiff, moist, dark gray, Low Plastic Sandy CLAY (CL) with organics from 0 to 2 feet ST 2.0 1.0 19 Becomes gray with silt seams ST 2.75 1.3 25 47 22 25 5 ST 2.5 1.3 24 4.0 2.0 23 ST Very stiff, moist, light gray, High Plastic Sandy CLAY (CH) with iron stains and silt seams -0 ST 4.0 1.8 32 10 I i ) i Bottom of hole at 10.0 feet. 1 1 J 1 J ) J ) 1 1 7 J I Appendix D - Unified Soil Classification System 1 77 L 1 LFC*UNIFIED SOIL CLASSIFICATION SYSTEM UNIFIED SOIL CLASSIFICATION AND SYMBOL CHART COARSE -GRAINED SOILS (mare than 50% of material is larger than No. 200 sieve size.) Clean Gravels (Less than 5% fines) GW '� Well -graded gravels, gravel -sand 9 mixtures, little or no fines GRAVELS More than 50% . GP Poody-graded gravels, gravel -sand of coarse .p mxWras little or no fines fraction larger Gravels with fin as (More than 12% fines) than No. 4 sieve size GM Silly gravels, gravel -sand -sift mixtures GC Clayey gravels,gravel-sand-day mixtures res Clean Sands Less than 5%fines SW Well -graded sands, gravelly sands, little or no fines SANDS Sp Poorly graded sands, gravelly sands, 50% or more of coarse little or no fines fraction smaller Sands with fines More than 121/6 fines than No. 4 slave size SM Silty sands, sand -sin mixtures SC Clayey sands, sand -day matures FINE-GRAINED SOILS (5D°% or more of material is smaller than No. 200 sieve size.) Inorganic silts and very fine sands, rock ML flour, silty of clayey fine sands or clayey SILTS sifts with slight plasticity AND Inorganic days of low, to medium CLAYS Liquid limit CL plaslidty, gravelly clays, sandy days, lessthan silty days, lean days 5D% - - — OL Organic silts and organic silty days of low plasticity Inorganic silts, micaceous or MH dlatomaceousfine sandy orsilty soils, SILTS slasticsilts AND CH Inorganic days of high plasticity, fat CLAYS Liquid limitdays 50% OH Organic clays of medium to high or greater plasticity. organic sills HIGHLY ORGANIC19 PT Peat and other highly organic soils lY SOILS LABORATORY CLASSIFICATION CRITERIA D 60 D30 Cu = greater than 4; Cc = between 1 and 3 GW D10 DIE) ID60 GP Not meeting all gradation requirements for GW GM Atterberg llnuts below "A" line or P.1. less than 4 Above "A" lin a with P.I. between 4 and 7 are borderline cases requiring use of dual symbols GC Atterberg limits above "A" line with P.I. greater than 7 D 60 D30 Cu = greater than 4: Cc = between 1 and 3 SW D 10 DI 0 "D60 Sp Not meeting all gradation requirements for GW SM Atterberg limits below A" Limits plotting in shaded zone line or P.I. less than 4 with P.I. between 4 and 7 are borderline cases requiring use SC Atterberg limits above "A" line with P.I. greater than 7 of dual symbols. Determine percentages d sand and gravel from grain -size curve. Depending on percentage of fines (fraction smaller fhan No. 200 sieve size), coarse -grained soils are classified as talloxs: Less than 5 percent ................................ GW, GP, SW, SP More than 12 percent ............................... GM, GC. SM, SC 5 to 12 percent ................. Borderline cases requiring dual symbols PLASTICITY CHART 60 5D a_ CH 40 ALINE: PI = 0.73(LL-20 ) z 30 CL MH8d3H F 20 m 10 9L ML&OL 0 D 10 20 30 40 50 60 70 80 90 100 LIQUID L1M[T (LL) (%) TERMS DESCRIBING SOIL CONSISTENCY Fine Grained Soils Coarse Grained Soils Penetrometer Penetration Resistance Description Reading (tsh (blowsi t) 0 to 4 Description Very Loose Relative Density Soft 0.0 to 1.0 0 to 209A Finn 1.0 to 1.5 4 to 10 Loose 20 to 40% Stiff 1.5 to 3.0 10 to 30 Medium Dense 40 to 70% Very Stiff 3.0 to 4.5 30 to 50 Dense 70 to 90% Hard 4.5+ Over 50 Very Dense 90 to 1009/0 IAppendix E - Field Operations and Laboratory Testing F 1 I 1 Field Operations • Subsurface conditions were defined using the sample boring(s) located as shown on the Boring Location Diagram (Appendix A). The boring(s) were advanced between sample intervals using continuous flight auger drilling procedures. The results of each boring are shown graphically on the Boring Logs (Appendix B). Sample depth, description, and soil classification based on the Unified Soil Classification System (Appendix C) are shown on the Boring Logs. For cohesive soils, relatively undisturbed samples were obtained with Shelby tube samplers in general accordance with ASTM D1587 at the locations shown on the Boring Logs. The Shelby tube sampler consists of a thin -walled steel tube with a sharp cutting edge connected to a head equipped with a ball valve threaded for rod connection. The tube is pushed into the undisturbed soils by the hydraulic pulldown of the drilling rig. The soil specimens were extruded from the tube in the field, logged, tested for consistency using a hand penetrometer, sealed, and packaged to maintain "in situ" moisture content. The consistency of cohesive soil samples was evaluated in the field using a calibrated hand penetrometer. In this test a 0.25 inch diameter piston is pushed into the undisturbed sample at a constant rate to a depth of 0.25 inch. The results of these tests are tabulated at respective sample depths on the logs. When the capacity of the penetrometer is exceeded, the value is tabulated as 4.5+. Samples of granular and cohesive materials were obtained using split -barrel sampling procedures in general accordance with ASTM D1586. In the split -barrel procedure, a disturbed sample is obtained in a standard 2 inch OD split barrel sampling spoon driven into 18 inches into the ground using a 140-pound hammer falling freely 30 inches. The number of blows for the last 12 inches of a standard 18-inch penetration is recorded as the Standard Penetration Test resistance (N-value). The N-values are recorded on the boring logs at the depth of sampling. The samples were sealed and returned to our laboratory for further examination and testing. Groundwater observations are shown on the boring logs. Upon completion of the boring, the boreholes were backfilled from the top and plugged at the surface. C L Laboratory Testing LFC, Inc. performs visual classification and any of a number of laboratory tests, as appropriate, to define pertinent engineering characteristics of the soils encountered. Tests are performed in general accordance with American Society for Testing and Materials (ASTM) procedures and results are included at the respective sample depths on the boring logs. Laboratory tests and procedures routinely utilized, as appropriate, for geotechnical investigations include: • ASTM D421 — Standard Practice for Dry Preparation of Soil Samples for Particle - Size Analysis and Determination of Soil Constants • ASTM D422 — Standard Test Method for Particle -Size Analysis of Soils • ASTM D1140 — Standard Test Methods for Amount of Material in Soils Finer than the No. 200 (75-pm) Sieve • ASTM D2166 — Standard Test Method for Unconfined Compressive Strength of Cohesive Soil • ASTM D2216 — Standard Test Method for Laboratory Determination of Water (Moisture) Content of Soil and Rock by Mass • ASTM D2217 — Standard Practice for Wet Preparation of Soil Samples for Particle -Size Analysis and Determination of Soil Constants • ASTM D2487 — Standard Classification of Soils for Engineering Purposes 1 (Unified Soil Classification System) • ASTM D2850 Standard Test Method for Unconsolidated-Undrained Tnaxial Compression Test on Cohesive Soil • ASTM D4220 — Standard Practices for Preserving and Transporting Soil Samples • ASTM D4318 — Standard Test Methods for Liquid Limit, Plastic Limit, and Plasticity Index of Soils • ASTM D4643 — Standard Test Method for Determination of Water (Moisture) Content of Soil by the Microwave Oven Method • Soil Strength Determination Using a Torvane March. 12, 2008 FOR PERMIT AND PRICING PROJECT NO.07128 HUGHTS V,[CNIURI PROJECT MANUAL Navarro West Center 11907 FM 2154 (Welbourne Road and Navarro Road) College Station, Texas Architect: HEIGHTS VENTURE ARCHITECTS, L.L.P. 1111 NORTH LOOP WEST, SUITE 800 HOUSTON, TEXAS 77008 (713)869-1103 Civil Engineer: Structural Engineer: Mechanical/Plumbing/Electrical Engineer: JAMES F. TURNER ENGINEERS, LLC 8340 MEADOW ROAD, SUITE 160 DALLAS, TEXAS 75231 (214) 750-2900 Landscape Architect: EVERGREEN DESIGN GROUP INC. 1141 NORTH LOOP 1604 EAST, SUITE 105442 SAN ANTONIO, TEXAS 78232 (713) 983-6144 Navarro West Center For Construction Navarro Drive and Welbourne Drive March 12th, 2008 TABLE OF CONTENTS INTRODUCTORY INFORMATION, BIDDING AND CONTRACTING REQUIREMENTS 00100 TABLE OF CONTENTS 00110 INDEX OF DRAWINGS 00200 INSTRUCTIONS TO BIDDERS 00300 INFORMATION AVAILABLE TO BIDDERS 00410 BID FORM 00500 AGREEMENT 00611 CONTRACTORS AFFIDAVIT 00616 CONTRACTORS GENERAL WARRANTY 00619 ASBESTOS -FREE WARRANTY 00700 GENERAL CONDITIONS 00730 SUPPLEMENTARY CONDITIONS DIVISION 1 - GENERAL REQUIREMENTS 01100 SUMMARY 01200 PRICE AND PAYMENT PROCEDURES 01270 UNIT PRICES 01300 ADMINISTRATIVE REQUIREMENTS 01265 PRICING OF CONSTRUCTION CONTRACT CHANGE ORDERS 01325 CONSTRUCTION PROGRESS SCHEDULE 01400 QUALITY REQUIREMENTS 01500 TEMPORARY FACILITIES AND CONTROLS 01510 TEMPORARY UTILITIES 01525 FIELD OFFICES 01575 TEMPORARY EROSION AND SEDIMENTATION CONTROL 01600 PRODUCT REQUIREMENTS 01700 EXECUTION REQUIREMENTS 01780 CLOSEOUT SUBMITTALS DIVISION 2 - SITE CONSTRUCTION 02310 GRADING 02315 EXCAVATION 02316 FILL AND BACKFILL 02317 TRENCHING FOR SITE UTILITIES 02451 PILE LOAD TESTS 02468 DRILLED CONCRETE PIERS (CAISSONS) 02510 WATER DISTRIBUTION 02515 DISINFECTION OF WATER DISTRIBUTION SYSTEM 07128 Table of Contents Page 1 Navarro West Center 03/13/08 Navarro West Center Navarro Drive and Welbourne Drive 02535 SANITARY SEWER PIPING 02582 UNDERGROUND ELECTRICAL DUCTS AND MANHOLES 02590 SITE GROUNDING 02635 STORM DRAINAGE PIPING 02640 MANHOLES AND COVERS 02751 PORTLAND CEMENT CONCRETE PAVING 02765 PAVEMENT MARKINGS 02810 IRRIGATION SYSTEM 02843 PARKING BUMPERS 02871 BICYCLE RACKS 02921 SEEDING 02923 SODDING 02930 EXTERIOR PLANTS DIVISION 3 - CONCRETE 03300 CAST -IN -PLACE CONCRETE DIVISION 4 - MASONRY 04720 CAST STONE 04810 UNIT MASONRY ASSEMBLIES 04816 MASONRY VENEER DIVISION 5 - METALS 05120 STRUCTURAL STEEL 05210 STEEL JOISTS 05310 STEEL DECK 05400 COLD FORMED METAL FRAMING 05500 METAL FABRICATIONS DIVISION 6 - WOOD AND PLASTICS 06100 ROUGH CARPENTRY 06200 FINISH CARPENTRY 06410 CUSTOM CABINETS DIVISION 7 - THERMAL AND MOISTURE PROTECTION 07130 SHEET WATERPROOFING 07212 BOARD AND BATT INSULATION 07240 EXTERIOR INSULATION AND FINISH SYSTEMS 07411 PREFORMED METAL ROOF PANELS 07128 Table of Contents Navarro West Center For Construction March 12th, 2008 Page 2 03/13/08 Navarro West Center Navarro Drive and Welbourne Drive 07550 MODIFIED BITUMINOUS MEMBRANE ROOFING 07620 SHEET METAL FLASHING AND TRIM 07631 GUTTERS AND DOWNSPOUTS 07720 ROOF ACCESSORIES 07900 JOINT SEALERS DIVISION 8 - DOORS AND WINDOWS 08110 STEEL DOORS AND FRAMES 08211 FLUSH WOOD DOORS 08331 OVERHEAD COILING DOORS 08410 METAL -FRAMED STOREFRONTS 08460 AUTOMATIC ENTRANCE DOORS 08710 DOOR HARDWARE 08800 GLAZING 08830 MIRRORS DIVISION 9 - FINISHES 09260 GYPSUM BOARD ASSEMBLIES 09300 TILE 09511 SUSPENDED ACOUSTICAL CEILINGS 09680 CARPET 09900 PAINTS AND COATINGS DIVISION 10 - SPECIALTIES 10160 METAL TOILET COMPARTMENTS DIVISION 11 - EQUIPMENT 11164 DOCK SEALS AND SHELTERS 11165 DOCK BUMPERS DIVISION 12 - FURNISHINGS - NOT USED DIVISION 13 - SPECIAL CONSTRUCTION - NOT USED DIVISION 14 - CONVEYING SYSTEMS - NOT USED DIVISION 15 - MECHANICAL - SEE DRAWINGS DIVISION 16 - ELECTRICAL - SEE DRAWINGS 07128 Table of Contents Navarro West Center For Construction March 12th, 2008 iL OF!!�Gd Page 3 03/13/08 Navarro West Center ' Navarro Drive and Welbourne Drive SECTION 00110 INDEX OF DRAWINGS T0.0 Title Sheet ES Existing Survey G1.1 Accessibility Sheet G1.2 Accessibility Sheet C1.0 Paving Plan C2.0 Erosion Control Plan C3.0 Erosion Control Details C4.0 Grading Plan C5.0 Paving Details C6.0 Drainage Area Map C7.0 Drainage Calculations C8.0 Utility Plan LP1 Landscape Plan LP2 Landscape Details A1.0 Site Plan A1.1 Floor Plan A1.2 Reflected Ceiling plan A1.3 Roof Plan A1.4 Enlarged Floor Plan A2.1 Elevations A4.1 Wall Sections A4.2 Wall Sections A4.3 Wall Sections A4.4 Wall Sections A4.5 Wall Sections A5.1 Section Details A5.2 Section Details A5.3 Plan Details A5.4 Site Plan Details A6.1 Schedules S1.1 General Notes S2.1 Foundation Plan S3.1 Roof Framing Plan S4.1 Foundation Details S4.2 Foundation Details S5.1 Framing Details S5.2 Framing Details P1.1 Plumbing Plan & Details P1.2 Plumbing Plan & Details E1.0 Floor Plan Lighting E2.0 Floor Plan Power E3.0 Floor Plan Lighting & Power E4.0 One Line Diagram & Panels M1.1 Mechanical Floor Plan M2.1 Mechanical Details For Construction March 12th, 2008 OF t Index of Drawings 00110 Navarro West Center Welbourne Drive and Navarro Drive SECTION 00200 INSTRUCTIONS TO BIDDERS INVITATION 1.01 BID SUBMISSION For Permit and Pricing March 12th, 2008 A. Bids signed and under seal, executed, and dated will be received at the office of the Owner at 7505 Highmeadow before 2:00 p.m. local standard time on the 28th day of March, 2008. 1.02 INTENT A. The intent of this Bid request is to obtain an offer to perform work to complete a Eldridge Briar Retail Building located at 1635 Eldridge Parkway for a Stipulated Sum contract, in accordance with the Contract Documents. 1.03 WORK IDENTIFIED IN THE CONTRACT DOCUMENTS A. Work of this proposed Contract comprises building construction, including general construction Work. 1.04 CONTRACT TIME A. Identify Contract Time in the Bid Form. The completion date in the Agreement shall be the Contract Time added to the commencement date. BID DOCUMENTS AND CONTRACT DOCUMENTS 2.01 DEFINITIONS A. Bid Documents: Contract Documents supplemented with Invitation To Bid, Instructions to Bidders, Information Available to Bidders, Bid Form Supplements To Bid Forms and Appendices identified. B. Contract Documents: Defined in AIA A201 Article 1 including issued Addenda. C. Bid, Offer, or Bidding: Act of submitting an offer under seal. D. Bid Amount: Monetary sum identified by the Bidder in the Bid Form. 2.02 CONTRACT DOCUMENTS IDENTIFICATION A. The Contract Documents are identified as Project Number 07128, as prepared by Architect who is located at 1111 North Loop West, Suite 800, Houston Texas, and with contents as identified in the Table of Contents. 2.03 AVAILABILITY A. Bid Documents are made available only for the purpose of obtaining offers for this project. Their use does not grant a license for other purposes. 2.04 INQUIRIES/ADDENDA A. Direct questions to Michael Kravetz, telephone 713 869-1103. B. Addenda may be issued during the bidding period. All Addenda become part of the Contract Documents. Include resultant costs in the Bid Amount. C. Verbal answers are not binding on any parry. D. Clarifications requested by bidders must be in writing not less than 7 days before date set for receipt of bids. The reply will be in the form of an Addendum, a copy of which will be forwarded to known recipients. 07128 / Navarro West Center 00200 - 1 INSTRUCTIONS TO BIDDERS Navarro West Center Welbourne Drive and Navarro Drive For Permit and Pricing ' March 12th, 2008 2.05 PRODUCT/ASSEMBLY/SYSTEM SUBSTITUTIONS A. Where the Bid Documents stipulate a particular product, substitutions will be considered up to 10 days before receipt of bids. B. When a request to substitute a product is made, Architect may approve the substitution and will issue an Addendum to known bidders. C. The submission shall provide sufficient information to determine acceptability of such products. D. Provide complete information on required revisions to other work to accommodate each proposed substitution. E. Provide products as specified unless substitutions are submitted in this manner and accepted. SITE ASSESSMENT 3.01 SITE EXAMINATION A. Examine the project site before submitting a bid. BID SUBMISSION 4.01 SUBMISSION PROCEDURE A. Bidders shall be solely responsible for the delivery of their bids in the manner and time prescribed. END OF INSTRUCTIONS TO BIDDERS 07128 / Navarro West Center - I , 00200 2 INSTRUCTIONS TO B DDERS Navarro West Center Welbourne Drive and Navarro Drive SECTION 00300 For Permit and Pricing March 12th, 2008 INFORMATION AVAILABLE TO BIDDERS EXISTING REPORTS AND SURVEYS 1.01 SUBSURFACE INVESTIGATION REPORT A. A copy of a geotechnical report with respect to the building site is included with this document: 1. Title: Geotechnical Engineering Report DCI-ACE Center, College Station, Texas. 2. Project Number: 07-2184 3. Date:January 2008. 4. Prepared by: L.F.C. , Houston, Texas. B. The recommendations described shall not be construed as a requirement of this Contract, unless specifically referenced in the Contract Documents. C. This report, by its nature, cannot reveal all conditions that exist on the site. Should subsurface conditions be found to vary substantially from this report, changes in the design and construction of foundations will be made, with resulting credits or expenditures to the Contract Price accruing to Owner. 1.02 TDLR REGISTRATION CONFIRMATION PAGE A. A copy of the Texas Department of licensing and Regulation, registration confirmation page is included with this document: B. Dated 03/12/08 C. Confirmation number: D. View at the office of Architect, and/or available electronically via e-mail request. 1.03 ENERGY CODE ANALYSIS A. A copy of the Comcheck software Version 3.2.1. Envelope Compliance Certificate is included with this document. 1. Date:03/12/08 2. Prepared by: Heights Venture Architects END OF INFORMATION AVAILABLE TO BIDDERS ' 07128 / Navarro West Center 00300 - 1 INFORMATION AVAILABLE TO BIDDERS GEOTECHNICAL ENGINEERING REPORT DCI-ACE Center College Station, Texas Prepared by: LFC, Inc. Prepared For: Heights Venture Architects, LLP 1111 North Loop West, Suite 800 Houston, Texas 77008 Attention: Mr. Michael A. Kravetz January 2008 Project No. 07-2184 :,rIMMa January 7, 2008 Mr. Michael A. Kravetz Heights Venture Architects, LLP 1111 North Loop West, Suite 800 Houston, TX 77008 Re: GEOTECHNICAL ENGINEERING REPORT DCI-ACE Center College Station, Texas LFC Project No. 07-2184 Dear Mr. Kravetz: Submitted herewith are the results of our geotechnical investigation conducted for the referenced project. This investigation was performed in accordance with our proposal 07-2197 dated December 16, 2007. Engineering analyses and recommendations for site grading, foundations, and pavements are contained in the narrative section of the report. Results of our field and laboratory investigation are submitted in detail in the Appendices of the report. We appreciate the opportunity to be of service to you on this project, and we would appreciate the opportunity to provide the materials engineering -testing and geotechnical observation services during the construction phase of this project. Please contact us if you have any questions or need any additional services. Respectfully Submitted, Za,� 6"/7 Ln.05? Daryl Poduska, P.E. Geotechnical Services Manager Kenne B. Riner, E. Chief Operating Officer OF T. 1�11 r * , *.. i DARYL J. PODUSKA ............................... ....� 93080 I�,4# S��CENSE NG�;r t t PO` A ``E 17314 SH z49 SUITE z3o HOUSTON TEXAS 77o64 TEL z8x-807-11441 FAX z81-807-4i88 1fflWW.LFC-1NC.00M Table of Contents Paqe 1.0 Introduction...........................................................................................................1 2.0 Field Operations and Laboratory Testing..............................................................1 3.0 General Site Conditions........................................................................................2 3.1 Site Geology......................................................................................................2 3.2 Subsurface Soil Conditions................................................................................2 3.3 Groundwater......................................................................................................2 4.0 Analysis and Recommendations................................................... :....................... 3 4.1 Seismic Site Classification.................................................................................3 4.2 Potential Vertical Soil Movements.....................................................................3 4.3 Foundation System - General............................................................................3 4.3.1 Foundation System - Slab...............................................................................3 4.3.2 Foundation System — Shallow Footings.........................................................4 4.3.3 Foundation System — Drilled Piers.................................................................5 4.3.4 Slab -on -Grade Recommendations.................................................................7 4.4 Pavement Design Recommendations................................................................8 4.4.1 Rigid Pavement..............................................................................................8 4.4.2 Recommendations for Pavement Subgrade..................................................8 4.5 Fill Recommendations.......................................................................................9 4.6 General..............................................................................................................9 4.7 Density Tests...................................................................................................10 5.0 Site Preparation and Grading..............................................................................10 5.1 Site Preparation...............................................................................................10 5.2 Site Grading.....................................................................................................10 6.0 Construction Observations..................................................................................10 7.0 Report Closure....................................................................................................11 Appendices Appendix A - Project Location Diagram Appendix B - Boring Location Diagram Appendix C - Boring Log(s) Appendix D - Unified Soil Classification System Appendix E - Field Operations and Laboratory Testing GEOTECHNICAL ENGINEERING REPORT DCI-ACE Center College Station, Texas 1.0 Introduction The proposed project will consist of the construction of a new 20,000 square foot building and associated parking and drive areas located at the northeast corner of the intersection of Wellborn Road and Navarro Road in College Station, Texas. We have assumed that building loads will be light and that cuts of less than one foot will be required to bring the building pad to grade. The general location of the site is shown on the Project Location Diagram, located in the Appendix A of this report. The principal purposes of this investigation were to evaluate the general soil conditions at the proposed site and to develop geotechnical recommendations for the design and construction of building foundations and pavements. To accomplish its intended purposes, the study was conducted in the following phases: (1) drill sample borings to evaluate the soil conditions at the boring locations and to obtain soil samples; (2) conduct laboratory tests on selected samples recovered from the borings to establish the pertinent engineering characteristics of the soils; and (3) perform engineering analyses, using field and laboratory data, to develop design criteria. 2.0 Field Operations and Laboratory Testing The subsurface investigation consisted of six borings, B-1 through B-6. Borings B-1, B- 2, and B-3 were drilled on December 21, 2007 and January 3, 2008, to a depth of 25- feet below ground surface (bgs) within the footprint of the proposed building. Borings B- 4, B-5, and B-6 were drilled on December 21, 2007, and January 3, 2008, to a depth of 10-feet bgs in the parking and drive areas. The .locations of the borings are shown on the Boring Location Diagram in Appendix B. Sample depths, description of soils, and classification (based on the Unified Soil Classification System) are presented on the boring logs in Appendix C. Terms and symbols used in the Unified Soil Classification System are presented in Appendix D. Laboratory soil tests were performed on selected samples recovered from the borings to verify visual classification and determine the pertinent engineering properties of the soils encountered. Classifications test results are presented on the boring logs. Descriptions of the procedures used in the field and laboratory phases of this study are presented in the Appendix E of this report. Project No. 07-2184 Page 1 3.0 General Site Conditions 3.1 Site Geology Based on available surface geology maps and our experience, it appears this site is located in the Yegua Formation. The Yegua Formation can generally be characterized as sandstone, clay, and lignite. Geologic maps indicated that the nearest mapped geologic fault is located approximately 7-miles southeast of the project site. A geologic fault study was beyond the scope of this investigation. 3.2 Subsurface Soil Conditions Descriptions of the various strata and their approximate depths and thickness are shown on the boring logs. A brief summary of the stratigraphy indicated by the borings is given below. Borings B-1 and B-4, drilled within the northern half of the site, encountered similar subsurface conditions. Low plastic sandy clay (CL) was encountered from the ground surface to a depth of 6-feet bgs. At 6-feet bgs, clayey sand (SC) and low plastic sandy clay was encountered to the bottom of the borings at 15-feet bgs. Borings B-2, B-3, B-5, and B-6, drilled within the southern half of the site, encountered similar subsurface conditions. Low plastic sandy clay (CL) was encountered from the ground surface to depths between 4- and 8-feet bgs. High plastic sandy clay (CH) was encountered at depths between 4- and 8-feet bgs and extended to the bottom of the borings at 10- and 25-feet bgs. Atterberg (plastic and liquid) limits were performed on six samples obtained at depths between 2- and 6-feet bgs. The plasticity index of these samples was between 21 and 50 with an average of 30 indicating that the soils generally have a moderate to high potential for shrinking and swelling with changes in soil moisture content. 3.3 Groundwater The borings were advanced using auger drilling and intermittent sampling methods in order to observe groundwater seepage levels. Groundwater was not encountered at any of the four borings at the time of drilling. Future construction activities may alter the surface and subsurface drainage characteristics of this site. It is difficult to accurately predict the magnitude of subsurface water fluctuations that might occur based upon short-term observations. Project No. 07-2184 Page 2 The groundwater level should be expected to fluctuate throughout the years with variations in precipitation. 1 4.0 Analysis and Recommendations 4.1 Seismic Site Classification The seismic site classification is based on the 2006 International Building Code (IBC) and is a classification of the site based on the type of soils encountered at the site and their engineering properties. IPer Table 1613.5.2 of the 2006 IBC, the seismic site classification for this site is D. 4.2 Potential Vertical Soil Movements Potential Vertical Rise (PVR) calculations were performed in general accordance with the Texas Department of Transportation (TxDOT) Method Tex-124-E. The Tex-124-E method is empirical and is based on the Atterberg limits and moisture content of the subsurface soils. The PVR calculated using the referenced method is about 3-inches assuming a dry moisture condition. 4.3 Foundation System - General The proposed building may be supported on slab foundations, shallow footings, or on underreamed drilled piers. Recommendations for the three foundation types are presented below. 4.3.1 Foundation System - Slab The proposed building can be supported on a reinforced ground -supported slab foundation. The slab foundation should be conventionally reinforced or post -tension reinforced. The slab foundation should be designed with exterior and interior grade beams adequate to provide sufficient rigidity to the foundation system to sustain the vertical soil movements expected at this site as described above. All grade beams and floor slabs should be adequately reinforced with steel to minimize cracking as normal movements occur in the foundation soils. The slab should be designed using a net dead load plus sustained live load bearing pressure of 1,750 pounds per square foot (psf) or a net total load pressure of 2,600 psf, whichever condition results in a larger bearing surface. These bearing pressures are Project No. 07-2184 Page 3 based on a safety factor of 3 and 2, respectively, against shear failure of the foundation bearing soils. Grade beams should be founded a minimum of 2-feet below existing grade. A slab constructed on -grade will be subject to potential slab movements of about 3- inches based upon the information gathered during this investigation. Subgrade treatment will be required to reduce the PVR to 1-inch or less. Subgrade treatment recommendations are provided in the section titled "Slab -on -Grade Recommendations". The recommended foundation design parameters based on information published in the Post Tensioning Institute (PTI) Design and Construction of Post -Tensioned Slabs -on - Ground, 2"d Edition, are as follows: Edge Moisture Variation Distance Center Lift 5.0 feet Edge Lift 5.0 feet Differential Swell Center Lift: 2.2 inches Edge Lift: 1.5 inches 4.3.2 Foundation System — Shallow Footings Shallow strip and spread footing foundations can be used for support of the proposed building bearing at a depth of 2-feet beneath existing grade. Continuous strip footings can be proportioned using a net dead load plus sustained live load bearing pressure of 1,750 psf or a net total load bearing pressure of 2,600 psf, whichever condition results in a larger bearing surface. Individual spread footings can be proportioned using a net dead load plus sustained live load bearing pressure of 2,250 psf or a net total load bearing pressure of 3,350 psf, whichever condition results in a larger bearing surface. These bearing pressures are based on a safety factor of 3 and 2, respectively. Individual spread footings should be at least 30 inches wide, and continuous strip footing foundations should be at least 16 inches wide. Although a detailed settlement analysis is beyond the scope of this study, settlement for foundations constructed as described above should be about 1 inch or less. Resistance to lateral loads may be provided by the soil adjacent to the footings. We recommend using an equivalent fluid weight of 200 pounds per cubic foot (pcf) for lateral resistance. An allowable coefficient of sliding friction of 0.3 between the concrete footings and underlying soil may be combined with the passive resistance. The geotechnical engineer should monitor foundation construction to verify conditions are as anticipated and that the materials encountered are suitable for support of foundations. Soft or unsuitable soils encountered at the foundation bearing level should be removed to expose suitable, firm soil. Foundation excavations should be dry and free of loose material. Excavations for foundations should be filled with concrete before Project No. 07-2184 Page 4 the end of the workday or sooner if necessary to prevent deterioration of the bearing surface. Prolonged exposure or inundation of the bearing surface with water will result in, changes in strength and compressibility characteristics. If delays occur, the excavation should be deepened as necessary and cleaned, in order to provide a fresh bearing surface. If more than 24 hours of exposure of the bearing surface is anticipated in the excavation, a "mud slab" should be used to protect the bearing surfaces. If a mud slab is used, the foundation excavations should initially be over -excavated by approximately 4 inches and a lean concrete mud slab of approximately 4 inches in thickness should be placed in the bottom of the excavation immediately following exposure of the bearing surface by excavation. The mud slab will protect the bearing surface, maintain more uniform moisture in the subgrade, facilitate dewatering of excavations if required, and provide a working surface for the placement of formwork and reinforcing steel. 4.3.3 Foundation System — Drilled Piers Drilled pier foundations (auger -excavated, underreamed, steel reinforced, cast -in -place concrete piers) bearing in native soil may be utilized at this site for the proposed building. The underreamed piers should be founded at a depth of 8- to 10-feet beneath the existing grade. However, borings B-1 and B-4 encountered clayey sand at a depth of 6-feet bgs. Therefore, the shafts and underreamed portion of the piers may not remain stable and potentially collapse at depths below 6-feet. If the excavations will not remain stable, it may be necessary to construct the piers as straight shafts or reduce the bearing depth to 6- to 8-feet bgs. The construction difficulties, and the impact to the project schedule and cost, that may be associated with drilled piers should be weighed when considering the selection of drilled pier foundations. - The piers may be proportioned using a net dead load plus sustained live load bearing pressure of 3,000 psf or a net total load pressure of 4,500 psf, whichever condition results in a larger bearing surface. These bearing pressures are based on a safety factor of 3 and 2, respectively, against shear failure of the foundation bearing soils. Foundation settlement for drilled piers constructed as described above should be less than 1 inch. Because of the potential for the upper two feet of the soil to shrink and pull away from drilled piers during dry periods, we recommend soil resistance to lateral loads on drilled piers be ignored in the upper 2-feet of the soil profile. For resistance of lateral loads on drilled piers, we recommend the following parameters that include a factor of safety of 3. Project No. 07-2184 Page 5 Effective Allowable Angle of Strain at Horizontal Modulus of Depth Soil Type Soil Unit Cohesion Internal % Peak Subgrade Reaction (ft) Weight (psf) Friction, m Strength, (tons per cubic foot) (pcf) (degrees) Eso 0-2 Sandy Clay 120 0 0 NA NA 2 — 10 1 Sandy Clay 120 525 0 0.007 110 (1) — Effective soil unit weight based on assumed groundwater depth greater than 10-feet. The uplift resistance provided by an underreamed drilled pier is the sum of resistance provided by the shear strength of the soil, the weight of the soil above the bell, and the weight of the drilled pier itself. The following equation may be used to calculate the allowable uplift resistance: Fa=cN„A„+Ws +Wc FS, FS, Where: Fa = allowable uplift resistance, Ibs c = allowable cohesion, psf Nu = bearing capacity factor = 3.5Db —< 9 B b Db = depth to base of bell, ft Bb = diameter of the bell, ft Au = projected area of bell, ft2 = 7r(eb 4 - eS Bs = diameter of the drilled pier shaft, ft Ws = weight of soil above bell, Ibs Wc = weight of drilled pier, lbs FS1, FS2 = safety factors A safety factor of 3 has been applied to the allowable cohesion value and is appropriate for sustained loading conditions. However, the allowable cohesion values may be increased by 50 percent, resulting in a safety factor of 2, for transient loading conditions. We recommend a soil weight safety factor, FS1, of 1.2 and a drilled pier weight safety factor, FS2, of 1.1. The uplift force on the piers due to swelling of the active clays can be approximated by assuming a uniform uplift pressure of 900 psf acting over the perimeter of the shaft to a depth of 8 feet. The shafts should contain sufficient full length reinforcing steel to resist uplift forces. The piers should be provided with an underream diameter to shaft diameter ratio not less than 2 to 1, and not greater than 3 to 1. For uplift considerations, piers should not be spaced closer than two underream diameters (edge to edge) based on the diameter of the larger underream. Closer pier spacings may result in reduced uplift capacity. We should be contacted to review closer pier spacings on a case -by -case basis. Project No. 07-2184 Page 6 The construction of all piers should be observed as a means to verify compliance with design assumptions and to verify: 1. the bearing stratum; 2. underream size; 3. the removal of all smear zones and cuttings; 4. that groundwater seepage, when encountered, is correctly handled; and 5. that the shafts are vertical (within acceptable tolerance). Groundwater was not encountered at any of the boring locations during the subsurface investigation. Therefore, groundwater may be encountered during pier excavation, and the risk of groundwater seepage is increased during or after periods of precipitation. Submersible pumps may be capable of controlling seepage in the pier excavation to allow for concrete placement. Concrete should be placed in the shafts immediately after excavation to reduce the risk of significant groundwater seepage, deterioration of the foundation -bearing surface, and underream collapse. We should be contacted for further evaluation and recommendations if materials other than clay are encountered at the design foundation bearing level, or if groundwater seepage and/or underream collapse occurs. Concrete should be placed immediately after the excavation has been completed. In no event should a pier excavation be allowed to remain open for more than 8 hours. Concrete should have a slump of 5 to 7 inches, and should not be allowed to strike the shaft sidewall or steel reinforcement during placement. i4.3.4 Slab -on -Grade Recommendations Based on the information gathered during this investigation, a slab constructed on - grade will be subject to potential slab movements of about 3-inches. �. To reduce the PVR to 1-inch or less, we recommend that the upper 3-feet of the building pad subgrade consist of select fill. In areas where fill of less than 3-feet is required to bring the building pad to grade, we recommend that the existing soils be excavated to a depth of 3-feet below the top of the finished building pad subgrade and replaced with select fill. Based on the laboratory testing conducted for this investigation, the native clay soils will not meet specifications for select fill outlined in the section titled "Fill Recommendations". Therefore, select fill will have to be imported from off -site. However, as an alternative to importing select fill, the native soil may be blended with lime to reduce the plasticity to meet select fill requirements. Based on our experience, we expect that it will require between 3- and 5-percent lime (by dry unit weight) to areduce the plasticity of the native clay soils to select fill requirements. However, we recommend that a lime series determination test be performed to determine the amount of lime required. Project No. 07-2184 Page 7 The subgrade is prone to drying after being exposed and should be kept moist prior to slab placement. A moisture barrier should be used beneath the slab foundation in areas where floor coverings will be utilized (such as, but not limited to, wood flooring, tile, linoleum, and carpeting). 4.4 Pavement Design Recommendations Recommendations for rigid pavement and preparation of the pavement subgrade are provided in the following sections. 4.4.1 Rigid Pavement A minimum 5-inch section of Portland cement concrete (PCC) is recommended for parking areas for automobiles and light trucks, and 6 inches for drive lanes and areas subjected to light to medium truck traffic. A minimum 7-inch section is recommended in areas receiving frequent heavy trucks and dumpsters. Concrete with a minimum 28 day compressive strength of 3,500 pounds per square inch should be used. 4.4.2 Recommendations for Pavement Subgrade All topsoil, existing pavement and structures, vegetation, and any unsuitable materials should be removed. The pavement subgrade should be proofrolled with a fully loaded tandem axle dump truck or similar pneumatic -tire equipment to locate areas of loose subgrade. In areas to be cut, the proofroll should be performed after the final grade is established. In areas to be filled, the proofroll should be performed prior to fill placement fill and after the final pavement subgrade is established. Areas of loose or soft subgrade encountered in the proofroll should be removed and replaced with engineered fill, or moisture conditioned (dried or wetted, as needed) and compacted in place. Low plastic sandy clay is expected to be encountered or exposed at the pavement subgrade. The pavement subgrade should be placed in loose lifts not exceeding 8- inches and should be uniformly compacted to a minimum of 95 percent maximum dry density (per ASTM D-698) and within ±2 percent of the optimum moisture content. If pumping of the subgrade is observed, or the subgrade is difficult to compact, we recommend a minimum of 6 percent lime (by dry soil weight) be blended into the subgrade to a depth of 6 inches to improve the subgrade performance. Lime stabilization should be performed in accordance with Harris County Standard Specifications, Item 220, "Lime Stabilized Subgrade", or equivalent. Project No. 07-2184 Page 8 4.5 Fill Recommendations Any fill placed in the building pad area should consist of select fill. Select fill should consist of soil with a liquid limit less than 35 and a Plasticity Index between 7 and 20. The select fill should be placed in loose lifts not exceeding 8-inches and should be compacted to at least 95 percent maximum dry density (per ASTM D-698) and at a moisture content within f2 percent of the optimum moisture content. The subgrade to receive select fill should be scarified to a depth of 6 inches and compacted to at least 95 percent maximum dry density (per ASTM D-698) and at a moisture content between optimum and 3 percent above optimum. General fill may be placed in improved areas outside of the building pad. General fill should consist of material approved by the Soils Engineer and with a liquid limit less than 50. General fill should be placed in loose lifts not exceeding 8-inches and should be uniformly compacted to a minimum of 95 percent maximum dry density ( per ASTM D-698) and within t2 percent of the optimum moisture content. Select fill and general fill should consist of those materials meeting the requirements stated. Select fill and general fill should not contain material greater than 4-inches in any direction, debris, vegetation, waste material, environmentally contaminated material, or any other unsuitable material. Materials considered unsuitable for use as select fill or general fill include low and high plastic silt (ML and MH), silty clay (CL-ML), organic clay and silt (OH and OL), and 1 highly organic soils such as peat (Pt). These soils may be used for site grading and restoration in unimproved areas as approved by the Soils Engineer. Soil placed in unimproved areas should be placed in loose lifts not exceeding 10-inches and should be compacted to at least 92 percent maximum dry density (per ASTM D-698) and at a moisture content within t4 percentage points of optimum. 1 4.6 General Every attempt should be made to limit the extreme wetting or drying of the subsurface soils because swelling and shrinkage of these soils will result. Standard construction practices of providing good surface water drainage should be used. A positive slope of the ground away from any foundation should be provided. Also, ditches or swales should be provided to carry the run-off water both during and after construction. Lawn areas should be watered moderately, without allowing the clay soils to become too dry or too wet. Stormwater runoff should be collected by gutters and downspouts, and should discharge away from the buildings. Root systems from trees and shrubs can draw a substantial amount of water from the clay soils at this site, causing the clays to dry and shrink. This could cause settlement beneath grade -supported slabs such .as floors, walks and paving. Trees and large IProject No. 07-2184 Page 9 bushes should be located a distance equal to at least one-half their anticipated mature height away from grade slabs. 4.7 Density Tests Field Density tests should be made by the Soils Engineer or his representative. Density tests should be taken in each layer of the compacted material below the disturbed surface. If the materials fail to meet the density specified, the course should be reworked as necessary to obtain the specified compaction. 5.0 Site Preparation and Grading 5.1 Site Preparation Preparation of the site for construction operations should include the removal and proper disposal of all obstructions that would hinder preparation of the site for construction. These obstructions should include all abandoned structures, foundations, debris, water wells, septic tanks and loose material. It is the intent of these recommendations to provide for the removal and disposal of all obstructions not specifically provided for elsewhere by the plans and specifications. All concrete, trees, stumps, brush, abandoned structures, roots, vegetation, rubbish and any other undesirable matter should be removed and disposed of properly. All vegetation should be removed and the exposed surface should be scarified to an additional depth of at least 6 inches. It is the intent of these recommendations to provide a loose surface with no features that would tend to prevent uniform compaction by the equipment to be used. 5.2 Site Grading Site grading operations, where required, should be performed in accordance with the recommendations provided in this report. The site grading plans and construction should strive to achieve positive drainage around all sides of the proposed buildings. Inadequate drainage around structures built on -grade can cause excessive vertical differential movements to occur. 6.0 Construction Observations In any geotechnical investigation, the design recommendations are based on a limited amount of information about the subsurface conditions. In the analysis, the Project No. 07-2184 Page 10 geotechnical engineer must assume the subsurface conditions are similar to the conditions encountered in the borings. However, during construction quite often anomalies in the subsurface conditions are revealed. Therefore, it is recommended that LFC, Inc. be retained to observe earthwork and foundation installation and perform materials evaluation and testing during the construction phase of the project. This enables the geotechnical engineer to stay abreast of the project and to be readily available to evaluate unanticipated conditions, to conduct additional tests if required and, when necessary, to recommend alternative solutions to unanticipated conditions. Until these construction phase services are performed by the project geotechnical engineer, the recommendations contained in this report on such items as final foundation bearing elevations, final depth of undercut of expansive soils for non - expansive earth fill pads, and other such subsurface -related recommendations should be considered as preliminary. It is proposed that construction phase observation and materials testing commence by the project geotechnical engineer at the outset of the project. Experience has shown that the most suitable method for procuring these services is for the owner to contract directly with the project geotechnical engineer. This results in a clear, direct line of communication between the owner and the owner's design engineers, and the geotechnical engineer. 7.0 Report Closure The analyses, conclusions and recommendations contained in this report are based on site conditions as they existed at the time of the field investigation and further on the assumption that the exploratory borings are representative of the subsurface conditions throughout the site; that is, the subsurface conditions everywhere are not significantly different from those disclosed by the borings at the time they were completed. If during construction, different subsurface conditions from those encountered in our borings are observed, or appear to be present in excavations, we must be advised promptly so that we can review these conditions and reconsider our recommendations where necessary. If there is a substantial lapse of time between submission of this report and the start of the work at the site, if conditions have changed due either to natural causes or to construction operations at or adjacent to the site, or if structure locations, structural loads or finish grades are changed, we urge that we be promptly informed and retained to review our report to determine the applicability of the conclusions and recommendations, considering the changed conditions and/or time lapse. iFurther, it is urged that LFC, Inc. be retained to review those portions of the plans and specifications for this particular project that pertain to earthwork and foundations as a means to determine whether the plans and specifications are consistent with the recommendations contained in this report. In addition, we are available to observe construction, particularly the compaction of structural fill, or backfill and the construction �J Project No. 07-2184 Page 11 of foundations as recommended in the report, and such other field observations as might be necessary. This report has been prepared for the exclusive use of the Client and their designated agents for specific application to design of, this project. We have used that degree of care and skill ordinarily exercised under similar conditions by reputable members of our profession practicing in the same or similar locality. No warranty, expressed or implied, is made or intended. Project No. 07-2184 Page 12 Appendix A - Project Location Diagram I I h1 N . PROJECT LOCATION DIAGRAM DCI-ACE CENTER Wellborn Road and Navarro Drive, College Station, Texas DATE: 12/19/07 Project No. 07-2184 PROJECT LOCATION DIAGRAM DCI-ACE CENTER Wellborn Road and Navarro Drive, College Station, Texas DATE: 12/19/07 Project No. 07-2184 Appendix B - Boring Location Diagram —— --- �-- y — b _ r --- 1 �I 1 I II I I � I 1 • I. B_01_I_ B-02 I• B-03 I 1, 13 C:f U elf E4 iI In 1 I I I r z B-06 2 B-04 .p. I I 25OU9LPIG lM� I u'.ef _ I SMW EDGE I N 4PO4'31' W 715.30' N 4-T57-17' Y! 194.t11' SCALE WELLBORN ROAD B-01 through B-03 drilled to 25-foot depth D ZO -52) /'06 B-04 through B-06 drilled to 10-foot depth F.° BORING LOCATION DIAGRAM Project No. 07-2184 DCI-ACE CENTER Date - 12/27/07 Wellborn Road and Navarro Drive, College Station, Texas I Appendix C - Boring Log(s) BORING NUMBER B-01 LFC, Inc. PAGE 1 OF 1 LFC* CLIENT Heights Venture Architects, LLP PROJECT NAME DCI-ACE Center PROJECT NUMBER 07-2184 PROJECT LOCATION Wellborn Rd. & Navarro Dr., College Station, TX DATE STARTED 113/08 COMPLETED 1/3/08 GROUND ELEVATION HOLE SIZE DRILLING CONTRACTOR Van and Sons GROUND WATER LEVELS: DRILLING METHOD Auger 0-15 feet AT TIME OF DRILLING - LOGGED BY J. Reyes CHECKED BY DJP AT END OF DRILLING -- NOTES Groundwater not encountered at time of drilling. AFTER DRILLING - ATTERBERG E- a o z W o LIMITS W -. _ 3:0 �m _ wo �ZJ w EL �C W ZW Qc F— . :) Z ; U w � EL p MATERIAL DESCRIPTION � g > Cy O � Q w � > � z L U) W fit- � � 0'W � � 2z OVA m0z Lv Ov }v oz 69 �� v~iz w p w O o 20 � a � o o p U g— EL z U- 0 Medium stiff, moist, dark gray, Low Plastic Sandy CLAY (CL) with organics from 0 to 2 feet ST 0.75 0.3 20 Becomes stiff to very stiff ST 1.5 0.7 16 42 12 31 Becomes gray with iron stains 5 ST 3.25 1.3 16 Medium dense, light gray, fine grained, Poorly Graded Clayey SAND (SC) / Sandy CLAY (CL) ST 2.25 0.4 23 2.75 0.4 17 ST 10 ST 4.5 0.8 18 15 Bottom of hole at 15.0 feet. BORING NUMBER B-02 LFGLFC, Inc. PAGE 1 OF 1 CLIENT Heights Venture Architects, LLP PROJECT NAME DCI-ACE Center PROJECT NUMBER 07-2184 PROJECT LOCATION Wellborn Rd. & Navarro Dr. College Station TX DATE STARTED 12/21/07 COMPLETED 12/21/07 GROUND ELEVATION HOLE SIZE DRILLING CONTRACTOR Van and Sons GROUND WATER LEVELS: DRILLING METHOD Auger 0-25 feet AT TIME OF DRILLING --- LOGGED BY J. Reyes CHECKED BY DJP AT END OF DRILLING — NOTES Groundwater not encountered at time of drilling. AFTER DRILLING ATTERBERG I- (L z W LIMITS w a 'W 1- z z ¢oVCn O" U Oz►- ~ F- nMATERIAL DESCRIPTION > W J = W vz $W W-w p- m0QU-w �aZ W UZ Oz n JNW U) O 20 J cc a o U a g— z 0 1 1 a M Stiff, moist, dark gray, Low Plastic Sandy CLAY (CL) with organics from 0 to 2-feet ST 1.75 0.7 21 3.0 1.3 19 ST Becomes light gray wtih iron stains and silt seams 5 ST 1.75 0.7 22 49 18 31 1.0 0.3 22 ST Stiff, moist, light brown, High Plastic Sandy CLAY (CH) with iron stains and silt seams ST 3.75 1.3 32 10 0 e a t7 iBecomes very stiff ST 4.5 2.3 30 N ti 15 z C9 'a W Becomes dark gray with silt seams U W d m ST 3.25 1.3 27 20 0 0 3 c� 0 J U F O w U' W ST 4.5 2.3 35 _N � 25 Bottom of hole at 25.0 feet. BORING NUMBER B-03 LFC* LFC, Inc. PAGE 1 OF 1 CLIENT Heights Venture Architects, LLP PROJECT NAME DCI-ACE Center PROJECT NUMBER 07-2184 PROJECT LOCATION Wellborn Rd. & Navarro Dr., College Station, TX DATE STARTED 12/21/07 COMPLETED 12/21/07 GROUND ELEVATION HOLE SIZE DRILLING CONTRACTOR Van and Sons GROUND WATER LEVELS: DRILLING METHOD Auger 0-25 feet AT TIME OF DRILLING --- LOGGED BY J. Reyes CHECKED BY DJP AT END OF DRILLING -- NOTES Groundwater not encountered at time of drilling. AFTER DRILLING -- ATTERBERG F- a o W z w o LIMITS 12 H.� =C7 Co _ LU to �Z.=J f-� §2 F--� � =Z U Z^o a� a 0 MATERIAL DESCRIPTION w g > a 0 D¢ w� >� Z n N w � f- � t= c� w U 2z Uz F- 200 J < L 0 o �J o-az W 0 Stiff to very stiff, moist, gray, Low Plastic Sandy CLAY (CL) with organics from 0 to 2 feet ST 2.5 0.8 17 4.5 2.3 19 ST Stiff to very stiff, moist, gray, High Plastic CLAY (CH) with 5 iron stains and silt seams ST 2.5 1.3 26 75 24 50 Becomes light brown ST 2.5 1.0 40 4.5 2.3 36 ST 10 Stiff to very stiff, moist, brown, High Plastic Sandy CLAY (CH) with silt seams ST 3.5 0.8 31 15 Becomes dark gray ST 4.5 2.3 26 20 ST 4.5 2.3 25 25 Bottom of hole at 25.0 feet. BORING NUMBER B-04 00 LFC, Inc. PAGE 1 OF 1 CLIENT Heights Venture Architects, LLP PROJECT NAME DCI-ACE Center PROJECT NUMBER 07-2184 PROJECT LOCATION Wellborn Rd. & Navarro Dr., College Station, TX DATE STARTED 1/3/08 COMPLETED 1/3/08 GROUND ELEVATION HOLE SIZE DRILLING CONTRACTOR Van and Sons GROUND WATER LEVELS: DRILLING METHOD Auger 0-15 feet AT TIME OF DRILLING -- , LOGGED BY J. Reyes CHECKED BY DJP AT END OF DRILLING NOTES Groundwater not encountered at time of drilling. AFTER DRILLING ATTERBERG I- o- o z w o LIMITS w w �— c) }F-uj W r U) a z I-.� �C7 LU H- U O� wm �Z-j > y Z NZ ❑ CL O MATERIAL DESCRIPTION W CO > O 0 5¢ w v= a � F_ F- F- v 6 U Z- 9-- a-� O� ��_ I—p 0` co0> Uv O Oz a� CO 0 EZ 0v UZ O H � •2z �z W � a o v o- a U. 0 Medium stiff, moist, dark gray, Low Plastic Sandy CLAY (CL) with organics from 0 to 2 feet ST 2.5 0.4 19 Becomes medium stiff to stiff ST 1.75 0.5 20 35 15 21 Becomes gray with iron stains 5 ST 1.75 0.7 20 Medium dense, light gray, fine grained, Poorly Graded Clayey SAND (SC) / Sandy CLAY (CL) ST 1.5 0.4 18 1.75 0.3 21 ST 10 0 c� 0 z 0) ST 4.0 0.5 23 coo c 15 Z Bottom of hole at 15.0 feet. 'a z z U LU U O m N• A O cr 0 3 c� 0 J x U 0 O Uj y J W BORING NUMBER B-05 LFC-* LFC, Inc.PAGE 1 OF 1 CLIENT Heights Venture Architects, LLP PROJECT NAME DCI-ACE Center PROJECT NUMBER 07-2184 PROJECT LOCATION Wellborn Rd. & Navarro Dr., College Station, TX DATE STARTED 12/21/07 COMPLETED 12/21/07 GROUND ELEVATION HOLE SIZE DRILLING CONTRACTOR Van and Sons GROUND WATER LEVELS: DRILLING METHOD Auger 0-10 feet AT TIME OF DRILLING --- LOGGED BY J. Reyes CHECKED BY DJP AT END OF DRILLING -- NOTES Groundwater not encountered at time of drilling. AFTER DRILLING - - ATTERBERG I — a o z w o LIMITS w } ~Ua z: F}- a z Zv�w Ix E I- p wo 0W Z -� " j y a w w 5 X w 0 ,. Uw Z m L)Z O O �� J � J a Z a a z 0 Very stiff, moist, dark gray, Low Plastic Sandy CLAY (CL) with organics from 0 to 2 feet ST 4.0 1.8 23 3.0 1.3 16 41 19 22 ST Stiff to very stiff, moist, light gray, High Plastic Sandy CLAY 5 (CH) with silt seams ST 1.75 0.7 32 3.75 1.3 37 ST Becomes light brown ST 4.5 2.3 30 10 i I Bottom of hole at 10.0 feet. BORING NUMBER B-06 LFC, Inc. PAGE 1 OF 1 LF0 CLIENT Heights Venture Architects, LLP PROJECT NAME DCI-ACE Center PROJECT NUMBER 07-2184 PROJECT LOCATION Wellborn Rd. & Navarro Dr., College Station, TX DATE STARTED 12/21/07 COMPLETED 12/21/07 GROUND ELEVATION HOLE SIZE DRILLING CONTRACTOR Van and Sons GROUND WATER LEVELS: DRILLING METHOD Auger 0-10 feet AT TIME OF DRILLING -- LOGGED BY J. Reyes CHECKED BY DJP AT END OF DRILLING -- NOTES Groundwater not encountered at time of drilling. AFTER DRILLING -- ATTERBERG E— a o W w o LIMITS W w wa z aO Z 00- Upw - ❑ a❑ Co 0� <z Uz ° 2aaW o w 0 M : z w n x a ❑ (L a 0 z Stiff to very stiff, moist, dark gray, Low Plastic Sandy CLAY (CL) with organics from 0 to 2 feet ST 2.0 1.0 19 Becomes gray with silt seams ST 2.75 1.3 25 47 22 25 5 ST 2.5 1.3 24 4.0 2.0 23 ST Very stiff, moist, light gray, High Plastic Sandy CLAY (CH) with iron stains and silt seams ST 4.0 1.8 32 10 Bottom of hole at 10.0 feet. e e 0 S c m N z t� IL' C7 d U U Q U 0 N r 0 O 3 0 0 J U F W f7 O W y W I Appendix D - Unified Soil Classification System UNIFIED SOIL CLASSIFICATION SYSTEM LFC-* UNIFIED SOIL CLASSIFICATION AND SYMBOL CHART COARSE -GRAINED SOILS (more than 50% of material Is larger than No. 200 sieve size.) Clean Gravels (Less than 5%fines) ` . GW Well -graded gravels, gravel -sand mixtures, little or no fines GRAVELS More than50% GP Poody`9rededgravels. gravel -sand of coarse mixtures. tittle or no fines fraction larger Gravels with fines (More than 12% fines) than No. 4 sieve size GM Silly gravels, gravel -sand -sift mixtures GC Clayey gravels, gravel -sand -day mixtures Clean Sends Less than 5% fines) SW Well -graded sands, gravelly sands, little or no fines SANDS Sp Ply graded sands, gravelly sands, 50% or more of coarse little or no fines Sands with fines More than 12% fines fraction smaller than No. 4 sieve size SM Silly sands, sand -slit mixtures Sc 51 Clayey sands, sand -day mbrturss FINE-GRAINED SOILS (50% or more of material is smaller than No. 200 sieve size.) Inorganic silts and very fine sands, rock MILflour, slltyof clayey fine sands or clayey SILTS slits with slight plasticity AND Inorganic days of low to medium CLAYS LlqukJ Ilmit CL plasticity, graveby clays, sandy days, lass than silly days, lean days 50% — OL Organic silts and organic silly days of low plasticity Inorganic silts, ndcacaous or MH diatomaceous fine sandy or sllty soils, SILTS elasticslits AND CH Inorganic days a high plasticity, fat CLAYS Liquid limit days 50% OH Organic clays of medium to high or greater plasticity, organic elks HIGHLY la" PT Peal and other highly organic soils LABORATORY CLASSIFICATION CRITERIA D 60 D30 Cu = greater than 4; Cc = between 1 and 3 GW D10 D1DID60 GP Not meeting all gradation requirements for GW GM Atterbarg limits below "A' line or P.I. less than 4 •A' lone with P.I. between 4 and 7 are borderline came requiring use of dual symbols GC Atterbarg limits above'A' line with P.I. greater than 7 D 60 D30 Cu = greater than 4; Cc = between 1 and 3 SW D10 D10xD60 Sp Not meeting all gradation requirements for GW SM Atasrberg omits below 'A" Limits plating in shaded zone IIns or P.I. less than 4 with P I. between 4 and 7 are borderline cases requiring use of dual symbols_ Sc Allerberg limits above'A' line with P.I. greater than 7 Determine percentages of sand and gravel from gral"ize curve. Depe"ng on percentage of firms (iradion smaller than No. 200 slave size), coame-grained sobs are dasslfied as follows: Less than 5 percent .............................. GW. GP, SW, SP More bran 12 percent ............................... GM, GC, SM, SC 5 to 12 percent ................. Borderline rases rmquiring dual symbols PLASTICITY CHART 60 50 a_ CH lit 40 ALINE: PI = 0.73(LL-20 ? 30 CL MH80H 20 m 10 a ML&OL 00 10 20 30 40 50 60 70 60 90 100 LIQUID OMIT (LL) (%) TERMS DESCRIBING SOIL CONSISTENCY Fine Grained Soils Coarse Grained Soils Penetrometer Penetration Resistance Description Reading (tsfl 0.0 to 1.0 I(b owslft) 0 to 4 Description Very Loose Relative Density Soft 0 to 20% Firm 1.0 to 1.5 4 to 10 Loose 20 to 40% Stiff 1.5 to 3.0 10 to 30 Medium Dense 40 to 70% Very Stiff 3.0 to 4.5 30 to 50 Dense 70 to 90% Hard 4.5+ Over 50 Very Dense 90 to 100e.6 I. Appendix E - Field Operations and Laboratory Testing Field Operations Subsurface conditions were defined using the sample boring(s) located as shown on the Boring Location Diagram (Appendix A). The boring(s) were advanced between sample intervals using continuous flight auger drilling procedures. The results of each boring are shown graphically on the Boring Logs (Appendix B). Sample depth, description, and soil classification based on the Unified Soil Classification System (Appendix C) are shown on the Boring Logs. For cohesive soils, relatively undisturbed samples were obtained with Shelby tube samplers in general accordance with ASTM D1587 at the locations shown on the Boring Logs. The Shelby tube sampler consists of a thin -walled steel tube with a sharp cutting edge connected to a head equipped with a ball valve threaded for rod connection. The tube is pushed into the undisturbed soils by the hydraulic pulldown of the drilling rig. The soil specimens were extruded from the tube in the field, logged, tested for consistency using a hand penetrometer, sealed, and packaged to maintain "in situ" moisture content. The consistency of cohesive soil samples was evaluated in the field using a calibrated hand penetrometer. In this test a 0.25 inch diameter piston is pushed into the undisturbed sample at a constant rate to a depth of 0.25 inch. The results of these tests are tabulated at respective sample depths on the logs. When the capacity of the penetrometer is exceeded, the value is tabulated as 4.5+. Samples of granular and cohesive materials were obtained using split -barrel sampling procedures in general accordance with ASTM 01586. In the split -barrel procedure, a disturbed sample is obtained in a standard 2 inch OD split barrel sampling spoon driven into 18 inches into the ground using a 140-pound hammer falling freely 30 inches. The number of blows for the last 12 inches of a standard 18-inch penetration is recorded as the Standard Penetration Test resistance (N-value). The N-values are recorded on the boring logs at the depth of sampling. The samples were sealed and returned to our laboratory for further examination and testing. Groundwater observations are shown on the boring logs. Upon completion of the boring, the boreholes were backfilled from the top and plugged at the surface. Laboratory Testing LFC, Inc. performs visual classification and any of a number of laboratory tests, as appropriate, to define pertinent engineering characteristics of the soils encountered. Tests are performed in general accordance with American Society for Testing and Materials (ASTM) procedures and results are included at the respective sample depths on the boring logs. Laboratory tests and procedures routinely utilized, as appropriate, for geotechnical investigations include: • ASTM D421 — Standard Practice for Dry Preparation of Soil Samples for Particle - Size Analysis and Determination of Soil Constants • ASTM D422 — Standard Test Method for Particle -Size Analysis of Soils • ASTM D1140 — Standard Test Methods for Amount of Material in Soils Finer than the No. 200 (75-pm) Sieve • ASTM D2166 — Standard Test Method for Unconfined Compressive Strength of Cohesive Soil • ASTM D2216 — Standard Test Method for Laboratory Determination of Water (Moisture) Content of Soil and Rock by Mass • ASTM D2217 — Standard Practice for Wet Preparation of Soil Samples for Particle -Size Analysis and Determination of Soil Constants • ASTM D2487 — Standard Classification of Soils for Engineering Purposes (Unified Soil Classification System) • ASTM D2850 — Standard Test Method for Unconsolidated-U nd rained Triaxial Compression Test on Cohesive Soil • ASTM D4220 — Standard Practices for Preserving and Transporting Soil Samples • ASTM D4318 — Standard Test Methods for Liquid Limit, Plastic Limit, and Plasticity Index of Soils • ASTM D4643 — Standard Test Method for Determination of Water (Moisture) Content of Soil by the Microwave Oven Method • Soil Strength Determination Using a Torvane Permit # Permit Date COMcheck Software Version 3.2.1 Envelope Compliance Certificate 20031ECC Report Date: 03/12/08 Data filename: C:\Documents and Settings\BAlcantara\Desktop\Navarro retail.cck Section 1: Project Information Project Title: Navarro West Center Construction Site: Owner/Agent: Designer/Contractor: Wellboume Road and Navarro Road David Cottrell III Michael Kravetz - Project Administrator College Station, TX David Cottrell Investment Heights Venture Architects, L.L.P. 7507 Highmeadow 1111 North Loop West, Suite 800 Houston, TX 77063 Houston, TX 77008 713-783-5052 713-8601103 Section 2: General Information Building Location (for weather data): College Station, Texas Climate Zone: 4b Heating Degree Days (base 65 degrees F): 1788 Cooling Degree Days (base 65 degrees F): 2776 Project Type: New Construction Vertical Glazing / Wall Area Pct.: 11% ' Building Tvge Floor Area Retail Sales, Wholesale Showroom 19957 Section 3: Requirements Checklist Climate -Specific" Component Name/Description Roof 1: Non -Wood Joist/RafterfTruss Exterior Wall 1 North: Solid Concrete or Masonry — 8", Furring: None Door 1: Solid Exterior Wall 2 East: Solid Concrete or Masonry — 8", Furring: None Door 2: Glass, Clear, SHGC 0.81, PF 0.86 Exterior Wall 3: Solid Concrete or Masonry <= 8", Furring: None Window 1: Metal Frame:Single Pane, Clear, SHGC 0.81, PF 0.75 Door 3: Solid Exterior Wall 4: Solid Concrete or Masonry <= 8", Furring: None Window 2: Metal Frame:Single Pane, Clear, SHGC 0.81, PF 0.70 Window 3: Metal Frame:Single Pane, Clear, SHGC 0.81, PF 0.30 Floor 1: Slab-On-Grade:Unheated Gross Area Cavity Cont. Proposed Budget or R Value R Value U-Factor U-Factor Perimeter 19957 0.0 18.5 0.052 0.063 4136 — 0.4 0.413 0.207 63 -- — 1.000 0.339 2136 — 0.4 0.413 0.207 42 — — 1.000 1.230 2136 -- 0.4 0.413 0.207 155 — — 1.000 1.230 124 — — 1.000 0.339 5069 — 0.4 0.413 0.207 267 — — 1.000 1.230 1000 — — 1.000 1.230 695 — — — — Navarro West Center Page 1 of 2 (a) Budget U-factors are used for software baseline calculations ONLY, and are not code requirements. Air Leakage, Component Certification, and Vapor Retarder Requirements: ❑ 1. All joints and penetrations are caulked, gasketed or covered with a moisture vapor -permeable wrapping material installed in accordance with the manufacturer's installation instructions. ❑ 2. Windows, doors, and skylights certified as meeting leakage requirements. ❑ 3. Component R-values & U-factors labeled as certified. ❑ 4. Insulation installed according to manufacturer's instructions, in substantial contact with the surface being insulated, and in a manner that achieves the rated R-value without compressing the insulation. ❑ 5. Stair, elevator shaft vents, and other dampers integral to the building envelope are equipped with motorized dampers. ❑ 6. Cargo doors and loading dock doors are weather sealed. ❑ 7. Recessed lighting fixtures are: (i) Type IC rated and sealed or gasketed; or (ii) installed inside an appropriate air -tight assembly with a 0.5 inch clearance from combustible materials and with 3 inches clearance from insulation material. Section 4: Compliance Statement Compliance Statement: The proposed envelope design represented in this document is consistent with the building plans, specifications and other calculations submitted with this permit application. The proposed envelope system has been designed to meet the 2903 I CC requirements in COMcheck Version 3.2.1 and to comply with the mandatory requirements in the Requirements Chec ist. L �- 3 13 Los Pfin'dipal E velope Di;signer-llame Signature Date Navarro West Center Page 2 of 2 COMcheck Software Version 3.5.2 Interior Lighting Compliance - Certificate 2003 IECC Report Date: 03/12/08 Data filename: F:1279771ELEC\27977.cck Section 1: Project Information Project Type: New Construction Project Title: ACE HARDWARE - NAVARRO WEST CENTER Construction Site: Owner/Agent: ' WELLBOURNE & NAVARRO RD COLLEGE STATION, TX Section 2: General Information Building Use Description by: Building Tyn Retail Sales, Wholesale Showroom Section 3: Requirements Checklist Floor Area 11448 Interior Lighting: 1. Total proposed watts must be less than or equal to total allowed watts. Allowed Watts Proposed Watts Complies 17172 16530 YES 2. Exit signs 5 Watts or less per side. Designer/Contractor: Tyler Mackay James F. Turner Engineers; L.P. 8330 Meadow Road Dallas, TX 75231 214450-2900 Exterior Lighting: ❑ 3. Efficacy greater than 45 lumens/W. Exceptions: Specialized lighting highlighting features of historic buildings; signage; safety or security lighting; low -voltage landscape lighting. -Controls, Switching, and Wiring: i] 4. Independent controls for each space (switch/occupancy sensor). Exceptions: Areas designated as security or emergency areas that must be continuously illuminated. Lighting in stairways or corridors that are elements of the means of egress. 5. Master switch at entry to hotel/motel guest room. 6. Individual dwelling units separately metered. 7. Each space provided with a manual control to provide uniform light reduction by at least 50%. Exceptions: Only one luminaire in space; An occupant -sensing device controls the area; The area is a corridor, storeroom, restroom, public lobby or guest room; Areas that use less than 0.6 Watts/sq.ft. Project Title: ACE HARDWARE - NAVARRO WEST CENTER Report date: 03/12/08 Data filename: F:\27977\ELEC\27977.cck Page 1 of 7 8. Automatic lighting shutoff control in buildings larger than 5,000 sq.ft. Exceptions: Areas with only one Iuminaire, corridors, storerooms, restrooms, or public lobbies. 9. Photocell/astronomical time switch on exterior lights. Exceptions: Lighting intended for 24 hour use. 10.Tandem wired one -lamp and three -lamp ballasted luminaires (No single -lamp ballasts). Exceptions: Electronic high -frequency ballasts; Luminaires on emergency circuits or with no available pair. Section 4: Compliance Statement Compliance Statement: The proposed lighting design represented in this document is consistent with the building plans, specifications and other calculations submitted with this permit application. The proposed lighting system has been designed to meet the 2003 IECC, Chapter 8, requirements in COMcheck Version 3.5.2 and to comply with the mandatory requirements in the Requirements Checklist. N 1A, Name t Title Signatury Date e Project Title: ACE HARDWARE - NAVARRO WEST CENTER Report date: 03/12/08 Data filename: F:\27977\ELEC\27977.cck Page 2 of 7 COMcheck Software Version 3.5.2 Interior Lighting Application Worksheet 2003 IECC Report Date: Data filename: F:1279771ELEC127977.cck Section 1: Allowed Lighting Power Calculation A B c D Floor Area Allowed Allowed Watts Watts / ft2 Retail Sales, Wholesale Showroom 11448 1.5 17172 Total Allowed Watts = 17172 Section 2: Proposed Lighting Power Calculation A B c D E Fixture ID : Description / Lamp / Wattage Per Lamp I Ballast Lamps/ # of Fixture (C X D) Fixture Fixtures Watt. Retail Sales: Wholesale Showroom 01448 sq.ft.) Linear Fluorescent 1: 48' T8 32W / Electronic 4 138 114 15732 Linear Fluorescent 2: 48' T8 32W / Electronic 2 14 57 798 Total Proposed Watts = 16530 Section 3: Compliance Calculation If the Total Allowed Watts minus the Total Proposed Watts is greater than or equal to zero, the building complies. Total Allowed Watts = 17172 Total Proposed Watts = 16530 Project Compliance = 642 Interior Lighting PASSES: Design 4% better than code. Project Title: ACE HARDWARE - NAVARRO WEST CENTER Report date: 03/12/08 Data filename: F:127977\ELEC127977.cck Page 3 of 7 COMcheck Software Version 3.5.2 Mechanical Compliance Certificate 2003 IECC Report Date: 03/12/08 Data filename: F:\27977\ELEC\27977.cck Section 1: Project Information Project Type: New Construction Project Title: ACE HARDWARE - NAVARRO WEST CENTER Construction Site: Owner/Agent: WELLBOURNE & NAVARRO RD COLLEGE STATION, TX Section 2: General Information Building Location (for weather data): College Station, Texas Climate Zone: 4b Heating Degree Days (base 65 degrees F): 1788 Cooling Degree Days (base 65 degrees F): 2776 Section 3: Mechanical Systems List Designer/Contractor: Tyler Mackay James F. Turner Engineers, L.P. 8330 Meadow Road Dallas, TX 75231 214-750-2900 uantSystem Type b Description 1 HVAC System 1: Heating: Duct Furnace, Gas / Cooling: Rooftop Package Unit, Capacity <54 kBtu/h, Air -Cooled Condenser / Single Zone 1 HVAC System 2: Heating: Duct Furnace, Gas / Cooling: Rooftop Package Unit, Capacity > 54 - <65 kBtu/h, Air -Cooled Condenser / Single Zone 4 HVAC System 3: Heating: Duct Furnace, Gas / Cooling: Rooftop Package Unit, Capacity > 90 - <135 kBtu/h, Air -Cooled Condenser / Single Zone 1 Storage Water Heater 1: Service Water Heater Section 4: Requirements Checklist Requirements Specific To: HVAC System 1 rl 1. Equipment minimum efficiency: Duct Furnace (Gas): 80% Ec 2. Equipment minimum efficiency: Rooftop Package Unit: 9.7 SEER Requirements Specific To: HVAC System 2: ❑ 1. Equipment minimum efficiency: Duct Furnace (Gas): 80% Ec 2. Equipment. minimum efficiency: Rooftop Package Unit: 9.7 SEER Requirements Specific To: HVAC System 3: 0 1. Equipment minimum efficiency: Duct Furnace (Gas): 80% Ec El 2. Equipment minimum efficiency: Rooftop Package Unit: 10.1 EER 3. Integrated air economizer required Requirements Specific To: Storage Water Heater 1 El 1. Heat traps in inlet/outlet fittings O 2. 1/2-in. insulation on 8 ft of inlet/outlet piping if no integral heat traps Project Title: ACE HARDWARE - NAVARRO WEST CENTER Report date: 03/12/08 Data filename: F:\27977\ELEC\27977.cck Page 4 of 7 ❑ 3. No efficiency requirements for water heater with storage capacity less than 20 gallons. Generic Requirements: Must be met by all systems to which the requirement is applicable: 1. Load calculations per 2001 ASHRAE Fundamentals 2. Plant equipment and system capacity no greater than needed to meet loads - Exception: Standby equipment automatically off when primary system is operating - Exception: Multiple units controlled to sequence operation as a function of load 3. Minimum one temperature control device per system El 4. Minimum one humidity control device per installed humidification/dehumidification system 5. Thermostatic controls has 5 degrees F deadband Exception: Thermostats requiring manual changeover between heating and cooling 0 6. Automatic Controls: Setback to 55 degrees F (heat) and 85 degrees F (cool); 7-day clock, 2-hour occupant override, 10-hour backup ' - Exception: Continuously operating zones - Exception: 2 kW demand or less, submit calculations 7. Automatic shut-off dampers on exhaust systems and supply systems with airflow >3,000 cfm 8. Outside -air source for ventilation; system capable of reducing OSA to required minimum ' 9. R-5 supply and return air duct insulation in unconditioned spaces R-8 supply and return air duct insulation outside the building R-8 insulation between ducts and the building exterior when ducts are part of a building assembly ' Exception: Ducts located within equipment Exception: Ducts with interior and exterior temperature difference not exceeding 15 degrees F. 10.Ducts sealed -longitudinal seams on rigid ducts; transverse seams on all ducts; UL 181A or 181E tapes and mastics - Exception: Continuously welded and locking -type longitudinal joints and seams on ducts operating at static pressures less than 2 inches w.g. pressure classification 11. Mechanical fasteners and sealants used to connect ducts and air distribution equipment ' 12.0peration and maintenance manual provided to building owner Ej 13.Balancing devices provided in accordance with IMC 603.15 . 14. Newly purchased service water heating equipment meets the efficiency requirements 15. Water heater temperature controls: 110 degrees F for dwelling units or 90 degrees F for other occupancies rl 16. Stair and elevator shaft vents are equipped with motorized dampers Section 5: Compliance Statement Compliance Statement: The proposed mechanical design represented in this document is consistent with the building plans, specifications and other calculations submitted with this permit application. The proposed mechanical systems have been designed to meet the 2003 IECC requirements in COMcheck Version 3.5.2 and to comply with the mandatory requirements in the Requirements Checklist. 1 jti 1. N� a Name - itle Sign re Date ' Project Title: ACE HARDWARE - NAVARRO WEST CENTER Report date: 03/12/08 Data filename: F:\27977\ELEC\27977.cck Page 5 of 7 COMcheck Software Version 3.5.2 Mechanical Requirements Description 2003 1ECC Report Date: Data filename: F:\27977\ELEC\27977.cck The following list provides more detailed descriptions of the requirements in Section 4 of the Mechanical Compliance Certificate. Requirements Specific To: HVAC System 1 : 1. The specified heating and/or cooling equipment is covered by the ASHRAE 90.1 Code and must meet the following minimum efficiency: Duct Furnace (Gas): 80% Ec 2. The specified heating and/or cooling equipment is covered by ASHRAE 90.1 Code and must meet the following minimum efficiency: Rooftop Package Unit: 9.7 SEER Requirements Specific To: HVAC System 2: 1. The specified heating and/or cooling equipment is covered by the ASHRAE 90.1 Code and must meet the following minimum efficiency: Duct Furnace (Gas): 80% Ec 2. The specified heating and/or cooling equipment is covered by ASHRAE 90.1 Code and must meet the following minimum efficiency: Rooftop Package Unit: 9.7 SEER Requirements Speck To: HVAC System 3: 1. The specified heating and/or cooling equipment is covered by the ASHRAE 90.1 Code and must meet the following minimum efficiency: Duct Furnace (Gas): 80% Ec 2. The specified heating and/or cooling equipment is covered by ASHRAE 90.1 Code and must meet the following minimum efficiency: Rooftop Package Unit: 10.1 EER 3. An integrated air economizer is required for individual cooling systems over 65 kBtulh in the selected climate. An integrated economizer allows simultaneous operation of outdoor -air and mechanical cooling. Requirements Specific To: Storage Water Heater 1 : 1. Heat traps are required on noncirculating water heating systems on both inlet and outlet connections. Heat traps may be purchased or field -fabricated by creating a loop or inverted U-shaped arrangement on the inlet and outlet pipes. 2. Pipe insulation for the specified noncirculating service hot water system is required for all piping in the following categories:a) the first 8 ft of outlet piping from any constant -temperature, noncirculating storage systemb) the inlet piping between the storage tank and a heat trap in a noncirculating storage systemPipe insulation must be at least 112 in. and have a conductivity no >0.28 Btu-in/(h-ft2-degrees F). 3. Service water heating equipment used solely for heating potable water, pool heaters, and hot water storage tanks must meet the following miniumum efficiency: No efficiency requirements for water heater with storage capacity less than 20 gallons. Generic Requirements: Must be met by all systems to which the requirement is applicable: 1. Design heating and cooling loads for the building must be determined using procedures in the ASHRAE Handbook of Fundamentals or an approved equivalent calculation procedure. 2. All equipment and systems must be sized to be no greater than needed to meet -calculated loads. A single piece of equipment providing both heating and cooling must satisfy this provision for one function with the capacity for the other function as small as possible, within available equipment options. - Exception: The equipment and/or system capacity may be greater than calculated loads for standby purposes. Standby equipment must be automatically controlled to be off when the primary equipment and/or system is operating. - Exception: Multiple units of the same equipment type whose combined capacities exceed the calculated load are allowed if they are provided with controls to sequence operation of the units as the load increases or decreases. 3. Each heating or cooling system serving a single zone must have its own temperature control device. 4. Each humidification system must have its own humidity control device. 5. Thermostats controlling both heating and cooling must be capable of maintaining a 5 degrees F deadband (a range of temperature where no heating or cooling is provided). - Exception: Deadband capability is not required if the thermostat does not have automatic changeover capability between heating and cooling. 6. The system or zone control must be a programmable thermostat or other automatic control meeting the following criteria:a) capable of setting back temperature to 55 degrees F during heating and setting up to 85 degrees F during coolingb) capable of automatically Project Title: ACE HARDWARE - NAVARRO WEST CENTER Report date: 03/12/08 ' Data filename' F:\27977\ELEC\27977.cck Page 6 of 7 setting back or shutting down systems during unoccupied hours using 7 different day schedulesc) have an accessible 2-hour occupant overrided) have a battery back-up capable of maintaining programmed settings for at least 10 hours without power. - Exception: A setback or shutoff control is not required on thermostats that control systems serving areas that operate continuously. - Exception: A setback or shutoff control is not required on systems with total energy demand of 2 kW (6,826 Btu/h) or less. 7. Outdoor -air supply systems with design airflow rates >3,000 cfm of outdoor air and all exhaust systems must have dampers that are automatically closed while the equipment is not operating. 8. The system must supply outside ventilation air as required by Chapter 4 of the International Mechanical Code. If the ventilation system is designed to supply outdoor -air quantities exceeding minimum required levels, the system must be capable of reducing outdoor -air flow to the minimum required levels. 9. Air ducts must be insulated to the following levels:a) Supply and.return air ducts for conditioned air located in unconditioned spaces (spaces neither heated nor cooled) must be insulated with a minimum of R-5. Unconditioned spaces include attics, crawl spaces, unheated basements, and unheated garages.b) Supply and return air ducts and plenums must be insulated to a minimum of R-8 when located outside the building.c) When ducts are located within.exterior components (e.g., floors or roofs), minimum R-8 insulation is required only between the duct and the building exterior. Exception: Duct insulation is not required on ducts located within equipment. - Exception: Duct insulation is not required when the design temperature difference between the interior and exterior of the duct or plenum does not exceed 15 degrees F. 10. All joints, longitudinal and transverse seams, and connections in ductwork must be securely sealed using weldments; mechanical fasteners with seals, gaskets, -or mastics; mesh and mastic sealing systems; or tapes. Tapes and mastics must be listed and labeled in accordance with UL 181 A or UL 181 B. Exception: Continuously welded and locking -type longitudinal joints and seams on ducts operating at static pressures less than 2 inches w.g. pressure classification. 11. Mechanical fasteners and seals, mastics, or gaskets must be used when connecting ducts to fans and other air distribution equipment, including multiple -zone terminal units. 12. Operation and maintenance documentation must be provided to the owner that includes at least the following information:a) equipment capacity (input and output) and required maintenance actionsb) equipment operation and maintenance manualsc) HVAC system control maintenance and calibration information, including wiring diagrams, schematics, and control sequence descriptions; desired or field -determined set points must be permanently recorded on control drawings, at control devices, or, for digital control systems, in programming commentsd) complete narrative of how each system is intended to operate. ' 13. Each supply air outlet or diffuser and each zone terminal device (such as VAV or mixing box) must have its own balancing device. Acceptable balancing devices include adjustable dampers located within the ductwork, terminal devices, and supply air diffusers. 14. Service water heating equipment must meet minimum Federal efficiency requirements included in the National Appliance Energy Conservation Act and the Energy Policy Act of 1992, which meet or exceed ASHRAE 90.1 Code. New service water heating equipment can be assumed to meet these requirements. 15. Water -heating equipment must be provided with controls that allow the user to set the water temperature to 110 degrees F for dwelling units and 90 degrees F for other occupancies. Controls must limit output temperatures of lavatories in public facility restrooms to 110 degrees F. 16. Stair and elevator shaft vents must be equipped with motorized dampers capable of being automatically closed during normal building operation and interlocked to open as required by fire and smoke detection systems. All gravity outdoor air supply and exhaust hoods, vents, and ventilators must be equipped with motorized dampers that will automatically shut when the spaces served are not in use. Exceptions: - Gravity (non -motorized) dampers are acceptable in buildings less than three stories in height above grade. - Ventilation systems serving unconditioned spaces. Project Title: ACE HARDWARE - NAVARRO WEST CENTER Report date: 03/12/08 Data filename: F:127977\ELEC127977.cck Page 7 of 7 ABProAegForm .._. , ._- Page 1 of I Texas Department of Licensing and Regulation Architectural Berriers Project Registration Confirmation Page Thursday, March 13, 2008 EABPRJABO12098 PERSON FILING FORM Name: Ronnie Deslerto Email: ronnie.desiertoQhva.cc Phone: 713-869-1103 Project Name: Navarro West Center Project Address: Navarro West Center 11907 Fm 2154 College Station, TX T1846 County: Brazos TENANT Name: Phone; - Tenant Address: Contact Name: Phone: - Contact Address: 6UILDINGIFACILIiY Name: Navarro West Center FACILITY Owner: David Cottrell Investments, Inc. Phone: 713.7835052 Owner Address: 5707 Hlghmeadow, Houston, Tx 77063 Contact Name: 7137835052 Phone: -- Contact Address: DESIGN FIRM Name. Heights Venture Architects, I,LP Phone: 7134369-1103 Firm Address:1111 North Loop West, Houston, Tx 770o8 Designer Name: Scott Rosdlim Email: &xAn fius@hva.00 Type of License: Architect License Number, 14178 PROJECT DESCRIPTION Start Date: 04/2008 Completion date: 0912008 Estimated Cost: $1,550.000.00 Type of Work: New Construction Does this building(s) have more than one level? No Are there any elevators, escalators, or platform lifts in this building? No Type of Funds; This project is privately funded, on private land for private use. State Lease No,, Scope of Work: The prpject consists of new construction of retail shell 8 complete tenant Improvement work and the associated site Improvement the building is steal frame with concrete tit won front, rear A side. finishes includes paint, brick, standing seam awning arc! aluminium & glass storefront. I will submit tins AS Confirmation page with a complete set of construction documents and applicable fees to a Registered Accessibility Specialist (RAS) or Contract Provider. Texas Department of Licensing and Regulation of my intent to comply with the pnavWon of Texas . Chatter 469_ Building Owner or Email Address Signature of RAS OR Name of CP RAS/CK Date Construction Documents Received by RAS Enter Another Project Print this Page Tn. +oaf Pa_9d ! H me PaeelAR Home PaoelAB Project Rea'rskq ionf!aaetEggdhask http://wwwlicamse.state,tx.uslabprojectregistration/ABProiRegi-ormVerification.aspx?strR.._ 3/13/2008 MAR-13-2008 04:26PM From: ID:HEIGHTS VENTURE Pa9e:002 R=95% Navarro West Center For Construction Navarro Drive and Welbourne Drive March 12th, 2008 SECTION 00410 BID FORM General Contract Work ON: Navarro West Center FOR: David Cottrell Investments Inc AT: 7507 Highmeadow, Houston TX 77063 DATE: CONTRACTOR'S NAME LICENSE NO. r The Undersigned, as Bidder, hereby declares that the only person or persons interested in this proposal as principal or principals or are named herein and that no other person than herein mentioned has any interest in this proposal or in the contract to be entered into that this proposal is made without connection with any other person, company, or parties making a bid or proposal; and that it is in all respects fair and ' in good faith without collusion or fraud. The Bidder further declares that he has carefully examined the site of the work and informed himself fully in regard to all conditions pertaining to the place where the work is to be done, that he has examined the specifications for the work and contract documents relative thereto, and has read all special provisions furnished prior to the opening of bids; and he has satisfied himself as to the nature and location of the work, the general and local conditions, and all matters which may in any way affect the work or its performance, and that as a result of such examination and investigation, he fully understands the intent and purpose of the documents and conditions of bidding. Claims for additional compensation and/or extensions of time because of the Contractor's failure to follow the forgoing procedure and to familiarize himself with the Contract Documents and all conditions which might affect the work will not be allowed. The Bidder proposes and agrees if this proposal is accepted to contract with David Cottrell Investments Inc in the form of contract specified, to furnish all necessary materials, equipment, machinery, tools, apparatus, means of transportation, and labor necessary to complete the work of Navarro West Center ' full and complete accordance with the Contract Documents, to the full and entire satisfaction of the Owner and/or Architect -Engineer, with a definite understanding that no money will be allowed for extra work except as set forth in the Contract Documents for the sum of: BID FORM 00410 Navarro West Center Navarro Drive and Welbourne Drive BASE BID: - ALTERNATES For Construction March 12th, 2008 Dollars ($ ). Should any of the alternates as described in the contract documents be accepted, the amount written below shall be the amount added to the base bid. Alternate No.1. Provide twenty year no dollar limit warranty for the roofing system in lieu of the 10 year no dollar limit warranty specified in the Project Manual. (Add) Dollars ($ ) BID FORM 00410 Navarro West Center Navarro Drive and Welbourne Drive UNIT PRICES For Construction March 12th, 2008 The following unit prices are submitted by the undersigned Bidder as a proposed basis for additive or deductive adjustment in the event contract changes in the Work are required involving items described. It is understood and agreed that unit prices are separately subject to acceptance by the Owner and that such prices are not part of the Contract except as accepted and entered in the Agreement. Unit prices shall include all fees, taxes, profit, overhead and similar items. Unit Price: Unit cost for Electricians per hour. Unit Price: Unit cost for Plumbers per hour. Unit Price: Unit cost for Roofers per hour. Unit Price: Unit cost for Framers per hour. Unit Price: Storefront Door, including hardware, installed per each. Unit Price: Tenant hollow metal access door and frame, including hardware and cost to cut opening per each. Unit Price: Roof Curb per each (6' x 6' x 12" high). Unit Price: Pipe penetrations (vent pipe thru roof) per each. E1 The Bidder shall complete the project, ready for Owner occupancy in 150 consecutive calendar days from the date of the Notice to Proceed. This schedule includes completion of Owner/Architect Punchlist. PRINCIPAL SUB -BIDDERS: The undersigned further states that this bid is based on quotations received from the following subcontractors for the categories of work listed; he further agrees that if he is the successful Bidder, he will contract with the listed subcontractors for the performance of this work: Landscape & Irrigation Contractor Concrete Contractor Masonry Contractor BID FORM 00410 Navarro West Center Navarro Drive and Welbourne Drive Steel Erection Contractor EIFS Contractor Roofing Contractor Plumbing Contractor Electrical Contractor For Construction March 12th, 2008 The Undersigned further agrees that in case of failure on his part to execute the said Contract and to furnish the bond within ten (10) consecutive calendar days after written notice being given of the award of the Contract, the check, cash, or bid bond accompanying this bid shall be paid into the funds of the Owner's account set aside for this project, as liquidated damages for such failure; otherwise the check, cash, or bid bond accompanying this proposal shall be returned to the Undersigned. The Bidder acknowledges receipt of all Addenda as listed below and has taken them into account in preparation of his proposal. Addendum No. dated Addendum No. dated Addendum No. dated Addendum No. dated BID FORM 00410 Navarro West Center Navarro Drive and Welbourne Drive (Name of Firm or Corporation making bid) LION For Construction March 12th, 2008 Title: (Owner, Partner, or Corp. Pres. or Vice-Pres. Only). WITNESS: (Proprietorship or Partnership) ATTEST: BY: TITLE: (Corp. Sec, or Assist. Sec. Only) (CORPORATE SEAL) BID FORM 00410 Navarro West Center Welbourne Drive and Navarro Drive SECTION 00500 AGREEMENT For Permit and Pricing March 12th, 2008 PART1 GENERAL FORM OF AGREEMENT 2.01 The Agreement to be executed is attached following this page. 2.02 RELATED REQUIREMENTS A. Section 00700 - General Conditions. PART 2 PRODUCTS (NOT USED) PART 3 EXECUTION (NOT USED) 4.01 AIA Document A101, Owner -Contractor Agreement Form -Stipulated Sum 1997 Edition, forms the basis of Contract between the Owner and Contractor. END OF AGREEMENT 07128 / Navarro West Center 00500 - 1 AGREEMENT Navarro West Center Navarro Drive and Welboume Drive SECTION 00611 For Construction March 12th, 2008 CONTRACTOR'S AFFIDAVIT AND PARTIAL RELEASE OF CLAIMS AND LIENS FOR PROGRESS PAYMENT STATE OF COUNTY OF I, being duly sworn, state on personal knowledge that I am (Title) of (Contractor) and have authority to execute this Affidavit on behalf of the Contractor. I further state the following: 1. All the laborers, persons, firms and corporations having furnished services or materials for the construction of Navarro West Center, College Station, Texas, have been paid in full for labor and materials furnished to date, except retention and unfounded change orders, and that upon completion of the work of each subcontractor or supplier, the Contractor will cause each such subcontractor and supplier to execute a Release and Waiver of Claim in the form required by the Contract Documents and shall further cause each such subcontractor and supplier to cancel any liens (if any) that may have been filed against the Project. 2. The work covered by this payment has been completed in accordance with the Contract Documents. 3. In consideration of the partial payment of $ , the Contractor hereby releases David Cottrell Investments Inc. from all lien rights, claims, or demands of any kind whatsoever which it now has against the construction of the Project arising of or in any way related to the furnishing of labor and materials on or before the date of this Affidavit, except for retainage and unfunded change orders. 4. To the best of the Contractor's knowledge and belief, no claims or claim of liens exist by or against any subcontractor or supplier who furnished materials or labor on the Project, and if any appear afterwards the Contractor shall hold David Cottrell Investments Inc. harmless on the account thereof. Contractor agrees to provide a lien removal bond at no cost to the Owner or its representatives within 15 days from request by the Owner or the Owner's representatives. CONTRACTOR'S AFFIDAVIT AND PARTIAL RELEASE 00611 Navarro West Center Navarro Drive and Welbourne Drive For Construction March 12th, 2008 5. If any lien remains unsatisfied after all payments are made, the Contractor shall refund to the Owner all monies that the latter may be compelled to pay in discharging such lien, plus all lien bonds, costs, interests, both prejudgment at a legal rate. Sworn to and subscribed before me this day of , 20_ Notary Public (Seal) (Contractor) I� My Commission Expires: CONTRACTOR'S AFFIDAVIT AND PARTIAL RELEASE 00611 Navarro West Center For Construction Navarro Drive and Welbourne Drive March 12th, 2008 SECTION 00616 CONTRACTOR'S GENERAL WARRANTY The undersigned Contractor hereby warrants, in accordance with the applicable provisions and terms set forth in the Contract Documents, all materials and workmanship incorporated in Navarro West Center , College Station, Texas, against any and all defects due to faulty materials or workmanship or negligence for a period of 12 months after date of Substantial Completion on AIA From G704, or such longer periods as set forth in the Contract Documents, from the effective date of this warranty. This Warranty shall be binding where defects occur due to normal usage conditions and does not cover willful or malicious damage, damages caused by acts of God or other casualty beyond the control of the Contractor. This Warranty shall be in addition to other warranties and guarantees set forth in the Contract Documents, and shall not act to constitute a waiver of additional protection of the Owner afforded, where applicable, by consumer protection and product liability provisions of law, and these stipulations shall not constitute waiver of any additional rights or remedies available to the Owner under the law. Signed: Name: Title: Date: (Corporate Seal) ' Subscribed and sworn before me this day of , 20_ (Notary Public) IEND OF SECTION 05125 / Eldridge Briar 00616 CONTRACTOR'S GENERAL WARRANTY Navarro West Center For Construction Navarro Drive and Welbourne Drive March 12th, 2008 SECTION 00619 ASBESTOS -FREE WARRANTY The undersigned Contractor hereby warrants that no asbestos -containing materials of any kind were used in the construction of Navarro West Center, College Station, Texas, Signed: Name: Title: Date: (Corporate Seal) Subscribed and sworn before me this day of , 20_ (Notary Public) END OF SECTION 05125 / Eldridge Briar 00619 ASBESTOS -FREE WARRANTY Navarro West Center Welbourne Drive and Navarro Drive SECTION 00700 GENERAL CONDITIONS For Permit and Pricing March 12th, 2008 FORM OF GENERAL CONDITIONS RELATED REQUIREMENTS 2.01 AIA Document A201, General Conditions of the Contract for Construction, 1997 Edition, is the General Conditions between the Owner and Contractor. SUPPLEMENTARY CONDITIONS 3.01 Refer to Document 00800 for amendments to these General Conditions. END OF DOCUMENT 07128 / Navarro West Center 00700 -1 GENERAL CONDITIONS Navarro West Center Navarro Drive and Welboume Drive SECTION 00730 SUPPLEMENTARY CONDITIONS For Construction March 12th, 2008 The following supplements modify, change, delete from or add to the "General Conditions of the Contract for Construction," AIA Document A201, 1997 Edition. Where any article of the General Conditions is modified or any Paragraph, Subparagraph or Clause thereof is modified or deleted by these Supplementary Conditions, the unaltered provisions of that Article, Paragraph, Subparagraph or Clause shall remain in effect. Article 1 - General Provisions 1.1 Basic Definitions Add the following to Subparagraph 1.1.1: "Precedence of Contract Documents shall be in the following sequence: 1) Agreement (Between Owner and Contractor) 2) Addenda 3) Supplementary Conditions 4) General Conditions (AIA Document A201) 5) Constructions Documents comprised of Specifications and Related Documents, and Working Drawings." Add the following to Subparagraph 1.1.3: "Provide" shall mean furnish, fabricate, erect, and completely install, including all necessary labor and incidental materials, the referenced or described item complete in place and ready for use or operation." Add the following to Subparagraph 1.1.5: "Mechanical, Plumbing, Fire Protection and Electrical Drawings are diagrammatic only. Actual work shall be installed in . accordance with measurements obtained at job -site, coordination with other trades as necessary, building code requirements, shop drawing/submittal requirements, and Owner furnished equipment." Add the following Subparagraph 1.2.4: "1.2.4 Sections of Division 1 - General Requirements govern the execution of the work of all sections of the Specifications." SUPPLEMENTARY CONDITIONS 00730 Navarro West Center Navarro Drive and Welboume Drive Article 3 - Contractor 3.2 Review of Contract Documents and Field Conditions by Contractor. Add the following to Subparagraph 3.2.2: For Construction March 12th, 2008 "The Contractor shall assume full responsibility for accuracy of measurements obtained at the site. No extra compensation will be allowed because of differences between actual measurements and dimensions indicated on the Drawings, nor for Contractor's failure to coordinate work with actual field measurements." Modify Subparagraph 3.3.3 as follows: "The Contractor shall be responsible for inspection of portions of work already performed under this contract by the Contractor and/or his subcontractors to determine that such portions are in proper condition to receive subsequent work." 3.4 Labor and Materials. Add the following Subparagraph 3.4.4 to Paragraph 3.4: "3.4.4 The Contractor shall keep the Architect informed as to the availability of all specified materials, equipment and required labor and shall advise him promptly, in writing, of all materials, equipment or labor that may not be obtainable for the purposes of the Contract, whether due to conditions of the market or other limiting or governing factors." 3.5 Warranty Add the following to Subparagraph 3.5.1: "The Contractor shall bear all expenses resulting from substitutions including the cost of work in general, structural, plumbing, mechanical and electrical trades required due to the substitution and the cost of any Architect's services made necessary by the substitution." 3.7 Permits, Fees and Notices: Add the following to Subparagraph 3.7.1: "Upon completion of the Work, the Contractor shall deliver to the Architect original copies of all required certificates of inspection." 3.9 Superintendent: Add the following to Subparagraph 3.9.1: "Contractor's resident superintendent as approved by the Architect shall not be removed from Project until Project punch list has been completed and Project accepted by Owner or until Architect finds the superintendent unacceptable. SUPPLEMENTARY CONDITIONS 00730 Navarro West Center For Construction Navarro Drive and Welbourne Drive March 12th, 2008 3.10 Contractor's Construction Schedules Add the following Sub -Subparagraph 3.10.1.1 to Subparagraph 3.10.1: 113.10.1.1 At the time of submitting the Construction Progress Schedule to the Architect, the Contractor shall also submit the anticipated amount of each monthly payment that will become due in accordance with the Progress Schedule. No application for payment will be approved until the Construction Progress Schedule has been received by the Architect." Add the following Sub -Subparagraph 3.10.2.1 to Subparagraph 3.10.2: "3.10.2.1 The Contractor shall prepare and submit to the Architect within 15 days after the Notice To Proceed, a schedule of Shop Drawings and Submittals as required in the Contract Documents. Schedule shall fix dates for submission, and the lead time for each submittal as related to requirements for return receipt for submittal to expedite delivery of material to maintain Progress Schedule. It is to be understood that this Schedule will be subject to change from time to time in accordance with the progress of the work. All Shop Drawings, Samples and Submittals for approval shall be completed within 45 days after the Notice To Proceed." Add the following to Subparagraph 3.12.5: "Shop drawings, product submitted in accordance Requirements." Article 4 - Administration of the Contract 4.1 Architect data, samples and other submittals shall be prepared and with the requirements of Section 01 30 00 - Administrative Add the following to Subparagraph 4.1.1: "The Architect as referred to in these documents is Height Ventures Architects L.L.P., I I11 North Loop West, Suite 800, Houston, Texas 77008. The term "Architect" shall include the Architect's consultants and staff for all disciplines including civil, structural, mechanical, plumbing, electrical, etc." 4.3 Claims and Disputes Add the following to Subparagraph 4.3.2: "Any claim implemented by Change Order shall represent the entire claim for that event and no additional claims shall be made by either party to the Contract after the claim has been implemented by Change Order." SUPPLEMENTARY CONDITIONS ' 00730 Navarro West Center Navarro Drive and Welbourne Drive Article 5 - Subcontractors 5.2 5.3 Award of Subcontracts and Other Contracts for Portions of the Work. Add the following to Subparagraph 5.2.1: For Construction March 12th, 2008 "The listing required by this subparagraph shall be submitted to the Architect not later than 30 days from the date the Notice To Proceed. This list shall include the names of manufacturers, suppliers, and installers proposed for each of the products, equipment, and materials to be incorporated into the project. The Contractor shall furnish upon request adequate data on any named entity on the list in order to permit the Architect and Owner to conduct a proper evaluation. Failure to object to a manufacturer shall not constitute a waiver of any of the requirements of the Contract Documents, and all products furnished by the listed manufacturer must conform to such requirements." Subcontractural Relations Add the following to Subparagraph 5.3.1: "The division of these specifications into sections is not intended to control the Contractor in dividing the work among subcontractors nor to limit the scope of work performed by any trade under a given section. The Architect will not undertake to settle any differences between the Contractor and his Subcontractors as to inclusion of work or material items. It shall be the Contractor's entire responsibility for the proper coordination and completion of all the work described in these Specifications whether performed by the Contractor or Subcontractors, if any." Article 7 - Changes in the Work 7.2 Change Orders Add the following Subparagraph 7.2.3 to Paragraph 7.2: 7.2.3 A change order, when issued, shall be full compensation, or credit, for the extra work included, omitted, or substituted. It shall show on its face, the adjustment in time for completion of the project as a result of the change in the work. Each change order shall include all costs related thereto, including all overhead, miscellaneous expenses, and incidentals. The Contractor shall submit a written and itemized proposal for each Change Order under consideration (Change Proposal Requests) within 21 days of receipt of a pricing request. See Section 01 26 57 for specific requirements for change orders." SUPPLEMENTARY CONDITIONS 00730 Navarro West Center For Construction Navarro Drive and Welbourne Drive March 12th, 2008 Article 8 - Time 8.2 Progress and Completion Add the following to Subparagraph 8.2.1: "1. The time for completion of this Contract shall be in accordance with the time indicated in the Contractor's Bid Form. 2. Time is of the essence, and if the Contractor fails to complete the work within the maximum time, the Owner will incur substantial damages, including but not limited to loss of revenue resulting from the inability to utilize the completed Project. 3. If the progress or completion of the Work be delayed by any fault, neglect, act or failure to act on the part of the Contractor or any one acting for or on behalf of the Contractor, then the Contractor shall, in addition to all of the other obligations imposed by the Owner, work such overtime or require the appropriate subcontractor to work overtime as may be necessary to make up for all time lost and to avoid delay in the progress and completion of the work. 4. For the purpose of this Article, subcontractors shall be deemed to be acting for an on behalf of the Contractor." 8.3 Delays and Extensions of Time. Revise to read as follows: "8.3.1 In the event that either the Owner or the Contractor shall be delayed or hindered in or prevented from performance of any act required herein by reason of unavoidable labor dispute, failure of power, restrictive governmental laws and regulations, riots, insurrections, war, fire, adverse weather conditions not reasonably anticipatable, other unavoidable casualties or other reason of a like nature not the fault of the party delayed in performing work of doing acts required under the Contract Documents, then performance of such acts shall be excused for the period of the delay and the period for the performance of any such acts shall be extended for an equivalent period. If the Owner, the Architect, or any separate contractor employed by the Owner delays the Contractor, this shall be considered an event of force majeure. However, in no event shall the Contractor be entitled to any compensation for any force major delay other than the extension of the Project scheduled described above. 8.3.2 The Contractor's claims, if any, for extension of time must be made in writing to the Architect not more than five working days after the Contractor has notice of the delay. Thereafter, the Contractor must provide full details and supporting documentation with regard to the cause of the delay within 15 working days of the initial notice of the I delay to the Architect. If either the initial notice or the supporting documentation are not filed with the Architect in writing within the time periods specified, the claim for delay shall be waived. If the cause for the delay is a continuing one then only one claim is necessary. The Contractor's supporting documentation to the Architect shall include and SUPPLEMENTARY CONDITIONS ' 00730 Navarro West Center Navarro Drive and Welbourne Drive For Construction March 12th, 2008 estimate of the probable effect of the delay on the progress of the Work and the Project Schedule. 8.3.3 Contractor agrees that dates under this Contract will not be extended due to normal inclement weather. For a time extension to be granted for abnormal, inclement weather: a) Such weather must, in the opinion of the Architect, actually have an adverse effect upon the progress of the Contractor's work which is of a critical nature and; b) in the opinion of the Architect, the adverse effect must not be due to any fault or negligence of Contractor and could not have been avoided by the Contractor through proper planning, coordination and implementation of adequate weather protection necessary to allow the Work to be continued without adverse effect upon labor production. Contractor agrees that the fact that abnormal inclement weather may occur does not, to itself, justify any time extension hereunder. 8.3.4 The Contractor agrees that the measure of abnormal inclement weather due to precipitation or temperature during the period covered by this Contract shall be the number of calendar days in excess of those shown in the weather data from NOAA, in which precipitation exceed .10 inch (or in the case of snow or ice pellets, 1 inch or more) or the highest temperature was ninety-eight (98) degrees F. or above. 8.3.5 No extension of time will be made for abnormal inclement weather after principal portions of the Work are enclosed except for site work which critically affects the Contract time or specific dates. For the purpose of this Paragraph, the term "enclosed" is defined to mean when the Work is sufficiently closed in (exterior walls up and roof in place) so as to permit any structure or major portion thereof which is part of the Work, to be adequately heated so as to allow the various trades to perform their work. The Architect shall determine when the structure is "enclosed" and shall issue, upon the request of the Contractor, a letter certifying the date the Work became enclosed for the purpose hereof and; 8.3.3 Notwithstanding any other provisions of the Contract, Contractor agrees as between and among itself and the Owner, Architect, the General Contractor, and any other AE Representative that the Contractor's right to receive an extension of time pursuant to the provisions of this Paragraph shall be the Contractor's sole and exclusive remedy with regard to any the Work and the Contractor hereby waives and releases claims for monetary damages arising out of or related to any such delay or interference, including but not limited to, claims for delay damages, interference damages, impact damages, acceleration damages and any other form of the time -related damages against the Owner and the Design Professional except under the following circumstances. 8.3.4 Unless otherwise specified in the Contract Documents, the Architect's interpretations shall not give rise to a claim for an extension of time until 15 days after the Contractor's written request for them and the failure of the Architect to provide the requested interpretation within an additional ten working days." SUPPLEMENTARY CONDITIONS 00730 Navarro West Center Navarro Drive and Welbourne Drive For Construction March 12th, 2008 Article 9 - Payments and Completion 9.2 Schedule of Values (As part of application for payment, not per initial Schedule of Values) Add the following Sub -Subparagraphs 9.2.1.1, 9.2.1.2, and 9.2.1.3 to Subparagraph 9.2.1: "9.2.1.1 In submitting the Schedule of Values, the Contractor shall be prepared to substantiate any line items in the Schedule of Values that may be questioned by the Architect. Items in question shall be substantiated by such data and may be required by the Architect to establish the reasonableness of the value assigned to the labor and/or materials for that item. 9.2.1.2 At the time of submitting the Schedule of Values, the Contractor shall also submit an estimate of the amount of each Request for Payment for the Owner's use in planning cash flow for the Project. It is understood that actual amounts requested by the Requests for Payment may not agree with this estimate." 9.2.1.3 The schedule of values shall be submitted in accordance with Section 01200." 9.3 Applications For Payment Add the following to Subparagraph 9.3.1: ,Requests for Payment shall be submitted in 3 copies (unless otherwise directed) to the Architect on AIA G702. Unless otherwise agreed between the Owner and Contractor, the Contractor shall submit his requests for payment not later than the twenty-fifth day of each month. Requests shall be based on work performed during the period ending with the date of the request. The Owner will make a partial payment to the Contractor based on Contractor's requests duly certified and approved by the Architect by the twenty-fifth of the following month. Until Substantial Completion, the Owner will pay ninety percent (90%) of the amount due the Contractor on account of progress payments. IAdd the following to Subparagraph 9.3.2: "In requesting payment for materials stored on or off the site, the Contractor shall submit with his Application for Payment the following: An itemized list of the stored material prepared in sufficient detail to identify the materials and their value. Evidence such as bills of sale or such other proof as may be requested by the Owner or Architect to substantiate that the materials listed have been paid for by the Contractor, or for materials stored at the site only, a notarized statement from the materials supplier stating that the materials will become the property of the Owner upon payment by the Owner to the Contractor. SUPPLEMENTARY CONDITIONS 00730 Navarro West Center Navarro Drive and Welbourne Drive For Construction March 12th, 2008 For material stored off the site, the Contractor shall submit with his Application for Payment the following: Evidence that the materials are stored at the location previously agreed to in writing. Evidence that the storage location is bonded. Evidence that the materials are insured while in storage and while in transit to the site. Evidence that transportation to the site will be provided. No payment will be certified for material stored off the site until: The storage location has been agreed upon in writing. The materials may be reviewed in their storage location by the Architect. This inspection, if performed, is an extra service for which the Owner shall pay the Architect and for which the Owner shall be reimbursed by the Contractor." 9.6 Progress Payments Add the following Sub -Subparagraph 9.6.2.1 to Subparagraph 9.6.2: 19.6.2.1 The Contractor shall indemnify and hold the Owner harmless from laborer's, mechanic's and materialmen's liens upon the Owner's properties or the premises upon which the work is located, arising out of the work performed or materials furnished by the Contractor or any of his subcontractors or any material suppliers under the Contract." Add the following to Subparagraph 9.6.5 "The provisions of this Subparagraph do not apply to material suppliers who have furnished materials for which the Contractor has requested payment and are in storage off of the site or on the site with the exception of when a notarized statement has been furnished as provided in 9.3.2.1.2 above. All such stored materials except as previously stated are to be paid for prior to payment to the Contractor by the Owner." 9.8 Substantial Completion: Add the following Subparagraph 9.8.1.1 to Subparagraph 9.8.1: 119.8.1.1 Substantial Completion for this project is defined as the point at which the stage/phase is 100% complete (including the completion of all systems checking and balancing, all required inspections by the local building authority, including acceptance by same), completion of all outstanding punch list items. The project area shall have been cleaned to the point where the Owner may assume occupancy. SUPPLEMENTARY CONDITIONS 00730 Navarro West Center Navarro Drive and Welbourne Drive 9.10 Final Completion and Final Payment Add the following to Subparagraph 9.10.2: For Construction March 12th, 2008 ■ "At the completion of the project prior to receiving final payment, the Contractor shall furnish the Owner, through the Architect, properly signed and notarized waivers of lien ■ from all subcontractors employed and material suppliers furnishing materials for the Project. Such waivers shall be submitted before final payment will be certified by the Architect to the Owner. The final inspection by the Architect are one time occurrences ■ for each respective phase. If the Project does not pass final inspection due to no fault of the Owner or Architect, the Contractor shall pay the Owner for expenses incurred as a result of a return by the Architect for final inspections." SUPPLEMENTARY CONDITIONS ■ 00730 Navarro West Center Navarro Drive and Welbourne Drive Article 11 - Insurance 11.1 Contractor's Liability Insurance Contractor shall purchase insurance as follows: For Construction March 12th, 2008 Worker's Compensation insurance including Employer's liability to cover employee injuries or disease compensable under Worker's Compensation statutes of states in which Work is conducted under this contract; disability benefit laws, if any; or Federal compensation acts such as U. S. Longshoremen or Harbor Worker's Maritime Employment, or Railroad Compensation Act(s), if applicable. Self-insurance plans approved by regulatory authorities in state in which Work on this Project is performed are acceptable. Contractor shall assure all subcontractors have worker's compensation coverage for their employees. Supply a copy of all certificates to the Owner prior to commencement of work. The Owner is to be named as an additional insured to the General Contractor's policy for this project. Comprehensive General Liability policy to cover bodily injury to persons other than employees and for damage to tangible property, including loss of use thereof, including following exposures: All premises and operations. Explosion, collapse and underground damage. Contractor's protective coverage for independent contractors or subcontractors employed by him. Contractual liability as required by General Conditions, Paragraph 5.4. Usual personal injury liability endorsement with no exclusions pertaining to employment. Products and completed operations coverage. Comprehensive automobile liability policy to cover bodily injury and property damage arising out of ownership, maintenance, or use of any motor vehicle, including owned, non -owned, and hire vehicles. In light of standard policy provisions concerning (1) loading and unloading and (2) definitions pertaining to motor vehicles licensed for road use versus unlicensed or self-propelled construction equipment, it is strongly recommended that comprehensive general liability and comprehensive auto liability be written by same insurance carrier, though not necessarily in one policy. Contractor shall purchase for Owner, Owner's Protective Liability policy to protect Owner, Engineer, their consultants, agents, employees and such public corporations in whose jurisdiction Work is located for their contingent liability for work performed by Contractor and subcontractor(s) under this Contract. Owner shall purchase Builders' Risk covering property of Project for full cost of replacement as of time of any loss which shall include, as named insured, (1) Contractor, (2) all subcontractors, SUPPLEMENTARY CONDITIONS 00730 Navarro West Center Navarro Drive and Welbourne Drive For Construction March 12th, 2008 (3) Owner and Architect/Engineer, as their respective interests may prove to be at time of loss, covering insurable property which is subject of this Contract, whether in place, stored at job site, stored elsewhere, or in transit at risk of insured(s). Coverage shall be affected on "All Risk" form including, but not limited to, perils of fire, wind, vandalism, collapse, theft, and earthquake, with exclusions normal to cover. Contractor may arrange for such deductibles as it deems to be within its ability to self -assume, but it will be held solely responsible for amount of such deductible and for any coinsurance penalties. Any insured loss shall be adjusted with Owner and Contractor and paid to Owner and Contractor as Trustee for other insured. Umbrella or Excess Liability: Owner or its representative may, for certain projects, require limits higher than those stated under "Limits of Liability" below. Contractor is granted option of arranging coverage under single policy for full limit required or by combination of underlying policies with balance provided by Excess or Liability policy equal to total limit(s) requested. Umbrella or excess policy wording shall be at least as broad as preliminary or underlying policy(ies) and shall apply both to Contractor's general liability, to its automobile liability insurance and employer's liability insurance. Limits of Liability: Required limits of liability for insurance coverage required above shall be not less than following: 1. Worker's Compensation: Worker's Compensation Employers Liability 2. Comprehensive General Liability: Coverage A - Bodily Injury & Property Damage Liability Fire Damage Liability Coverage B - Personal & Advertising Injury Liability Statutory $500,000 Per Accident Bodily Injury by Accident $500,000 Policy Aggregate Bodily Injury by Disease $500,000 Per Accident Bodily Injury by Disease $1,000,000 Any One Occurrence Subject to Products Completed Operations & General Aggregates $50,000 Any One Fire Subject to General Aggregate $1,000,000 Any One Person Subject to General Aggregate SUPPLEMENTARY CONDITIONS 00730 Navarro West Center Navarro Drive and Welbourne Drive Coverage C - Medical Payments Aggregate Limits of Liability: 4. Automobile: Liability 5. Builder's Risk -Installation Floater: 6. Umbrellas or Excess Liability: . Other Requirements: For Construction March 12th, 2008 $5,000 Any One Person Subject to General Aggregate $2,000,000 Products/Completed Operations Aggregate $2,000,000 General Aggregate $1,000,000 Per Accident Owned, Non -owned & Hired Autos By Owner $5,000,000 Owner reserves the right to request complete copies of policies if deemed necessary to ascertain details of coverage not provided by certificates. Such policy copies shall be "Originally Signed Copies", and so designated. Qualifications of Insurers: In order to determine financial strength and reputation of insurance carriers, all companies providing coverage required shall have financial rating not lower than XII and policyholder's service rating no lower than A- as listed in A. M. Best's Key Rating Guide, current edition. Companies with ratings lower than A-: XII will be acceptable only upon written consent of Owner. Subrogation Clause: Following subrogation clause (or similar wording) shall appear in all policies of liability insurance, "Subrogation Clause": It is hereby stipulated that this insurance shall not be invalidated should insured waive in writing prior to loss any or all right of recovery against any party for loss related to work performed under this Contract. Add the following Sub -Subparagraph 11.1.3.1 to Subparagraph 11.1.3: "11.1.3.1 The Contractor shall furnish one copy each of Certificates of Insurance herein required for each copy of the Agreement which shall specifically set forth evidence of all coverage required by Subparagraph 11.1.1, 11.1.2 and 11.1.3. The form of the Certificates shall be AIA Document G-715. The Contractor shall furnish to the Owner copies of any endorsements that are subsequently issued amending coverage or limits. SUPPLEMENTARY CONDITIONS 00730 Navarro West Center For Construction Navarro Drive and Welboume Drive March 12th, 2008 Article 13 - Miscellaneous Provisions 13.1 Governing Law ' Add the following to Subparagraph 13.1.1: "In all operations under the Contract, the Contractor agrees that he will comply with provisions of all State and Federal Laws (including OSHA) and all local ordinances which may affect such operations." END OF SUPPLEMENTARY CONDITIONS SUPPLEMENTARY CONDITIONS 00730 Navarro West Center Welbourne Drive and Navarro Drive SECTION 01100 SUMMARY For Permit and Pricing March 12th, 2008 PART 1 GENERAL 1.01 PROJECT A. Project Name: Navarro West Center. B. Owner's Name: David Cottrell Investments Inc. C. The Project consists of the construction of new construction of a retail shell building and the associated site improvements 7,967 s.f. of the building is shell retail construction. The remaining 11,990 s.f. is shell retail construction with complete tenant improvement interior buildout. 1. The building is steel frame with concrete tilt wall front, rear, and side walls. Finishes include paint, brick, eifs, standing seam awning and aluminum and glass storefront. 2. Sitework includes, dumpster enclosure, permiter fencing, landscape, paving, storm detention, and building service utilities. 1.02 CONTRACT DESCRIPTION A. Contract Type: A single prime contract based on a Stipulated Price as described in Document 00500 - Agreement. 1.03 OWNER OCCUPANCY A. Owner intends to occupy the Project upon Substantial Completion. B. Cooperate with Owner to minimize conflict and to facilitate Owner's operations. C. Schedule the Work to accommodate Owner occupancy. 1.04 CONTRACTOR USE OF SITE AND PREMISES A. Construction Operations: Limited to areas noted on Drawings. B. Provide access to and from site as required by law and by Owner: 1. Emergency Building Exits During Construction: Keep all exits required by code open during construction period; provide temporary exit signs if exit routes are temporarily altered. 2. Do not obstruct roadways, sidewalks, or other public ways without permit. r 07128 / Navarro West Center END OF SECTION 01100 - 1 SUMMARY Navarro West Center Welbourne Drive and Navarro Drive SECTION 01200 PRICE AND PAYMENT PROCEDURES PART1 GENERAL 1.01 SECTION INCLUDES For Permit and Pricing March 12th, 2008 A. Procedures for preparation and submittal of applications for progress payments. 1.02 RELATED SECTIONS A. Document 00500 - Agreement: Contract Sum, retainages, payment period. B. Document 00700 - General Conditions and Document 00800 - Supplementary Conditions: Additional requirements for progress payments, final payment, changes in the Work. C. Section 0126 57 - Pricing of Construction Contract Change Orders: Percentage allowances for Contractor's overhead and profit. D. Section 0122 00 - Unit Prices: Payment and modification procedures relating to unit prices. 1.03 SCHEDULE OF VALUES A. Electronic media printout including equivalent information will be considered in lieu of standard form specified; submit sample to Architect for approval. B. Forms filled out by hand will not be accepted. C. Submit a printed schedule on AIA Form G703 - Application and Certificate for Payment Continuation Sheet. Contractor's standard form or electronic media printout will be considered. 1 D. Submit Schedule of Values in duplicate within 30 days after date of Owner -Contractor Agreement. E. Format: Utilize the Table of Contents of this Project Manual. Identify each line item with number and title of the specification Section. Identify site mobilization. F. Include separately from each line item, a direct proportional amount of Contractor's overhead and profit. G. Revise schedule to list approved Change Orders, with each Application For Payment. 1.04- APPLICATIONS FOR PROGRESS PAYMENTS A. Payment Period: _Monthly B. Electronic media printout including equivalent information will be considered in lieu of standard form specified; submit sample to Architect for approval. C. Forms filled out by hand will not be accepted. D. Present required information in typewritten form. E. Form: AIA G702 Application and Certificate for Payment and AIA G703 - Continuation Sheet including continuation sheets when required. F. Execute certification by signature of authorized officer. G. Use data from approved Schedule of Values. Provide dollar value in each column for each line item for portion of work performed and for stored Products. H. Submit three signed and notorized copies of each Application for Payment. I. Include the following with the application: 07128 / Navarro West Center 01200 - 1 PRICE AND PAYMENT PROCEDURES Navarro West Center For Permit and Pricing Welbourne Drive and Navarro Drive March 12th, 2008 1. Transmittal letter as specified for Submittals in Section 01300. 2. Construction progress schedule, revised and current as specified in Section 01325. 3. Partial release of liens from major Subcontractors and vendors. 4. Affidavits attesting to off -site stored products. J. When Owner requires substantiating information, submit data justifying dollar amounts in question. 1.05 MODIFICATION PROCEDURES A. The Architect will advise of minor changes in the Work not involving an adjustment to Contract Sum or Contract Time as authorized by the Conditions of the Contract by issuing Supplemental Instructions. B. Construction Change Directive (AIA G714): Architect/Engineer may issue a document, signed by the Owner and Architect, instructing the Contractor to proceed with a change in the Contract, for subsequent inclusion in a Change Order. 1. The document will describe the required changes and will designate method of determining any change in Contract Sum or Contract Time. 2. Promptly execute the change. C. Proposal Request. The Architect/Engineer may issue an AESI which includes a detailed description of a proposed change with supplementary or revised Drawings and specifications, a request for any change in Contract Time for executing the change with a stipulation of any overtime work required and sixty (60) days during which the requested price will be considered valid. Contractor shall prepare and submit a fixed price quotation within 14 days. D. Contractor may propose a change by submitting a request for change to Architect, describing the proposed change and its full effect on the Work, with a statement describing the reason for the change, and the effect on the Contract Sum and Contract Time with full documentation and a statement describing the effect on Work by separate or other contractors. Document any requested substitutions in accordance with Section 01600. E. Computation of Change in Contract Amount: As specified in the Agreement and Conditions of the Contract. 1. For change requested by Owner for work falling under a fixed price contract, the amount will be based on Contractor's price quotation. 2. For change requested by Contractor, the amount will be based on the Contractor's request for a Change Order as approved by Owner. 3. For change ordered by Owner without a quotation from Contractor, the amount will be determined by Owner based on the Contractor's substantiation of costs as specified for Time and Material work. F. Substantiation of Costs: Provide full information required for evaluation. 1. Provide following data: a. Quantities of products, labor, and equipment. b. Taxes, insurance, and bonds. c. Overhead and profit. d. Justification for any change in Contract Time. e. Credit for deletions from Contract, similarly documented. G. Execution of Change Orders: Owner will issue Change Orders for signatures of parties as provided in the Conditions of the Contract on. 07128 / Navarro West Center 01200 - 2 PRICE AND PAYMENT PROCEDURES Navarro West Center Welbourne Drive and Navarro Drive For Permit and Pricing March 12th, 2008 H. After execution of Change Order, promptly revise Schedule of Values and Application for Payment forms to record each authorized Change Order as a separate line item and adjust the Contract Sum. Any change order including multiple unrelated changes shall be broken down in the Schedule of Values showing each change. I. Promptly revise progress schedules to reflect any change in Contract Time, revise sub -schedules to adjust times for other items of work affected by the change, and resubmit. J. Promptly enter changes in Project Record Documents. 1.06 APPLICATION FOR FINAL PAYMENT A. Prepare Application for Final Payment as specified for progress payments, identifying total adjusted Contract Sum, previous payments, and sum remaining due. B. Application for Final Payment will not be considered until the following have been accomplished: 1. All closeout procedures specified in Section 01 70 00. PART 2 PRODUCTS - NOT USED PART 3 EXECUTION - NOT USED 07128 / Navarro West Center END OF SECTION 01200 - 3 PRICE AND PAYMENT PROCEDURES 11 [i Navarro West Center Welbourne Drive and Navarro Drive SECTION 01270 UNIT PRICES PART1 GENERAL 1.01 SECTION INCLUDES A. List of unit prices. For Permit and Pricing March 12th, 2008 B. Measurement and payment criteria applicable to Work performed under a unit price payment method. C. Defect assessment and non-payment for rejected work. 1.02 COSTS INCLUDED A. Unit Prices shall include full compensation for all required labor, products, tools, equipment, plant, transportation, services and incidentals; erection, application or installation of an item of the Work; overhead and profit. 1.03 MEASUREMENT OF QUANTITIES A. Measurement methods delineated in the individual specification sections complement the criteria of this section. In the event of conflict, the requirements of the individual specification section govem. B. Take all measurements and compute quantities. Measurements and quantities will be verified by Architect. C. Assist by providing necessary equipment, workers, and survey personnel as required. 1.04 PAYMENT A. Payment for Work govemed by unit prices will be made on the basis of the actual measurements and quantities of Work that is incorporated in or made necessary by the Work and accepted by the Architect, multiplied by the unit price. B. Payment will not be made for any of the following: 1. Products wasted or disposed of in a manner that is not acceptable. 2. Products determined as unacceptable before or after placement. 3. Products remaining on hand after completion of the Work. 4. Loading, hauling, and disposing of rejected Products. 1.05 DEFECT ASSESSMENT A. Replace Work, or portions of the Work, not conforming to specified requirements. B. If, in the opinion of Architect, it is not practical to remove and replace the Work, Architect will direct one of the following remedies: 1. The defective Work may remain, but the unit price will be adjusted to a new unit price at the discretion of Architect. 2. The defective Work will be partially repaired to the instructions of the Architect, and the unit price will be adjusted to a new unit price at the discretion of Architect. C. The authority of Architect to assess the defect and identify payment adjustment is final. 1.06 SCHEDULE OF UNIT PRICES A. Unit costs for additional contractor labor: 1. Unit cost for Electricians per hour. 2. Unit cost for Plumbers per hour. 07128 / Navarro West Center 01270 - 1 UNIT PRICES 1 Navarro West Center For Permit and Pricing Welbourne Drive and Navarro Drive March 12th, 2008 3. Unit cost for Roofers per hour. 4. Unit cost for Framers per hour. B. Unit costs for material and installation: 1. Tenant hollow metal door and frame access door, including hardware and installation per each. 2. Storefront door and frame, including hardware and installationper each. 3. Roof Curb per each (6' x 6' x 12" high small equipment curb). 4. Pipe penetrations (vent pipe) per each. PART 2 PRODUCTS - NOT USED PART 3 EXECUTION - NOT USED END OF SECTION 07128 / Navarro West Center 01270 - 2 UNIT PRICES Navarro West Center Welbourne Drive and Navarro Drive SECTION 01300 ADMINISTRATIVE REQUIREMENTS For Permit and Pricing March 12th, 2008 PART1 GENERAL 1.01 SECTION INCLUDES A. Preconstruction meeting. B. Progress meetings. C. Construction progress schedule. D. Submittals for review, information, and project closeout. E. Number of copies of submittals. F. Submittal procedures. 1.02 RELATED SECTIONS A. Section 01700 - Execution Requirements: Additional coordination requirements. B. Section 01780 - Closeout Submittals: Project record documents. PART 2 PRODUCTS - NOT USED PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 PRECONSTRUCTION MEETING A. Owner will schedule a meeting after Notice of Award. B. Attendance Required: 1. Owner. 2. Architect. 3. Contractor. C. Agenda: 1. Execution of Owner -Contractor Agreement. 2. Submission of executed bonds and insurance certificates. 3. Distribution of Contract Documents. 4. Submission of list of Subcontractors, schedule of values, and progress schedule. 5. Designation of personnel representing the parties to Contract, None - N/A, and Architect. 6. Procedures and processing of field decisions, submittals, substitutions, applications for payments, proposal request, Change Orders, and Contract closeout procedures. 7. Scheduling. D. Record minutes and distribute copies within two days after meeting to participants, with two copies to Architect, Owner, participants, and those affected by decisions made. 3.02 PROGRESS MEETINGS A. Schedule and administer meetings throughout progress of the Work at maximum monthly intervals. B. Attendance Required: Job superintendent, major Subcontractors and suppliers, Owner, Architect, as appropriate to agenda topics for each meeting. C. Agenda: 1. Review minutes of previous meetings. 2. Review of Work progress. 07128 / Navarro West Center 01300 - 1 ADMINISTRATIVE REQUIREMENTS Navarro West Center Welbourne Drive and Navarro Drive 3. Field observations, problems, and decisions. 4. Identification of problems which impede planned progress. 5. Review of submittals schedule and status of submittals. 6. Maintenance of progress schedule. 7. Corrective measures to regain projected schedules. 8. Planned progress during succeeding work period. 9. Maintenance of quality and work standards. 10. Effect of proposed changes on progress schedule and coordination. 11. Other business relating to Work. For Permit and Pricing , March 12th, 2008 D. Record minutes and distribute copies within two days after meeting to participants, with two copies to Architect, Owner, participants, and those affected by decisions made. 3.03 CONSTRUCTION PROGRESS SCHEDULE A. Within 10 days after date of the Agreement, submit preliminary schedule defining planned operations for the first 60 days of Work, with a general outline for remainder of Work. B. If preliminary schedule requires revision after review, submit revised schedule within 10 days. C. Within 20 days after review of preliminary schedule, submit draft of proposed complete schedule for review. 1. Include written certification that major contractors have reviewed and accepted proposed schedule. D. Within 10 days after joint review, submit complete schedule. E. Submit updated schedule with each Application for Payment. 3.04 SUBMITTALS FOR REVIEW A. When the following are specified in individual sections, submit them for review: 1. Product data. 2. Shop drawings. 3. Samples for selection. 4. Samples for verification. B. Submit to Architect for review for the limited purpose of checking for conformance with information given and the design concept expressed in the contract documents. C. Samples will be reviewed only for aesthetic, color, or finish selection. D. After review, provide copies and distribute in accordance with SUBMITTAL PROCEDURES article below and for record documents purposes described in Section 01780 - CLOSEOUT SUBMITTALS. 3.05 SUBMITTALS FOR INFORMATION A. When the following are specified in individual sections, submit them for information: 1. Design data. 2. Certificates. 3. Test reports. 4. Inspection reports. 5. Manufacturer's instructions. 6. Manufacturer's field reports. 7. Other types indicated. B. Submit for Architect's knowledge as contract administrator or for Owner. No action will be taken 3.06 SUBMITTALS FOR PROJECT CLOSEOUT - 07128 /Navarro West Center 01300 2 ADMINISTRATIVE REQUIREMENTS I Navarro West Center Welbourne Drive and Navarro Drive For Permit and Pricing March 12th, 2008 A. When the following are specified in individual sections, submit them at project closeout: 1. Project record documents. 2. Operation and maintenance data. 3. Warranties. 4. Bonds. 5. Other types as indicated. B. Submit for Owner's benefit during and after project completion. 3.07 NUMBER OF COPIES OF SUBMITTALS A. Documents for Review: 1. Small Size Sheets, Not Larger Than 8-1/2 x 11 inches (215 x 280 mm): Submit the number of copies which the Contractor requires, plus two copies which will be retained by the Architect. 2. Larger Sheets, Not Larger Than 36 x 48 inches (910 x 1220 mm): Submit one reproducible transparency and one opaque reproduction. B. Documents for Information: Submit two copies. C. Documents for Project Closeout: Make one reproduction of submittal originally reviewed. Submit one extra of submittals for information. D. Samples: Submit the number specified in individual specification sections; one of which will be retained by Architect. 1. After review, produce duplicates. 2. Retained samples will not be returned to Contractor unless specifically so stated. 3.08 SUBMITTAL PROCEDURES A. Transmit each submittal with approved form. B. Sequentially number the transmittal form. Revise submittals with original number and a sequential alphabetic suffix. C. Identify Project, Contractor, Subcontractor or supplier; pertinent drawing and detail number, and specification section number, as appropriate on each copy. D. Apply Contractor's stamp, signed or initialed certifying that review, approval, verification of Products required, field dimensions, adjacent construction Work, and coordination of information is in accordance with the requirements of the Work and Contract Documents. E. Deliver submittals to Architect at business address. F. Schedule submittals to expedite the Project, and coordinate submission of related items. G. For each submittal for review, allow 15 days excluding delivery time to and from the Contractor. H. Identify variations from Contract Documents and Product or system limitations which may be detrimental to successful performance of the completed Work. I. Provide space for Contractor and Architect review stamps. J. When revised for resubmission, identify all changes made since previous submission. K. Distribute copies of reviewed submittals as appropriate. Instruct parties to promptly report any inability to comply with requirements. L. Submittals not requested will not be recognized or processed. END OF SECTION 07128 / Navarro West Center 01300 - 3 ADMINISTRATIVE REQUIREMENTS Navarro West Center For Permit and Pricing Welbourne Drive and Navarro Drive March 12th, 2008 SECTION 01265 PRICING OF CONSTRUCTION CONTRACT CHANGE ORDERS PART1 GENERAL 1.01 GENERAL PROVISIONS A. The contract language contained in this Document will supplement and take precedence over all other change order pricing contract provisions in the Contract Documents provided by either the Owner, Construction Manager (Contractor), General Contractor (Contractor) and/or Architect/ Engineer. It is understood that these contract provisions will govern the pricing and administration of all change order proposals to be submitted by the Construction Manager and/or the General Contractor and/or the Trade Contractors and/or the Subcontractors and/or all other lower tier subcontractors (all referred to as "Contractor' in this Document). In the event of a conflict between the other contract documents used for the project, the change order pricing contract provisions in this Section 0126 57 shall govern. B. Contractor agrees that it will incorporate the provisions of this Document into all agreements with lower tier Contractors. It is understood that these change order pricing provisions apply to all types of contracts and/or subcontracts specifically including lump sum (or fixed price contracts), unit price contracts, and/or cost plus contracts with or without a guaranteed maximum. It is further understood that these change order provisions will apply to all methods of change order pricing specifically including lump sum change order proposals, unit price change order proposals, and cost plus change order proposals. C. Whenever change order proposals to adjust the contract price become necessary, the Owner will have the right to select the method of pricing to be used by the Contractor in accordance with the pricing provisions found in this Dcoument. The options will be (1) lump sum change order proposals, (2) unit price change order proposal, or (3) cost plus change order proposal as defined in the following provisions. 1.02 LUMP SUM CHANGE ORDER PROPSOALS A. The Contractor will submit a properly itemized Lump Sum Change Order Proposal covering the additional work and/or the work to be deleted. This proposal will be itemized for the various components of work and segregated by labor, material, and equipment in a detailed format satisfactory to Owner. The Owner will require itemized change orders on all change order proposals from the Contractor, subcontractors, and sub -subcontractors regardless of tier. Details to be submitted will include detailed line item estimates showing detailed materials quantity take -offs, material prices by item and related labor hour pricing information and extensions (by line item or by drawing as applicable). 1.03 LABOR A. Estimated labor costs to be included for self -performed work shall be based on the actual cost per hour paid by the Contractor for those workers or crews of workers who the Contractor reasonably anticipates will perform the change order work. Estimated labor hours shall include hours only for those workmen and working foremen directly involved in performing the change order work. Supervision above the level of working foremen (such as general foremen, superintendent, project manager, etc.) is considered to be included in the Markup Percentages as outlined in paragraphs 1.6 and 1.7 of this Document. Note: No separate allowances for warranty expense will be allowed as a direct cost of a change order. Costs attributed to warranty expenses will be considered to be covered by the Markup Percentages as outlined in paragraphs 1.07 and 1.08 of this Document. 1.04 LABOR BURDEN I07128 / Navarro West Center PRICI119a2GF-pONSTRUCTION CONTRACT CHANGE ORDERS Navarro West Center Welboume Drive and Navarro Drive For Permit and Pricing March 12th, 2008 A. Labor burden allowable in change orders shall be defined as employer's net actual cost of payroll taxes (FICA, Medicare, SUTA, FUTA), net actual cost for employer's cost of union benefits (or other usual and customary fringe benefits if the employees are not union employees), and net actual cost to employer for workers' compensation insurance taking into consideration adjustments for experience modifiers, premium discounts, dividends, rebates, expense constants, assigned risk pool costs, net cost reductions due to policies with deductibles for self -insured losses, assigned risk rebates, etc. Contractor shall reduce their standard payroll tax percentages to properly reflect the effective cost reduction due to the estimated impact of the annual maximum wages subject to payroll taxes. (An estimated percentage for labor burden may be used for pricing change orders. However, the percentage used for labor burden to price change orders will be examined at the conclusion of the project and an adjustment to the approved change orders will be processed if it is determined that the actual labor burden percentage should have been more or less than the estimated percentage used.) 1.05 MATERIAL A. Estimated material change order costs shall reflect the Contractor's reasonably anticipated net actual cost for the purchase of the material needed for the change order work. Estimated material costs shall reflect cost reductions available to the Contractor due to trade discounts, free material credits, and/or volume rebates. "Cash" discounts (i.e., prompt payment discounts of 2% or less) available on material purchased for change order work shall be credited to Owner if the Contractor is provided Owner funds in time for Contractor to take advantage of any such "cash" discounts. Price quotations from material suppliers must be itemized with unit prices for each specific item to be purchased. "Lot pricing" quotations will not be considered sufficient substantiating detail. 1.06 EQUIPMENT A. Allowable change order estimated costs may include appropriate amounts for rental of major equipment specifically needed to perform the change order work (defined as tools and equipment with an individual purchase cost of more than $500). For Contractor owned equipment, the "bare" equipment rental rates allowed to be used for pricing change order proposals shall be 75% of the monthly rate listed in the most current publication of The AED Green Book divided by 176 to arrive at a maximum hourly rate to be applied to the hours the equipment is used performing the change order work. Further, for Contractor owned equipment the aggregate equipment rent changes for any single piece of equipment used in all change order work shall be limited to 50% of the fair market value of the piece of equipment when the first change order is priced involving usage of the price of equipment. Fuel necessary to operate the equipment will be considered as a separate direct cost associated with the change order work. 1.07 MAXIMUM MARKUP PERCENTAGE ALLOWABLE ON SELF -PERFORMED WORK A. With respect to pricing change orders, the maximum Markup Percentage Fee to be paid to any Contractor (regardless of tier) on self -performed work shall be a single markup percentage not -to -exceed (the following sliding scale of percentages) of the net direct cost of (1) direct labor and allowable labor burden costs applicable to the change order or extra work; (2) the net cost of material and installed equipment incorporated into the change or extra work; and (3) net rental cost of major equipment and related fuel costs necessary to complete the change in the Work. The following sliding scale will apply for the pricing of self -performed work portion of each change order proposal request: 1. 15% on the first $25,000 of the change order direct cost of self -performed work, 2. 10% on the portion of the change order direct cost of self -performed work between $25,000 and $50,000 and, 07128 / Navarro West Center PRICIIQVGF-�MNSTRLICTION CONTRACT CHANGE ORDERS ' Navarro West Center For Permit and Pricing Welbourne Drive and Navarro Drive March 12th, 2008 ' 3. 7.5% on the portion of the change order direct cost of self -performed work between $50,000 and $200,000 and, ' 4. 5% on the portion of the change order direct cost of self -performed work greater than $200,000. B. The markup computed using the above formula shall be considered to be allocated 2/3 to cover ' applicable overhead costs directly attributable to the field overhead costs related to processing and supervising the change order work, and the remaining 1/3 to cover home office overhead costs and profit. ' 1.08 MAXIMUM MARKUP PERCENTAGES ALLOWABLE ON WORK PERFORMED BY LOWER TIER CONTRACTORS ' A. With respect to pricing the portion of change order proposals involving work performed by lower tier contractors, the maximum Markup Percentage Fee allowable to the Contractor supervising the lower tier contractor's work shall not exceed five percent (5%) of the net of all approved change order work performed by all subcontractors combined for any particular change order ' proposal. B. The markup computed using the above formula shall be considered to be allocated 2/3 to cover applicable overhead costs directly attributable to the field overhead costs related to processing ' and supervising the change order work, and the remaining 1/3 to cover home office overhead costs and profit. 1.09 NO MARKUP ON SALES AND USE TAX A. Sales and use tax (if applicable) shall not be subject to any Markup Percentage Fee. Any sales or use tax properly payable by the Contractors shall be added after computing the change order ' amount before tax. 1.10 DIRECT AND INDIRECT COSTS COVERED BY MARKUP PERCENTAGES A. As a further clarification, the agreed upon Markup Percentage Fee is intended to cover the Contractor's profit and all indirect costs associated with the change order work. Items intended to be covered by the Markup Percentage Fee include, but are not limited to home expenses, branch office and field office overhead expense of any kind; project management; superintendents, general foremen; estimating, engineering; coordinating; expediting; purchasing; detailing; legal, accounting, data processing or other administrative expenses; shop drawings; permits; auto insurance and umbrella insurance; pick-up truck costs; and warranty expense costs. The cost for the use of small tools is also to be considered covered by the Markup Percentage Fee. Small tools shall be defined as tools and equipment (power or non -power) with an individual purchase cost of less than $500. 1.11 DIRECT CHANGE ORDERS AND NET DEDUCT CHANGES A. The application of the markup percentages referenced in the preceding paragraphs 1.07 and 1.08 will apply to both additive and deductive change orders. In the case of a deductive change order, the credit will be computed by applying the sliding scale percentages as outlined in paragraphs 1.07 and 1.08 so that a deductive change order would be computed in the same manner as an additive change order. In those instances where a change involves both additive and deductive work, the additions and deductions will be netted and the markup percentage adjustments will be applied to the net amount. 1.12 CONTINGENCY A. In no event will any lump sum or percentage amounts for "contingency" be allowed to be added as a separate line item in change order estimates. Unknowns attributable to labor hours will be accounted for when estimating labor hours anticipated to perform the work. Unknowns 07128 / Navarro West Center PRIC119(M9F-MNSTRUCTION CONTRACT CHANGE ORDERS Navarro West Center Welbourne Drive and Navarro Drive For Permit and Pricing March 12th, 2008 attributable to material scrap and waste will be estimated as part of material costs. 1.13 CHANGE ORDER PROPOSAL TIME AND CHANGE DIRECTIVES A. The Contractor's proposals for changes in the contract amount or time shall be submitted within seven (7) calendar days of the Owner's request, unless the Owner extends such period of time due to the circumstances involved. If such proposals are not received in a timely manner, if the proposals are not acceptable to Owner, or if the changed work should be started immediately to avoid damage to the project or costly delay, the Owner may direct the Contractor to proceed with the changes without waiting for the Contractor's proposal or for the formal change order to be issued. In the case of an unacceptable Contractor proposal, the Owner may direct the Contractor to proceed with the changed work on a cost-plus basis with an agreed upon "not -to -exceed" price for the work to be performed. Such directions to the Contractor by the Owner shall be confirmed in writing by a "Notice to Proceed on Changes" letter within seven (7) calendar days. The cost or credit, and of time extensions will be determined by negotiations as soon as practical thereafter and incorporated in a Change Order to the Contract. 1.14 LIABILITY INSURANCE AND BONDS A. In the event of the Contractor has been required to furnish comprehensive general liability insurance and/or performance and/or payment bonds as part of the base contract price, a final contract change order will be processed to account for the Contractor's net increase or decrease in comprehensive general liability insurance costs and/or bond premium costs associated with change orders to Contractor's base price. Contract adjustments related to any such increased or decreased costs related to insurance and/or bond coverage will not be subject to any Contractor markup for overhead and profit. 1.15 COST PLUS FEE AGREEMENTS A. In those contract situations where the Contractor (Construction Manager, General Contractor, Prime Contractor, Trade Contractor, Subcontractor or Sub -subcontractor) has entered into a cost plus fee with a guaranteed maximum contract arrangement where the basis of compensation is reimbursement for defined "Cost of the Work" plus either a stated percentage fee or fixed fee subject to an agreed upon contract guaranteed maximum price, the Contractor's total percentage fee or fixed fee to be paid under the terms of cost plus contract agreement shall be adjusted either upward or downward by the same percentage stated in the applicable portion of the cost plus fee agreement. The percentage markups to be applied for the pricing of change orders which will increase or decrease the contract guaranteed maximum price will be percentages outlined in paragraphs 1.07 and 1.08 of this Contract. However, those percentage markups which are intended to cover field overhead and certain other direct costs attributable to the change order work will not apply to adjustments in the total adjusted fee payable to the Contractor under the cost plus fee portion of the contract agreement. B. For example, if the contract utilizes a Fixed Fee, the base contract Fixed Fee will be adjusted by 1/3 of the net percentage markups included in all approved change orders. The remaining 2/3 of the net markups on approved change orders will be considered an adjustment to the Contractor's general conditions budget. 1.16 UNIT PRICE CHANGE ORDER PROPOSALS A. As an alternative to Lump Sum Change Order Proposals, the Owner or the Construction Manager acting with the approval of the Owner may choose the option to use Contract Unit Prices. Agreed upon Contract Unit Prices shall be the same for added quantities and deductive quantities. Unit Prices are not required to be used for pricing change orders where other methods of pricing change order work are more equitable. 07128 / Navarro West Center PRICIOE26IF-GgNSTRUCTION CONTRACT CHANGE ORDERS Navarro West Center Welbourne Drive and Navarro Drive For Permit and Pricing March 12th, 2008 B. The Contractor will submit, within seven (7) days after receipt of the Owner's written request for a Unit Price Proposal, a written Unit Price proposal itemizing the quantities of each item of work for which there is an applicable Contract Unit Price. The quantities must be itemized in relation to each specific contract drawing. C. Contract Unit Prices will be applied to net differences of quantities of the same item. Such Contract Unit Prices will be considered to coverall direct and indirect costs of furnishing and installing the item including the subcontractor's Markup Percentage Fee. 1.17 COST PLUS CHANGE ORDER PROPOSALS A. As an alternative to either Lump Sum Change Order Proposals or Unit Price Change Order Proposals, the Owner may elect to have any extra work performed on a cost plus markup percentage fee basis. Upon written notice to proceed, the Contractor shall perform such authorized extra work at actual cost for direct labor (working foremen, journeymen, apprentices, helpers, etc.), actual cost of labor burden, actual cost of material used to perform the extra work, and actual cost of rental of major equipment (without any charge for administration, clerical expense, general supervision or superintendent of any nature whatsoever, including general foremen, or the cost of rental of small tools, minor equipment, or plant) plus the approved Markup Percentage Fee. The intent of this clause is to define allowable cost plus chargeable costs to be the same as those allowable when pricing Lump Sum Change Proposals as outlined in subparagraphs 1.01 through 1.15 above. Owner and Contractor may agree in advance in writing on a maximum price for this work and Owner shall not be liable for any charge in excess of the maximum. Daily time sheets with names of all Contractors' employees working on the project will be required to be submitted to the Owner for both labor and equipment used by the Contractor for time periods during which extra work is performed on a cost plus fee basis. Daily time sheets will break down the paid hours worked by the Contractors' employees showing both base contract work as well as extra work performed by each employee. 1.18 ACCURATE CHANGE ORDER PRICING INFORMATION A. Contractor agrees that it is responsible for submitting accurate cost and pricing data to support its Lump Sum Change and/or Cost Plus Change Order Proposals or other contract price adjustments under the contract. Contractor further agrees to submit change order proposals with cost and pricing data which is accurate, complete, current, and in accordance with the terms of the contract with respect to pricing of change orders. 1.19. RIGHT TO VERIFY CHANGE ORDER PRICING INFORMATION A. Contractor agrees that any designated Owner's representative will have the right to examine the Contractor's records (during the contract period and up to three years after final payment is made on the contract) to verify the accuracy and appropriateness of the pricing data used to price all change order proposals and/or claims. Contractor agrees that if the Owner determines the cost and pricing data submitted (whether approved or not) was inaccurate, incomplete, not current, or not in compliance with the terms of the contract regarding pricing of change orders, an appropriate contract price adjustment will be made. Such post -approval contract price adjustments will apply to all levels of contractors and/or subcontractors and to all types of change order proposals specifically including lump sum change orders, unit price change orders, and cost-plus change orders. 1.20 REQUIREMENTS FOR DETAILED CHANGE ORDER PRICING INFORMATION A. Contractor agrees to provide and require all Subcontractors to provide a breakdown of allowable labor and labor burden cost information as outlined in this Document. This information will be used to evaluate the potential cost of labor and labor burden related to change order work. It is intended that this information represent an accurate estimate of the Contractor's actual labor 07128 / Navarro West Center PRICIIg(B26F-CDNSTRUCTION CONTRACT CHANGE ORDERS Navarro West Center For Permit and Pricing Welbourne Drive and Navarro Drive March 12th, 2008 and labor burden cost components. This information is not intended to establish fixed billing or change order pricing labor rates. However, at the time change orders are priced, the submitted cost data for labor rates may be used to price change order work. The accuracy of any such agreed upon labor cost components used to price change orders will be subject to later audit. Approved change order amounts may be adjusted later to correct the impact of inaccurate labor cost components if the agreed upon labor cost components are determined to be inaccurate. PART 2 PRODUCTS - NOT USED PART 3 EXECUTION - NOT USED END OF SECTION 07128 / Navarro West Center PRICII9V6''F-iMONSTRUCTION CONTRACT CHANGE ORDERS Navarro West Center Welboume Drive and Navarro Drive SECTION 01325 CONSTRUCTION PROGRESS SCHEDULE For Permit and Pricing March 12th, 2008 PART1 GENERAL 1.01 SECTION INCLUDES A. Preliminary schedule. B. Construction progress schedule, bar chart type. 1.02 SUBMITTALS A. Within 10 days after date of Agreement, submit a preliminary construction schedule for review by the Architect and Owner. 1. Include written certification that major contractors have reviewed and accepted proposed schedule. B. Within 10 days after joint review and comments by the Architect and Owner, submit complete schedule. C. Submit updated schedule with each Application for Payment. D. Submit the number of opaque reproductions the Contract requires, plus two copies which will be retained by Architect. 1.03 SCHEDULE FORMAT A. Listings: In chronological order according to the start date for each activity. Identify each activity with the applicable specification section number. B. Sheet Size: Multiples of 8-1/2 x 11 inches (216 x 280 mm). PART 2 PRODUCTS - NOT USED PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 PRELIMINARY SCHEDULE A. Prepare preliminary schedule in the form of a horizontal bar chart. 3.02 CONTENT A. Show complete sequence of construction by activity, with dates for beginning and completion of each element of construction. B. Identify each item by specification section number. C. Show accumulated percentage of completion of each item, and total percentage of Work completed, as of the first day of each month. D. Provide separate schedule of submittal dates for shop drawings, product data, and samples, Products identified under Allowances, and dates reviewed submittals will be required from Architect. Indicate decision dates for selection of finishes. E. Provide legend for symbols and abbreviations used. 3.03 BAR CHARTS A. Include a separate bar for each major portion of Work or operation. B. Identify the first work day of each week. 3.04 UPDATING SCHEDULE 07128 / Navarro West Center 01325 - 1 CONSTRUCTION PROGRESS SCHEDULE Navarro West Center For Permit and Pricing Welbourne Drive and Navarro Drive March 12th, 2008 A. Maintain schedules to record actual start and finish dates of completed activities. B. Indicate progress of each activity to date of revision, with projected completion date of each activity. C. Annotate diagrams to graphically depict current status of Work. D. Identify activities modified since previous submittal, major changes in Work, and other identifiable changes. E. Indicate changes required to maintain Date of Substantial Completion. F. Submit reports required to support recommended changes. 3.05 DISTRIBUTION OF SCHEDULE A. Distribute copies of updated schedules to Contractor's project site file, to Subcontractors, suppliers, Architect, Owner, and other concerned parties. B. Instruct recipients to promptly report, in writing, problems anticipated by projections shown in schedules. END OF SECTION t 1 1 r 07128 / Navarro West Center 01325 - 2 CONSTRUCTION PROGRESS SCHEDULE Navarro West Center Welbourne Drive and Navarro Drive SECTION 01400 QUALITY REQUIREMENTS For Permit and Pricing March 12th, 2008 PART1 GENERAL 1.01 SECTION INCLUDES A. References and standards. B. Quality assurance submittals. C. Control of installation. D. Tolerances. E. Inspection services. F. Manufacturers' field services. 1.02 RELATED SECTIONS A. Document 00300 - Information Available to Bidders: Soil investigation data. B. Section 01300 - Administrative Requirements: Submittal procedures. C. Section 01600 - Product Requirements: Requirements for material and product quality. 1.03 REFERENCES A. ASTM C 1077 - Standard Practice for Laboratories Testing Concrete and Concrete Aggregates for Use in Construction and Criteria for Laboratory Evaluation; 2006a. B. ASTM D 3740 - Standard Practice for Minimum Requirements for Agencies Engaged in the Testing and/or Inspection of Soil and Rock as Used in Engineering Design and Construction; 2004a. 1.04 SUBMITTALS A. Testing Agency Qualifications: 1. Prior to start of Work, submit agency name, address, and telephone number, and names of full time registered Engineer and responsible officer. B. Test Reports: After each test/inspection, promptly submit two copies of report to Architect and to Contractor, and Owner. 1. Include: a. Date issued. b. Project title and number. c. Name of inspector. d. Date and time of sampling or inspection. e. Identification of product and specifications section. f. Location in the Project. g. Type of test/inspection. h. Date of test/inspection. i. Results of test/inspection. j. Conformance with Contract Documents. k. When requested by Architect, provide interpretation of results. C. Certificates: When specified in individual specification sections, submit certification by the manufacturer and Contractor or installation/application subcontractor to Architect, in quantities specified for Product Data. 07128 / Navarro West Center 01400 - 1 QUALITY REQUIREMENTS Navarro West Center Welbourne Drive and Navarro Drive For Permit and Pricing March 12th, 2008 1. Indicate material or product conforms to or exceeds specified requirements. Submit supporting reference data, affidavits, and certifications as appropriate. 2. Certificates may be recent or previous test results on material or Product, but must be acceptable to Architect/Engineer. 1.05 REFERENCES AND STANDARDS- See Section 01425 A. Conform to reference standard of date of issue current on date of Contract Documents, except where a specific date is established by applicable code. B. Obtain copies of standards where required by product specification sections. C. Maintain copy at project site during submittals, planning, and progress of the specific work, until Substantial Completion. 1.06 TESTING AND INSPECTION AGENCIES A. Owner will employ and pay for services of an independent testing agency to perform specified testing and inspection. B. Employment of agency in no way relieves Contractor of obligation to perform Work in accordance with requirements of Contract Documents. PART 2 PRODUCTS - NOT USED PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 CONTROL OF INSTALLATION A. Monitor quality control over suppliers, manufacturers, products, services, site conditions, and workmanship, to produce Work of specified quality. B. Comply with manufacturers' instructions, including each step in sequence. C. Should manufacturers' instructions conflict with Contract Documents, request clarification from Architect before proceeding. D. Comply with specified standards as minimum quality for the Work except where more stringent tolerances, codes, or specified requirements indicate higher standards or more precise workmanship. E. Have Work performed by persons qualified to produce required and specified quality. F. Verify that field measurements are as indicated on shop drawings or as instructed by the manufacturer. G. Secure products in place with positive anchorage devices designed and sized to withstand stresses, vibration, physical distortion, and disfigurement. 3.02 TOLERANCES A. Monitor fabrication and installation tolerance control of products to produce acceptable Work. Do not permit tolerances to accumulate. B. Comply with manufacturers' tolerances. Should manufacturers' tolerances conflict with Contract Documents, request clarification from Architect before proceeding. C. Adjust products to appropriate dimensions; position before securing products in place. 3.03 TESTING AND INSPECTION A. See individual specification sections for testing and inspection required. 07128 / Navarro West Center 01400 - 2 QUALITY REQUIREMENTS Navarro West Center Welbourne Drive and Navarro Drive For Permit and Pricing March 12th, 2008 B. Testing Agency Duties: 1. Provide qualified personnel at site. Cooperate with Architect and Contractor in performance of services. 2. Perform specified sampling and testing of products in accordance with specified standards. 3. Ascertain compliance of materials and mixes with requirements of Contract Documents. 4. Promptly notify Architect and Contractor of observed irregularities or non-conformance of Work or products. 5. Perform additional tests and inspections required by Architect. 6. Submit reports of all tests/inspections specified. C. Limits on Testing/Inspection Agency Authority: 1. Agency may not release, revoke, alter, or enlarge on requirements of Contract Documents. 2. Agency may not approve or accept any portion of the Work. 3. Agency may not assume any duties of Contractor. 4. Agency has no authority to stop the Work. D. Contractor Responsibilities: 1. Deliver to agency at designated location, adequate samples of materials proposed to be used which require testing, along with proposed mix designs. 2. Cooperate with laboratory personnel, and provide access to the Work and to manufacturers' facilities. 3. Provide incidental labor and facilities: a. To provide access to Work to be tested/inspected. b. To obtain and handle samples at the site or at source of Products to be tested/inspected. c. To facilitate tests/inspections. d. To provide storage and curing of test samples. 4. Notify Architect and laboratory 24 hours prior to expected time for operations requiring testing/inspection services. 5. Employ services of an independent qualified testing laboratory and pay for additional samples, tests, and inspections required by Contractor beyond specified requirements. 6. Arrange with Owner's agency and pay for additional samples, tests, and inspections required by Contractor beyond specified requirements. E. Re -testing required because of non-conformance to specified requirements shall be performed by the same agency on instructions by Architect. F. Re -testing required because of non-conformance to specified requirements shall be paid for by Contractor. G. Re -testing required because of non-conformance to specified requirements shall be performed by the same agency on instructions by Architect. Payment for re testing will be charged to the Contractor by deducting testing charges from the Contract Price. 3.04 MANUFACTURERS' FIELD SERVICES A. When specified in individual specification sections, require material or product suppliers or manufacturers to provide qualified staff personnel to observe site conditions, conditions of surfaces and installation, quality of workmanship, as applicable, and to initiate instructions when necessary. B. Report observations and site decisions or instructions given to applicators or installers that are supplemental or contrary to manufacturers' written instructions. 3.05 DEFECT ASSESSMENT A. Replace Work or portions of the Work not conforming to specified requirements. 07128 / Navarro West Center 01400 - 3 QUALITY REQUIREMENTS Navarro West Center For Permit and Pricing Welbourne Drive and Navarro Drive March 12th, 2008 B. If, in the opinion of Architect, it is not practical to remove and replace the Work, Architect will direct an appropriate remedy or adjust payment. END OF SECTION 07128 / Navarro West Center 01400 - 4 QUALITY REQUIREMENTS Navarro West Center Welboume Drive and Navarro Drive SECTION 01500 TEMPORARY FACILITIES AND CONTROLS For Permit and Pricing March 12th, 2008 PART1 GENERAL 1.01 SECTION INCLUDES A. Temporary utilities. B. Temporary telephone and facsimile service. C. Temporary sanitary facilities. D. Stairs, ramps, scaffolding and hoists. E. Vehicular access and parking. F. Waste removal facilities and services. G. Project identification sign. 1.02 RELATED SECTIONS A. Section 01510 -Temporary Utilities. 1.03 TEMPORARY UTILITIES - See Section 01510 1.04 TELEPHONE SERVICE A. Provide cell phone access to Project Superintendent at time of project mobilization. 1.05 TEMPORARY SANITARY FACILITIES A. The General Contractor shall provide and maintain in a neat and sanitary condition chemical type toilet facilities which comply with the requirements and regulations of the Department of Health or of other bodies having jurisdiction. These facilities shall be available to all workers on the job. B. Maintain daily in clean and sanitary condition. 1.06 STAIRS, RAMPS, SCAFFOLDING AND HOISTS A. Each Subcontractor shall provide and maintain temporary scaffolding, ramps, and runways as required. B. Hoisting of materials and equipment shall be provided by the contractor requiring such hoisting. C. All apparatus, equipment, and construction included in this article shall be in accordance with all applicable state and local laws. D. The General Contractor shall provide roof protection as necessary where scaffolds and chutes are used. 1.07 VEHICULAR ACCESS AND PARKING A. Coordinate access and haul routes with governing authorities and Owner. B. Provide and maintain access to fire hydrants, free of obstructions. C. Provide means of removing mud from vehicle wheels before entering streets, adjacent properties or parking lots. D. Provide temporary parking areas to accommodate construction personnel. When site space is not adequate, provide additional off -site parking. 07128 / Navarro West Center 01500 - 1 TEMPORARY FACILITIES AND CONTROLS Navarro West Center Welbourne Drive and Navarro Drive 1.08 WASTE REMOVAL For Permit and Pricing March 12th, 2008 A. Provide waste removal facilities and services as required to maintain the site in clean and orderly condition. B. Provide containers with lids. Remove trash from site weekly. C. If materials to be recycled or re -used on the project must be stored on -site, provide suitable non-combustible containers; locate containers holding flammable material outside the structure unless otherwise approved by the authorities having jurisdiction. D. Open free -fall chutes are not permitted. Terminate closed chutes into appropriate containers with lids. 1.09 PROJECT IDENTIFICATION A. The General Contractor shall provide project sign of exterior grade plywood and wood frame construction, painted, with exhibit lettering by professional sign painter to Architect/Engineer's design and colors. B. List title of project, names of Owner, Architect/Engineer, Professional Sub -Consultants, Contractor, and major Subcontractors. C. Erect on site at location established by Architect/Engineer. D. No other signs are allowed without Owner permission except those required by law. 1.10 REMOVAL OF UTILITIES, FACILITIES, AND CONTROLS A. Remove temporary utilities, equipment, facilities, materials, prior to Substantial Completion inspection. B. Remove underground installations to a minimum depth of 2 feet (600 mm). Grade site as indicated. C. Clean and repair damage caused by installation or use of temporary work. PART 2 PRODUCTS - NOT USED PART 3 EXECUTION - NOT USED 07128 / Navarro West Center END OF SECTION 1 01500 - 2 TEMPORARY FACILITIES AND CONTROLS Navarro West Center Welbourne Drive and Navarro Drive SECTION 01510 TEMPORARY UTILITIES For Permit and Pricing March 12th, 2008 PART1 GENERAL 1.01 SECTION INCLUDES A. Temporary Utilities: Electricity, lighting, and water. 1.02 RELATED SECTIONS A. Section 01500 - Temporary Facilities and Controls: Telephone service for administrative purposes. 1.03 TEMPORARY ELECTRICITY A. Cost: By Contractor. B. Provide power service required from utility source. C. Power Service Characteristics: 110-220 volt, 200 ampere, three phase, four wire. D. Provide power outlets for construction operations, with branch wiring and distribution boxes located as required. Provide flexible power cords as required. E. Provide main service disconnect and over -current protection at convenient location and meter. F. Permanent convenience receptacles may be utilized during construction. G. Provide adequate distribution equipment, wiring, and outlets to provide single phase branch circuits for power and lighting. 1.04 TEMPORARY LIGHTING FOR CONSTRUCTION PURPOSES A. Provide and maintain incandescent lighting for construction operations to achieve a minimum lighting level of 1 watt/sq ft ( watt/sq m) or in accordance with OSHA requirements. B. Provide branch wiring from power source to distribution boxes with lighting conductors, pigtails, and lamps as required. C. Maintain lighting and provide routine repairs. D. Relocate lighting as required and as deemed necessary for progress of construction to maintain lighting levels specified. 1.05 TEMPORARY WATER SERVICE A. Cost of Water Used: By Contractor. B. Provide and maintain suitable quality water service for construction operations at time of project mobilization. C. Connect to existing water source. PART 2 PRODUCTS - NOT USED PART 3 EXECUTION - NOT USED 07128 / Navarro West Center END OF SECTION 01510 - 1 TEMPORARY UTILITIES ' Navarro West Center For Permit and Pricing Welbourne Drive and Navarro Drive March 12th, 2008 ISECTION 01525 FIELD OFFICES PART 1 GENERAL PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.01 MATERIALS, EQUIPMENT, FURNISHINGS A. Materials, Equipment, Furnishings: Serviceable, new or used, adequate for required purpose. 2.02 CONSTRUCTION A. Portable or mobile buildings, or buildings constructed with floors raised above ground, securely fixed to foundations, with steps and landings at entrance doors. B. Construction: Structurally sound, secure, weather tight enclosures for office. Maintain during progress of Work; remove when no longer needed. C. Temperature Transmission Resistance of Floors, Walls, and Ceilings: Compatible with occupancy requirements. D. Exterior Materials: Weather resistant, finished in one color. E. Interior Materials in Offices: Sheet type materials for walls and ceilings, prefinished or painted; resilient floors and bases. F. Lighting for Offices: 50 fc (538 Ix) at desk top height, exterior lighting at entrance doors. G. Fire Extinguishers: Appropriate type fire extinguisher at each office. 2.03 ENVIRONMENTAL CONTROL A. Heating, Cooling, and Ventilating: Automatic equipment to maintain comfort conditions. 2.04 Contractor OFFICE AND FACILITIES A. Size: For Contractor's needs and to provide space for project meetings. B. Telephone: As specified in Section 01500. C. Furnishings in Meeting Area: Conference table and chairs to seat at least 6 persons; racks and files for Contract Documents, submittals, and project record documents. D. Other Furnishings: Contractor's option. E. Equipment: 4 adjustable band protective helmets for visitors, one 10 inch (250 mm) outdoor weather thermometer and PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 PREPARATION A. Fill and grade sites for temporary structures to provide drainage away from buildings. 3.02 INSTALLATION A. Install office spaces ready for occupancy 15 days after date fixed in Notice to Proceed. 3.03 MAINTENANCE AND CLEANING A. Weekly janitorial services for offices; periodic cleaning and maintenance for offices. B. Maintain approach walks free of mud, water, and snow. I West Center - FIE OFFICES 07128 / Navarro W 01525 1 FIELD O S Navarro West Center For Permit and Pricing ' Welbourne Drive and Navarro Drive March 12th, 2008 3.04 REMOVAL A. At completion of Work remove buildings, foundations, utility services, and debris. Restore areas. END OF SECTION 07128 / Navarro West Center 01525 - 2 FIELD OFFICES Navarro West Center Welbourne Drive and Navarro Drive SECTION 01575 TEMPORARY EROSION AND SEDIMENTATION CONTROL PART1 GENERAL 1.01 SECTION INCLUDES For Permit and Pricing March 12th, 2008 A. Prevention of erosion due to construction activities. B. Prevention of sedimentation of waterways, open drainage ways, and storm and sanitary sewers due to construction activities. C. Restoration of areas eroded due to insufficient preventive measures. D. Performance bond. E. Compensation of Owner for fines levied by authorities having jurisdiction due to non-compliance by Contractor. 1.02 REFERENCES A. ASTM D 4355 - Standard Test Method for Deterioration of Geotextiles by Exposure to Light, Moisture, and Heat in a Xenon Arc Type Apparatus; 2005. B. ASTM D 4491 - Standard Test Methods for Water Permeability of Geotextiles by Permittivity; 1999a (Reapproved 2004). C. ASTM D 4533 - Standard Test Method for Trapezoid Tearing Strength of Geotextiles; 2004. D. ASTM D 4632 - Standard Test Method for Grab Breaking Load and Elongation of Geotextiles; 1991 (Reapproved 2003). E. ASTM D 4751 - Standard Test Method for Determining Apparent Opening Size of a Geotextile; 2004. F. ASTM D 4873 - Standard Guide for Identification, Storage, and Handling of Geosynthetic Rolls and Samples; 2002. 1.03 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS A. Develop and follow an Erosion and Sedimentation Prevention Plan and submit periodic inspection reports. . B. Do not begin clearing, grading, or other work involving disturbance of ground surface cover until applicable permits have been obtained; furnish all documentation required to obtain applicable permits. C. Provide to Owner a Performance Bond covering erosion and sedimentation preventive measures only, in an amount equal to 100 percent of the cost of erosion and sedimentation control work. D. Timing: Put preventive measures in place as soon as possible after disturbance of surface cover and before precipitation occurs. E. Storm Water Runoff: Control increased storm water runoff due to disturbance of surface cover due to construction activities for this project. 1. Prevent runoff into storm and sanitary sewer systems, including open drainage channels, in excess of actual capacity or amount allowed by authorities having jurisdiction, whichever is less. 2. Anticipate runoff volume due to the most extreme short term and 24-hour rainfall events that might occur in 25 years. ' 07128 / Navarro West Center TB? 904ARY EROSION AND SEDIMENTATION CONTROL Navarro West Center Welbourne Drive and Navarro Drive For Permit and Pricing March 12th, 2008 F. Erosion On Site: Minimize wind, water, and vehicular erosion of soil on project site due to construction activities for this project. 1. Control movement of sediment and soil from temporary stockpiles of soil. 2. Prevent development of ruts due to equipment and vehicular traffic. 3. If erosion occurs due to non-compliance with these requirements, restore eroded areas at no cost to Owner. G. Erosion Off Site: Prevent erosion of soil and deposition of sediment on other properties caused by water leaving the project site due to construction activities for this project. 1. Prevent windblown soil from leaving the project site. 2. Prevent tracking of mud onto public roads outside site. 3. Prevent mud and sediment from flowing onto sidewalks and pavements. 4. If erosion occurs due to non-compliance with these requirements, restore eroded areas at no cost to Owner. H. Sedimentation of Waterways On Site: Prevent sedimentation of waterways on the project site, including rivers, streams, lakes, ponds, open drainage ways, storm sewers, and sanitary sewers. 1. If sedimentation occurs, install or correct preventive measures immediately at no cost to Owner; remove deposited sediments; comply with requirements of authorities having jurisdiction. 2. If sediment basins are used as temporary preventive measures, pump dry and remove deposited sediment after each storm. I. Sedimentation of Waterways Off Site: Prevent sedimentation of waterways off the project site, including rivers, streams, lakes, ponds, open drainage ways, storm sewers, and sanitary sewers. 1. If sedimentation occurs, install or correct preventive measures immediately at no cost to Owner; remove deposited sediments; comply with requirements of authorities having jurisdiction. J. Open Water: Prevent standing water that could become stagnant. K. Maintenance: Maintain temporary preventive measures until permanent measures have been established. 1.04 SUBMITTALS A. See Section 01300 -Administrative Requirements, for submittal procedures. B. Erosion and Sedimentation Control Plan: 1. Include: a. Site plan identifying soils and vegetation, existing erosion problems, and areas vulnerable to erosion due to topography, soils, vegetation, or drainage. b. Site plan showing grading; new improvements; temporary roads, traffic accesses, and other temporary construction; and proposed preventive measures. c. Where extensive areas of soil will be disturbed, include storm water flow and volume calculations, soil loss predictions, and proposed preventive measures. d. Schedule of temporary preventive measures, in relation to ground disturbing activities. e. Other information required by law. f. Format required by law is acceptable, provided any additional information specified is also included. 2. Obtain the approval of the Plan by authorities having jurisdiction. 3. Obtain the approval of the Plan by Owner. C. Certificate: Mill certificate for silt fence fabric attesting that fabric and factory seams comply with specified requirements, signed by legally authorized official of manufacturer; indicate actual minimum average roll values; identify fabric by roll identification numbers. 07128 / Navarro West Center TH1 REIF?.WY EROSION AND SEDIMENTATION CONTROL Navarro West Center Welbourne Drive and Navarro Drive For Permit and Pricing March 12th, 2008 D. Inspection Reports: Submit report of each inspection; identify each preventive measure, indicate condition, and specify maintenance or repair required'and accomplished. PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.01 MATERIALS A. Mulch: Use one of the following: B. Grass Seed For Temporary Cover: Select a species appropriate to climate, planting season, and intended purpose. If same area will later be planted with permanent vegetation, do not use species known to be excessively competitive or prone to volunteer in subsequent seasons. C. Bales: Air dry, rectangular straw bales. 1. Cross Section: 14 by 18 inches (350 by 450 mm), minimum. 2. Bindings: Wire or string, around long dimension. D. Bale Stakes: One of the following, minimum 3 feet (1 m) long: 1. Steel U- or T-section, with minimum mass of 1.33 lb per linear foot (1.98 kg per linear m). 2. Wood, 2 by 2 inches (50 by 50 mm) in cross section. E. Silt Fence Fabric: Polypropylene geotextile resistant to common soil chemicals, mildew, and insects; non -biodegradable; in longest lengths possible; fabric including seams with the following minimum average roll lengths: 1. Average Opening Size: 30 U.S. Std. Sieve (0.600 mm), maximum, when tested in accordance with ASTM D 4751. 2. Permittivity: 0.05 sec"A, minimum, when tested in accordance with ASTM D 4491. 3. Ultraviolet Resistance: Retaining at least 70 percent of tensile strength, when tested in accordance with ASTM D 4355 after 500 hours exposure. 4. Tensile Strength: 100 lb-f (450 N), minimum, in cross -machine direction; 124 lb-f (550 N), minimum, in machine direction; when tested in accordance with ASTM D 4632. 5. Elongation: 15 to 30 percent, when tested in accordance with ASTM D 4632. 6. Tear Strength: 55 lb-f (245 N), minimum, when tested in accordance with ASTM D 4533. 7. Color: Manufacturer's standard, with embedment and fastener lines preprinted. F. Silt Fence Posts: One of the following, minimum 5 feet (1500 mm) long: PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 EXAMINATION A. Examine site and identify existing features that contribute to erosion resistance; maintain such existing features to greatest extent possible. 3.02 PREPARATION A. Schedule work so that soil surfaces are left exposed for the minimum amount of time. 3.03 INSTALLATION A. Silt Fences: 1. Store and handle fabric in accordance with ASTM D 4873. 2. Where slope gradient is less than 3:1 or barriers will be in place less than 6 months, use nominal 16 inch (405 mm) high barriers with minimum 36 inch (905 mm) long posts spaced at 6 feet (1830 mm) maximum, with fabric embedded at least 4 inches (100 mm) in ground. 3. Where slope gradient is steeper than 3:1 or barriers will be in place over 6 months, use nominal 28 inch (710 mm) high barriers, minimum 48 inch (1220 mm) long posts spaced at 6 feet (1830 mm) maximum, with fabric embedded at least 6 inches (150 mm) in ground. 4. Where slope gradient is steeper than 3:1 and vertical height of slope between barriers is 1 07128 / Navarro West Center TEMPU b41RY EROSION AND SEDIMENTATION CONTROL Navarro West Center Welbourne Drive and Navarro Drive For Permit and Pricing March 12th, 2008 more than 20 feet (6 m), use nominal 32 inch (810 mm) high barriers with woven wire reinforcement and steel posts spaced at 4 feet (1220 mm) maximum, with fabric embedded at least 6 inches (150 mm) in ground. 5. Install with top of fabric at nominal height and embedment as specified. 6. Do not splice fabric width; minimize splices in fabric length; splice at post only, overlapping at least 18 inches (460 mm), with extra post. 7. Wherever runoff will flow around end of barrier or over the top, provide temporary splash pad or other outlet protection; at such outlets in the run of the barrier, make barrier not more than 12 inches (300 mm) high with post spacing not more than 4 feet (1220 mm). B. Straw Bale Rows: 1. Install bales in continuous rows with ends butting tightly, with one bale at each end of row turned uphill. 2. Install bales so that bindings are not in contact with the ground. 3. Embed bales at least 4 inches (100 mm) in the ground. 4. Anchor bales with at least two stakes per bale, driven at least 18 inches (450 mm) into the ground; drive first stake in each bale toward the previously placed bale to force bales together. 5. Fill gaps between ends of bales with loose straw wedged tightly. 6. Place soil excavated for trench against bales on the upslope side of the row, compacted. C. Temporary Seeding: 1. When hydraulic seeder is used, seedbed preparation is not required. 2. When surface soil has been sealed by rainfall or consists of smooth undisturbed cut slopes, and conventional or manual seeding is to be used, prepare seedbed by scarifying sufficiently to allow seed to lodge and germinate. 3. If temporary mulching was used on planting area but not removed, apply nitrogen fertilizer at 1 pound per 1000 sq ft (0.5 kg per 100 sq m). 4. On soils of very low fertility, apply 10-10-10 fertilizer at rate of 12 to 16 pounds per 1000 sq ft (6 to 8 kg per 100 sq m). 5. Incorporate fertilizer into soil before seeding. 6. Apply seed uniformly; if using drill or cultipacker seeders place seed 1/2 to 1 inch deep (12 to 25 mm) deep. 7. Irrigate as required to thoroughly wet soil to depth that will ensure germination, without causing runoff or erosion. 8. Repeat irrigation as required until grass is established. 3.04 MAINTENANCE A. Inspect preventive measures weekly, within 24 hours after the end of any storm that produces 0.5 inches (13 mm) or more rainfall at the project site, and daily during prolonged rainfall. B. Repair deficiencies immediately. C. Silt Fences: 1. Promptly replace fabric that deteriorates unless need for fence has passed. 2. Remove silt deposits that exceed one-third of the height of the fence. 3. Repair fences that are undercut by runoff or otherwise damaged, whether by runoff or other causes. D. Straw Bale Rows: 1. Promptly replace bales that fall apart or otherwise deteriorate unless need has passed. 2. Remove silt deposits that exceed one-half of the height of the bales. 3. Repair bale rows that are undercut by runoff or otherwise damaged, whether by runoff or other causes. E. Clean out temporary sediment control structures weekly and relocate soil on site. 07128 / Navarro West Center TEMIY RARY EROSION AND SEDIMENTATION CONTROL Navarro West Center For Permit and Pricing Welboume Drive and Navarro Drive March 12th, 2008 F. Place sediment in appropriate locations on site; do not remove from site. 3.05 CLEANUP A. Remove temporary measures after permanent measures have been installed, unless permitted to remain by Architect. B. Clean out temporary sediment control structures that are to remain as permanent measures. C. Where removal of temporary measures would leave exposed soil, shape surface to an acceptable grade and finish to match adjacent ground surfaces. END OF SECTION 07128 / Navarro West Center TSMIBEPORY EROSION AND SEDIMENTATION CONTROL Navarro West Center Welbourne Drive and Navarro Drive SECTION 01600 PRODUCT REQUIREMENTS PART1 GENERAL 1.01 SECTION INCLUDES A. General product requirements. B. Transportation, handling, storage and protection. C. Product option requirements. D. Substitution limitations and procedures. E. Spare parts and maintenance materials. 1.02 RELATED SECTIONS A. Section 01400 - Quality Requirements: Product quality monitoring. 1.03 SUBMITTALS For Permit and Pricing March 12th, 2008 A. Proposed Products List: Submit list of major products proposed for use, with name of manufacturer, trade name, and model number of each product. 1. Submit within 30 days after date of Agreement. 2. For products specified only by reference standards, list applicable reference standards. 3. Submit using the Form provided. B. Product Data Submittals: Submit manufacturer's standard published data. Mark each copy to identify applicable products, models, options, and other data. Supplement manufacturers' standard data to provide information specific to this Project. C. Shop Drawing Submittals: Prepared specifically for this Project. Contract Documents shall not be used for submittals. D. Sample Submittals: Illustrate functional and aesthetic characteristics of the product, with integral parts and attachment devices. Coordinate sample submittals for interfacing work. 1. For selection from standard finishes, submit samples of the full range of the manufacturer's standard colors, textures, and patterns. E. Indicate utility and electrical characteristics, utility connection requirements, and location of utility outlets for service for functional equipment and appliances. PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.01 NEW PRODUCTS A. Provide new products unless specifically required or permitted by the Contract Documents. 1 B. Do not use products having any of the following characteristics: 1. Made using or containing CFC's or HCFC's. 2.02 PRODUCT OPTIONS A. Products Specified by Reference Standards or by Description Only: Use any product meeting those standards or description. B. Products Specified by Naming One or More Manufacturers: Use a product of one of the manufacturers named and meeting specifications, no options or substitutions allowed. C. Products Specified by Naming One or More Manufacturers with a Provision for Substitutions: Submit a request for substitution for any manufacturer not named. 07128 / Navarro West Center 01600 - 1 PRODUCT REQUIREMENTS Navarro West Center For Permit and Pricing Welbourne Drive and Navarro Drive March 12th, 2008 2.03 SPARE PARTS AND MAINTENANCE PRODUCTS A. Provide spare parts, maintenance, and extra products of types and in quantities specified in individual specification sections. B. Deliver to Project site; obtain receipt prior to final payment. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 SUBSTITUTION PROCEDURES A. Whenever a product is specified or shown by describing proprietary items, model numbers, catalog numbers, manufacturer, trade names, or similar reference, no substitutions may be made unless accepted prior to execution of the Contract. When two or more products are shown or specified, the Contractor has the option to use either of those shown or specified. B. Architect will consider requests for substitutions prior to the signing of the Owner/Contractor Agreement. C. Substitutions may be considered when a product becomes unavailable through no fault of the Contractor. D. Document each request with complete data substantiating compliance of proposed substitution with Contract Documents. E. A request for substitution constitutes a representation that the submitter: 1. Has investigated proposed product and determined that it meets or exceeds the quality level of the specified product. 2. Will provide the same warranty for the substitution as for the specified product. 3. Will coordinate installation and make changes to other Work which may be required for the Work to be complete with no additional cost to Owner. 4. Waives claims for additional costs or time extension which may subsequently become apparent. 5. Will reimburse the Architect and Engineers for review or redesign services associated with re -approval by authorities. F. Substitutions will not be considered when they are indicated or implied on shop drawing or product data submittals, without separate written request, or when acceptance will require revision to the Contract Documents. G. Equivalent products from manufacturers used as equal to the primary specification must meet dimensional/weight/aesthetic qualities of the primary specification. The Project Coordinator shall provide the Architect documentation clearly demonstrating compliance. H. Substitution Submittal Procedure: 1. Submit three copies of request for substitution for consideration. Limit each request to one proposed substitution. 2. Submit shop drawings, product data, and certified test results attesting to the proposed product equivalence. Burden of proof is on proposer. 3. Provide sample of substitution to Architect/Engineer as requested. 4. The Architect will notify Contractor in writing of decision to accept or reject request. 5. Submit using the electronic Form provided. 3.02 TRANSPORTATION AND HANDLING A. Coordinate schedule of product delivery to designated prepared areas in order to minimize site storage time and potential damage to stored materials. B. Transport and handle products in accordance with manufacturer's instructions. 07128 / Navarro West Center 01600 - 2 PRODUCT REQUIREMENTS Navarro West Center Welbourne Drive and Navarro Drive For Permit and Pricing March 12th, 2008 C. Transport materials in covered trucks to prevent contamination of product and littering of surrounding areas. D. Promptly inspect shipments to ensure that products comply with requirements, quantities are correct, and products are undamaged. E. Provide equipment and personnel to handle products by methods to prevent soiling, disfigurement, or damage. F. Arrange for the return of packing materials, such as wood pallets, where economically feasible. 3.03 STORAGE AND PROTECTION A. Designate receiving/storage areas for incoming products so that they are delivered according to installation schedule and placed convenient to work area in order to minimize waste due to excessive materials handling and misapplication. B. Store and protect products in accordance with manufacturers' instructions. C. Store with seals and labels intact and legible. D. Store sensitive products in weather tight, climate controlled, enclosures in an environment favorable to product. E. For exterior storage of fabricated products, place on sloped supports above ground. F. Provide bonded off -site storage and protection when site does not permit on -site storage or protection. G. Cover products subject to deterioration with impervious sheet covering. Provide ventilation to prevent condensation and degradation of products. ` H. Store loose granular materials on solid flat surfaces in a well -drained area. Prevent mixing with foreign matter. I. Prevent contact with material that may cause corrosion, discoloration, or staining. J. Provide equipment and personnel to store products by methods to prevent soiling, disfigurement, or damage. K. Arrange storage of products to permit access for inspection. Periodically inspect to verify products are undamaged and are maintained in acceptable condition. END OF SECTION 07128 / Navarro West Center 01600 - 3 PRODUCT REQUIREMENTS Navarro West Center Welboume Drive and Navarro Drive SECTION 01700 For Permit and Pricing March 12th, 2008 EXECUTION REQUIREMENTS PART1 GENERAL 1.01 SECTION INCLUDES A. Examination, preparation, and general installation procedures. B. Surveying for laying out the work. C. Cleaning and protection. D. Starting of systems and equipment. E. Closeout procedures, except payment procedures. 1.02 RELATED SECTIONS A. Section 01300 -Administrative Requirements: Submittals procedures. B. Section 01400 - Quality Requirements: Testing and inspection procedures. C. Section 01780 - Closeout Submittals: Project record documents, operation and maintenance data, warranties and bonds. D. Individual Product Specification Sections: 1. Advance notification to other sections of openings required in work of those sections. 2. Limitations on cutting structural members. 1.03 QUALIFICATIONS A. For survey work, employ a land surveyor registered in Texas and acceptable to Architect. Submit evidence of Surveyor's Errors and Omissions insurance coverage in the form of an Insurance Certificate. B. For field engineering employ a professional engineer of the discipline required for specific service on Project, licensed in North Carolina. ' 1.04 PROJECT CONDITIONS A. Dewatering: 1. Prevent surface water and subsurface or ground water from flowing into the excavations and flooding the project site and surrounding area. 2. Do not allow water to accumulate in excavations. Remove water from excavations to prevent softening of foundation bottoms, undercutting footings, and soil changes detrimental to the stability of subgrades and foundations. Provide and maintain pumps, well points, sumps, suction and discharge lines, and other dewatering system components necessary to convey the water away from excavations. ' 3. Convey water removed from excavations and rain water to collecting or run-off areas. Establish and maintain temporary drainage ditches and other diversions outside the excavation limits for each structure. Do not use trench excavations for site utilities as temporary drainage ditches. B. Ventilate enclosed areas to assist cure of materials, to dissipate humidity, and to prevent accumulation of dust, fumes, vapors, or gases. C. Dust Control: Execute work by methods to minimize raising dust from construction operations. Provide positive means to prevent air-bome dust from dispersing into atmosphere. 07128 / Navarro West Center 01700 - 1 EXECUTION REQUIREMENTS Navarro West Center For Permit and Pricing Welboume Drive and Navarro Drive March 12th, 2008 D. Pest Control: Provide methods, means, and facilities to prevent pests and insects from damaging the work. E. Pollution Control: Provide methods, means, and facilities to prevent contamination of soil, water, and atmosphere from discharge of noxious, toxic substances, and pollutants produced by construction operations. 1.05 COORDINATION A. Coordinate scheduling, submittals, and work of the various sections of the Project Manual to ensure efficient and orderly sequence of installation of interdependent construction elements, with provisions for accommodating items installed later. B. Notify affected utility companies and comply with their requirements. C. Verify that utility requirements and characteristics of new operating equipment are compatible with building utilities. Coordinate work of various sections having interdependent responsibilities for installing, connecting to, and placing in service, such equipment. D. Coordinate completion and clean-up of work of separate sections. E. After Owner occupancy of premises, coordinate access to site for correction of defective work and work not in accordance with Contract Documents, to minimize disruption of Owner's activities. PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.01 PATCHING MATERIALS A. New Materials: As specified in product sections; match existing products and work for patching and extending work. B. Type and Quality of Existing Products: Determine by inspecting and testing products where necessary, referring to existing work as a standard. C. Product Substitution: For any proposed change in materials, submit request for substitution described in Section 01600. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 EXAMINATION A. Verify that existing site conditions and substrate surfaces are acceptable for subsequent work. Start of work means acceptance of existing conditions. B. Verify that existing substrate is capable of structural support or attachment of new work being applied or attached. C. Examine and verify specific conditions described in individual specification sections. D. Take field measurements before confirming product orders or beginning fabrication, to minimize waste due to over -ordering or misfabrication. E. Verify that utility services are available, of the correct characteristics, and in the correct locations. F. Prior to Cutting: Examine existing conditions prior to commencing work, including elements subject to damage or movement during cutting and patching. After uncovering existing work, assess conditions affecting performance of work. Beginning of cutting or patching means acceptance of existing conditions. Under no circumstances shall structural elements be cut, drilled, or otherwise altered without prior approval of the Architect and Structural Engineer. 07128 / Navarro West Center 01700 - 2 EXECUTION REQUIREMENTS ' Navarro For Permit and Pricing West es Center g ' Welbourne Drive and Navarro Drive March 12th, 2008 3.02 PREPARATION 1 A. Clean substrate surfaces prior to applying next material or substance. B. Seal cracks or openings of substrate prior to applying next material or substance. C. Apply manufacturer required or recommended substrate primer, sealer, or conditioner prior to applying any new material or substance in contact or bond. 3.03 LAYING OUT THE WORK A. Verify locations of survey control points prior to starting work. B. Promptly notify Architect of any discrepancies discovered prior to construction. C. Contractor shall locate and protect survey control and reference points. D. Control datum for survey is that established by Owner provided survey. E. Protect survey control points prior to starting site work; preserve permanent reference points during construction. F. Promptly report to Architect the loss or destruction of any reference point or relocation required because of changes in grades or other reasons. G. Replace dislocated survey control points based on original survey control. Make no changes without prior written notice to Architect. H. Utilize recognized engineering survey practices. I. Establish elevations, lines and levels. Locate and lay out by instrumentation and similar appropriate means: 1. Site improvements including pavements; stakes for grading, fill and topsoil placement; utility locations, slopes, and invert elevations. 2. Grid or axis for structures. 3. Building foundation, column locations, and floor elevations. J. Periodically verify layouts by same means. ' K. Maintain a complete and accurate log of control and survey work as it progresses. 3.04 GENERAL INSTALLATION REQUIREMENTS A. Install products as specified in individual sections, in accordance with manufacturer's instructions and recommendations, and so as to avoid waste due to necessity for replacement. B. Make vertical elements plumb and horizontal elements level, unless otherwise indicated. C. Install equipment and fittings plumb and level, neatly aligned with adjacent vertical and horizontal lines, unless otherwise indicated. ' D. Make consistent texture on surfaces, with seamless transitions, unless otherwise indicated. E. Make neat transitions between different surfaces, maintaining texture and appearance. 3.05 PROGRESS CLEANING A. Maintain areas free of waste materials, debris, and rubbish. Maintain site in a clean and orderly condition. B. Remove debris and rubbish from pipe chases, plenums, attics, crawl spaces, and other closed or remote spaces, prior to enclosing the space. 07128 / Navarro West Center 01700 - 3 EXECUTION REQUIREMENTS 1 Navarro West Center Welbourne Drive and Navarro Drive For Permit and Pricing March 12th, 2008 C. Broom and vacuum clean interior areas prior to start of surface finishing, and continue cleaning to eliminate dust. D. Collect and remove waste materials, debris, and trash/rubbish from site weekly and dispose off -site; do not burn or bury. 3.06 PROTECTION OF INSTALLED WORK A. Protect installed work from damage by construction operations. B. Provide special protection where specified in individual specification sections. C. Provide temporary and removable protection for installed products. Control activity in immediate work area to prevent damage. D. Provide protective coverings at walls, projections, jambs, sills, and soffits of openings. E. Protect finished floors, stairs, and other surfaces from traffic, dirt, wear, damage, or movement of heavy objects, by protecting with durable sheet materials. F. Prohibit traffic or storage upon waterproofed or roofed surfaces. If traffic or activity is necessary, obtain recommendations for protection from waterproofing or roofing material manufacturer. G. Remove protective coverings when no longer needed; reuse or recycle plastic coverings if possible. 3.07 STARTING SYSTEMS A. Coordinate schedule for start-up of various equipment and systems. B. Notify Architect and Engineer seven days prior to start-up of each item. C. Verify that each piece of equipment or system has been checked for proper lubrication, drive rotation, belt tension, control sequence, and for conditions which may cause damage. D. Verify tests, meter readings, and specified electrical characteristics agree with those required by the equipment or system manufacturer. E. Verify that wiring and support components for equipment are complete and tested. F. Execute start-up under supervision of applicable Contractor personnel and manufacturer's representative in accordance with manufacturers' instructions. G. When specified in individual specification Sections, require manufacturer to provide authorized representative to be present at site to inspect, check, and approve equipment or system installation prior to start-up, and to supervise placing equipment or system in operation. 3.08 FINAL CLEANING A. Execute final cleaning after Substantial Completion but before making final application for payment. B. Use cleaning materials that are nonhazardous. C. Clean interior and exterior glass, surfaces exposed to view; remove temporary labels, stains and foreign substances, polish transparent and glossy surfaces, D. Clean debris from roofs, gutters, downspouts, and drainage systems. E. Clean site; sweep paved areas, rake clean landscaped surfaces. F. Remove waste, surplus materials, trash/rubbish, and construction facilities from the site; dispose of in legal manner; do not bum or bury. 07128 / Navarro West Center 01700 - 4 EXECUTION REQUIREMENTS Navarro West Center Welbourne Drive and Navarro Drive For Permit and Pricing March 12th, 2008 3.09 CLOSEOUT PROCEDURES A. Make submittals that are required by governing or other authorities. 1. Provide copies to Architect and Owner. B. Notify Architect when work is considered ready for Substantial Completion. C. Submit written certification that Contract Documents have been reviewed, work has been inspected, and that work is complete in accordance with Contract Documents and ready for Architect's review. D. Correct items of work listed in executed Certificates of Substantial. Completion and comply with requirements for access to Owner -occupied areas. E. Contractor shall complete all punchlist items by the required Final Completion date or within thirty (30) days after the final punchlist is prepared, whichever is first. F. Notify Architect when work is considered finally complete. G. Complete items of work determined by Architect's final inspection. 3.10 MAINTENANCE SERVICE A. Furnish service and maintenance of components indicated in specification sections during the warranty period. B. Examine system components at a frequency consistent with reliable operation. Clean, adjust, and lubricate as required. C. Include systematic examination, adjustment, and lubrication of components. Repair or replace parts whenever required. Use parts produced by the manufacturer of the original component. D. Maintenance service shall not be assigned or transferred to any agent or Subcontractor without prior written consent of the Owner. END OF SECTION 07128 / Navarro West Center 01700 - 5 EXECUTION REQUIREMENTS Navarro West Center Welbourne Drive and Navarro Drive SECTION 01780 CLOSEOUT SUBMITTALS PART1 GENERAL 1.01 SECTION INCLUDES A. Project Record Documents. B. Operation and Maintenance Data. C. Warranties and bonds. 1.02 RELATED SECTIONS For Permit and Pricing March 12th, 2008 A. Section 00700 - General Conditions: Performance bond and labor and material payment bonds, warranty, and correction of work. B. Section 01300 - Administrative Requirements: Submittals procedures, shop drawings, product data, and samples. C. Section 01700 - Execution Requirements: Contract closeout procedures. D. Individual Product Sections: Specific requirements for operation and maintenance data. E. Individual Product Sections: Warranties required for specific products or Work. 1.03 SUBMITTALS A. Project Record Documents: Submit documents to Architect with claim for final Application for Payment. Record documents shall include full as -built conditions. Contractor shall maintain a full up to date record document set throughout the Project's construction. General Contractor shall provide minimum of two (2) full record as -built sets of documents, one set is to go to the Architect and one to the Owner. B. Operation and Maintenance Data: 1. Submit two copies of preliminary draft or proposed formats and outlines of contents before start of Work. Architect will review draft and return one copy with comments. 2. For equipment, or component parts of equipment put into service during construction and operated by Owner, submit completed documents within ten days after acceptance. 3. Submit 1 copy of completed documents 15 days prior to final observation. This copy will be reviewed and returned after final inspection, with Architect comments. Revise content of all document sets as required prior to final submission. 4. Submit two sets of revised final documents in final form within 10 days after final field observation. C. Warranties and Bonds: 1. For equipment or component parts of equipment put into service during construction with Owner's permission, submit documents within 10 days after acceptance. 2. Make other submittals within 10 days after Date of Substantial Completion, prior to final Application for Payment. 3. For items of Work for which acceptance is delayed beyond Date of Substantial Completion, submit within 10 days after acceptance, listing the date of acceptance as the beginning of the warranty period. PART 2 PRODUCTS - NOT USED PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 PROJECT RECORD DOCUMENTS 1 07128 / Navarro West Center 01780 - 1 CLOSEOUT SUBMITTALS Navarro West Center Welbourne Drive and Navarro Drive For Permit and Pricing , March 12th, 2008 A. Maintain on site one set of the following record documents; record actual revisions to the Work: 1. Drawings. 2. Specifications. 3. Addenda. 4. Change Orders and other modifications to the Contract. B. Ensure entries are complete and accurate, enabling future reference by Owner. C. Store record documents separate from documents used for construction. D. Record information concurrent with construction progress. E. Specifications: Legibly mark and record at each product section description of actual products installed, including the following: 1. Product substitutions or alternates utilized. 2. Changes made by Addenda and modifications. F. The Project Coordinator shall submit for the Architect's review, the current list of all O.W.I.P. action items with the dates of completion and the person responsible for verifying the work was completed. For items not completed at substantial completion, the Project Coordinator shall annotate the anticipated date of completion for each item. G. Record Drawings: Legibly mark each item to record actual construction including: 1. Measured horizontal and vertical locations of underground utilities and appurtenances, referenced to permanent surface improvements. 2. Measured locations of internal utilities and appurtenances concealed in construction, referenced to visible and accessible features of the Work. 3. Field changes of dimension and detail. 4. Details not on original Contract drawings. 3.02 OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE DATA A. For Each Product or System: List names, addresses and telephone numbers of Subcontractors and suppliers, including local source of supplies and replacement parts. B. Product Data: Mark each sheet to clearly identify specific products and component parts, and data applicable to installation. Delete inapplicable information. C. Drawings: Supplement product data to illustrate relations of component parts of equipment and systems, to show control and flow diagrams. Do not use Project Record Documents as maintenance drawings. D. Typed Text: As required to supplement product data. Provide logical sequence of instructions for each procedure, incorporating manufacturer's instructions. 3.03 OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE DATA FOR MATERIALS AND FINISHES A. For Each Product, Applied Material, and Finish: 1. Product data, with catalog number, size, composition, and color and texture designations. B. Instructions for Care and Maintenance: Manufacturer's recommendations for cleaning agents and methods, precautions against detrimental cleaning agents and methods, and recommended schedule for cleaning and maintenance. C. Additional information as specified in individual product specification sections. 3.04 OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE DATA FOR EQUIPMENT AND SYSTEMS A. For Each Item of Equipment and Each System: 1. Description of unit or system, and component parts. 2. Identify function, normal operating characteristics, and limiting conditions. 07128 / Navarro West Center 01780 - 2 CLOSEOUT SUBMITTALS Navarro West Center For Permit and Pricing Welbourne Drive and Navarro Drive March 12th, 2008 3. Include performance curves, with engineering data and tests. 4. Complete nomenclature and model number of replaceable parts. B. Panelboard Circuit Directories: Provide electrical service characteristics, controls, and communications; typed. C. Operating Procedures: Include start-up, break-in, and routine normal operating instructions and sequences. Include regulation, control, stopping, shut -down, and emergency instructions. Include summer, winter, and any special operating instructions. D. Maintenance Requirements: Include routine procedures and guide for preventative maintenance and trouble shooting; disassembly, repair, and reassembly instructions; and alignment, adjusting, balancing, and checking instructions. E. Provide servicing and lubrication schedule, and list of lubricants required. F. Include manufacturer's printed operation and maintenance instructions. ' G. Include sequence of operation by controls manufacturer. H. Provide original manufacturer's parts list, illustrations, assembly drawings, and diagrams required for maintenance. I. Additional Requirements: As specified in individual product specification sections. 3.05 OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE MANUALS A. Prepare instructions and data by personnel experienced in maintenance, cleaning and operation of described products. B. Prepare data in the form of an instructional manual. Three manuals will be required. C. Binders: Commercial quality, 8-1/2 by 11 inch (216 by 280 mm) three D side ring binders with durable plastic covers; 2 inch (50 mm) maximum ring size. When multiple binders are used, correlate data into related consistent groupings. D. Cover: Identify each binder with typed or printed title OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE INSTRUCTIONS; identify title of Project; identify subject matter of contents. E. Provide tabbed dividers for each separate product and system, with typed description of product and major component parts of equipment. F. Text: Manufacturer's printed data, or typewritten data on 24 pound paper. iG. Drawings: Provide with reinforced punched binder tab. Bind in with text; fold larger drawings to size of text pages. ' H. Arrange content by systems under section numbers and sequence of Table of Contents of this Project Manual. I. Contents: Prepare a Table of Contents for each volume, with each product or system description identified, in three parts as follows: 1. Part 1: Directory, listing names, addresses, and telephone numbers of Architect, Contractor, Subcontractors, and major equipment suppliers. 2. Part 2: Operation and maintenance instructions, arranged by system and subdivided by specification section. For each category, identify names, addresses, and telephone numbers of Subcontractors and suppliers. Identify the following: a. Significant design criteria. b. List of equipment. c. Parts list for each component. d. Operating instructions. 07128 / Navarro West Center 01780 - 3 CLOSEOUT SUBMITTALS Navarro West Center Welbourne Drive and Navarro Drive For Permit and Pricing March 12th, 2008 e. Maintenance instructions for finishes, equipment and systems. f. Maintenance instructions for special finishes, including recommended cleaning methods and materials, and special precautions identifying detrimental agents. 3. Part 3: Project documents and certificates, including the following: a. Shop drawings and product data. b. Certificates. c. Photocopies of warranties and bonds. 3.06 WARRANTIES AND BONDS A. Obtain warranties and bonds, executed in duplicate by responsible Subcontractors, suppliers, and manufacturers, within 10 days after completion of the applicable item of work. Except for items put into use with Owner's permission, leave date of beginning of time of warranty until the Date of Substantial completion is determined. B. Verify that documents are in proper form, contain full information, and are notarized. C. Co -execute submittals when required. D. Retain warranties and bonds until time specified for submittal. END OF SECTION 07128 /Navarro West Center 01780 4 CLOSEOUT SUBMITTALS I Navarro West Center Welbourne Drive and Navarro Drive SECTION 02310 GRADING For Permit and Pricing March 12th, 2008 PART1 GENERAL 1.01 SECTION INCLUDES A. Removal and storage of topsoil. B. Rough grading the site for building pads and site improvements. C. Finish grading. 1.02 RELATED SECTIONS A. Section 02316 - Fill and Backfill: Filling and compaction. 1.03 SUBMITTALS A. Project Record Documents: Accurately record actual locations of utilities remaining by horizontal dimensions, elevations or inverts, and slope gradients. 1.04 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Perform Work in accordance with State of , Highway Department standards. 1.05 PROJECT CONDITIONS A. Protect above- and below -grade utilities that remain. B. Protect bench marks, survey control points, paving, and curbs from grading equipment and vehicular traffic. PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.01 MATERIALS A. Topsoil: Topsoil excavated on -site. 1. Graded. 2. Free of roots, rocks larger than 1/2 inch (12 mm), subsoil, debris, large weeds and foreign matter. B. Other Fill Materials: See Section 02316. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 EXAMINATION A. Verify that survey bench mark and intended elevations for the Work are as indicated. 3.02 PREPARATION A. Identify required lines, levels, contours, and datum. B. Stake and flag locations of known utilities. C. Locate, identify, and protect utilities that remain, from damage. 3.03 ROUGH GRADING A. Remove topsoil from entire site, without mixing with foreign materials. B. Do not remove topsoil when wet. C. Remove subsoil from areas to be further excavated, re -landscaped, or re -graded. 07128 / Navarro West Center 02310 - 1 GRADING Navarro West Center Welbourne Drive and Navarro Drive For Permit and Pricing , March 12th, 2008 D. Do not remove wet subsoil, unless it is subsequently processed to obtain optimum moisture content. E. When excavating through roots, perform work by hand and cut roots with sharp axe. F. See Section 02316 for filling procedures. G. Stability: Replace damaged or displaced subsoil to same requirements as for specified fill. 3.04 SOIL REMOVAL A. Stockpile excavated topsoil on site. B. Stockpile excavated subsoil on site. C. Stockpiles: Use areas designated on site; pile depth not to exceed 8 feet (2.5 m); protect from erosion. 3.05 FINISH GRADING A. Before Finish Grading: 1. Verify building and trench backfilling have been inspected. 2. Verify subgrade has been contoured and compacted. B. Remove debris, roots, branches, stones, in excess of 1/2 inch (13 mm) in size. Remove soil contaminated with petroleum products. C. In areas where vehicles or equipment have compacted soil, scarify surface to depth of 3 inches (75 mm). D. Place topsoil in areas where sodding and planting are indicated. E. Place topsoil to the following compacted thicknesses: 1. Areas to be Sodded: 4 inches (100 mm). 2. Shrub Beds: 18 inches (450 mm). F. Place topsoil during dry weather. G. Remove roots, weeds, rocks, and foreign material while spreading. H. Near plants spread topsoil manually to prevent damage. I. Fine grade topsoil to eliminate uneven areas and low spots. Maintain profiles and contour of subgrade. J. Lightly compact placed topsoil. 3.06 .TOLERANCES A. Top Surface of Subgrade: Plus or minus 1/10 foot (30 mm) from required elevation. B. Top Surface of Finish Grade: Plus or minus 1/2 inch (13 mm). 3.07 CLEANING AND PROTECTION A. Remove unused stockpiled topsoil and subsoil. Grade stockpile area to prevent standing water. B. Leave site clean and raked, ready to receive landscaping. END OF SECTION 07128 / Navarro West Center 02310 - 2 GRADING I Navarro West Center Welbourne Drive and Navarro Drive SECTION 02315 EXCAVATION For Permit and Pricing March 12th, 2008 PART1 GENERAL 1.01 SECTION INCLUDES A. Excavating for pile caps, slabs -on -grade, and utilities within the building. B. Trenching for utilities outside the building to utility main connections. 1.02 RELATED SECTIONS A. Section 02310 - Grading: Grading. B. Section 02316 - Fill and Backfill: Fill materials, filling, and compacting. 1.03 PROJECT CONDITIONS A. Verify that survey bench mark and intended elevations for the Work are as indicated. B. Protect bench marks, survey control points, paving, and curbs from excavating equipment and vehicular traffic. PART 2 PRODUCTS - NOT USED PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 PREPARATION A. Identify required lines, levels, contours, and datum locations. B. See Section 02310 for additional requirements. 3.02 EXCAVATING A. Excavate to accommodate new structures and construction operations. B. Notify Architect of unexpected subsurface conditions and discontinue affected Work in area until notified to resume work. C. Slope banks of excavations deeper than 4 feet (1.2 meters) to angle of repose or less until shored. D. Do not interfere with 45 degree bearing splay of foundations. E. Cut utility trenches wide enough to allow inspection of installed utilities. F. Hand trim excavations. Remove loose matter. G. Correct areas that are over -excavated and load -bearing surfaces that are disturbed; see Section 02316. H. Grade top perimeter of excavation to prevent surface water from draining into excavation. I. Remove excavated material that is unsuitable for re -use from site. J. Remove excess excavated material from site. 3.03 PROTECTION A. Prevent displacement of banks and keep loose soil from falling into excavation; maintain soil stability. B. Protect bottom of excavations and soil adjacent to and beneath foundation from freezing. 07128 / Navarro West Center 02315 - 1 EXCAVATION Navarro West Center For Permit and Pricing Welbourne Drive and Navarro Drive March 12th, 2008 END OF SECTION 07128 / Navarro West Center 02315 - 2 EXCAVATION Navarro West Center Welboume Drive and Navarro Drive SECTION 02316 FILL AND BACKFILL PART1 GENERAL 1.01 SECTION INCLUDES For Permit and Pricing March 12th, 2008 A. Filling, backfilling, and compacting for slabs -on -grade, paving, and utilities within the building. B. Backfilling and compacting for utilities outside the building to utility main connections. 1.02 RELATED SECTIONS A. Section 02310 - Grading: Removal and handling of soil to be re -used. 1.03 REFERENCES A. AASHTO T 180 - Standard Specification for Moisture -Density Relations of Soils Using a 4.54 kg (10-Ib) Rammer and a 457 mm (18 in.) Drop; American Association of State Highway and Transportation Officials; 2001 (2004). B. ASTM D 698 - Standard Test Methods for Laboratory Compaction Characteristics of Soil Using Standard Effort (12,400 ft-Ibf/ft3 (600 kN-m/m3)); 2000a. C. ASTM D 1556 - Standard Test Method for Density and Unit Weight of Soil in Place by the Sand -Cone Method; 2000. D. ASTM D 1557 - Standard Test Methods for Laboratory Compaction Characteristics of Soil Using Modified Effort (56,000 ft-Ibf/ft3 (2,700 kN m/m3)); 2002. E. ASTM D 2167 - Standard Test Method for Density and Unit Weight of Soil in Place by the Rubber Balloon Method; 1994(R 2001). F. ASTM D 2487 - Standard Practice for Classification of Soils for Engineering Purposes (Unified Soil Classification System); 2006. G. ASTM D 2922 - Standard Test Methods for Density of Soil and Soil -Aggregate in Place by Nuclear Methods (Shallow Depth); 2005. H. ASTM D 3017 - Standard Test Method for Water Content of Soil and Rock in Place by Nuclear Methods (Shallow Depth); 2005. 1.04 DEFINITIONS A. Finish Grade Elevations: Indicated on drawings. B. Subgrade Elevations: 4 inches (100 mm) below finish grade elevations indicated on drawings, unless otherwise indicated. 1.05 SUBMITTALS A. See Section 01300 -Administrative Requirements, for submittal procedures. B. Compaction Density Test Reports. 1.06 PROJECT CONDITIONS A. Provide sufficient quantities of fill to meet project schedule and requirements. When necessary, store materials on site in advance of need. B. When fill materials need to be stored on site, locate stockpiles where indicated. 1. Separate differing materials with dividers or stockpile separately to prevent intermixing. 2. Prevent contamination. 07128 / Navarro West Center 02316 - 1 FILL AND BACKFILL Navarro West Center Welbourne Drive and Navarro Drive For Permit and Pricing March 12th, 2008 3. Protect stockpiles from erosion and deterioration of materials. C. Verify that survey bench marks and intended elevations for the Work are as indicated. PART PRODUCTS 2.01 FILL MATERIALS A. General Fill: Subsoil excavated on -site. 1. Graded. 2. Free of lumps larger than 3 inches (75 mm), rocks larger than 2 inches (50 mm), and debris. 3. Conforming to ASTM D 2487 Group Symbol CL. B. Granular Fill: Pit run washed stone; free of shale, clay, friable material and debris. 1. Graded in accordance with ASTM D 2487 Group Symbol GW. C. Topsoil: Topsoil excavated on -site. 1. Select. 2. Graded. 3. Free of roots, rocks larger than 1/2 inch (12 mm), subsoil, debris, large weeds and foreign matter. 2.02 SOURCE QUALITY CONTROL A. See Section 01400 - Quality Requirements, for general requirements for testing and analysis of soil material. B. If tests indicate materials do not meet specified requirements, change material and retest. C. Provide materials of each type from same source throughout the Work. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 EXAMINATION A. Identify required lines, levels, contours, and datum locations. 3.02 PREPARATION A. Scarify subgrade surface to a depth of 6 inches (150 mm) to identify soft spots. B. Cutout soft areas of subgrade not capable of compaction in place. Backfill with general fill. C. Compact subgrade to density equal to or greater than requirements for subsequent fill material. D. Until ready to fill, maintain excavations and prevent loose soil from falling into excavation. 3.03 FILLING A. Fill to contours and elevations indicated using unfrozen materials. B. Employ a placement method that does not disturb or damage other work. C. Systematically fill to allow maximum time for natural settlement. Do not fill over porous, wet, frozen or spongy subgrade surfaces. D. Maintain optimum moisture content of fill materials to attain required compaction density. E. Slope grade away from building minimum 2 inches in 10 ft (50 mm in 3 m), unless noted otherwise. Make gradual grade changes. Blend slope into level areas. F. Correct areas that are over -excavated. 1. Load -bearing foundation surfaces: Fill with concrete. 07128 / Navarro West Center 02316 - 2 I FILL AND BACKFILL ' Navarro West Center Welboume Drive and Navarro Drive For Permit and Pricing March 12th, 2008 2. Other areas: Use general fill, flush to required elevation, compacted to minimum 97 percent of maximum dry density. G. Compaction Density Unless Otherwise Specified or Indicated: 1. Under paving, slabs -on -grade, and similar construction: 97 percent of maximum dry density. 2. At other locations: 95 percent of maximum dry density. H. Reshape and re -compact fills subjected to vehicular traffic. 3.04 FILL AT SPECIFIC LOCATIONS A. Use general fill unless otherwise specified or indicated. B. Under Interior Slabs -On -Grade: 1. Use granular fill. 2. Depth: 4 inches (100 mm) deep. 3. Compact to 95 percent of maximum dry density. C. Over Buried Utility Piping and Conduits in Trenches: 1. Bedding: Use granular fill. 2. Cover with general fill. 3. Fill up to subgrade elevation. 4. Compact in maximum 8 inch (200 mm) lifts to 95 percent of maximum dry density. D. At Lawn Areas: 1. Use general fill. 2. Compact to 95 percent of maximum dry density. 3. See Section 02310 for topsoil placement. 3.05 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL A. See Section 01400 - Quality Requirements, for general requirements for field inspection and testing. B. Perform compaction density testing on compacted fill in accordance with ASTM D1556, ASTM D2167, ASTM D2922, or ASTM D3017. C. Evaluate results in relation to compaction curve determined by testing uncompacted material in accordance with ASTM D 698 ("standard Proctor"), ASTM D 1557 ("modified Proctor"), or AASHTO T 180. D. If tests indicate work does not meet specified requirements, remove work, replace and retest. E. Frequency of Tests: 07 128 / Navarro West Center END OF SECTION 02316 - 3 FILL AND BACKFILL Navarro West Center Welbourne Drive and Navarro Drive SECTION 02317 TRENCHING FOR SITE UTILITIES PART1 GENERAL 1.01 SECTION INCLUDES For Permit and Pricing March 12th, 2008 A. Backfilling and compacting for utilities outside the building to utility main connections. 1.02 REFERENCES A. AASHTO T 180 - Standard Specification for Moisture -Density Relations of Soils Using a 4.54 kg (10-Ib) Rammer and a 457 mm (18 in.) Drop; American Association of State Highway and Transportation Officials; 2001 (2004). B. ASTM D 698 - Standard Test Methods for Laboratory Compaction Characteristics of Soil Using Standard Effort (12,400 ft-Ibf/ft3 (600 kN-m/m3)); 2000a. C. ASTM D 1556 - Standard Test Method for Density and Unit Weight of Soil in Place by the Sand -Cone Method; 2000. D. ASTM D 1557 - Standard Test Methods for Laboratory Compaction Characteristics of Soil Using Modified Effort (56,000 ft-Ibf/ft3 (2,700 kN m/m3)); 2002. E. ASTM D 2167 - Standard Test Method for Density and Unit Weight of Soil in Place by the Rubber Balloon Method; 1994(R 2001). F. ASTM D 2922 - Standard Test Methods for Density of Soil and Soil -Aggregate in Place by Nuclear Methods (Shallow Depth); 2005. G. ASTM D 3017 - Standard Test Method for Water Content of Soil and Rock in Place by Nuclear Methods (Shallow Depth); 2005. 1.03 DEFINITIONS A. Finish Grade Elevations: Indicated on drawings. B. Subgrade Elevations: Indicated on drawings. 1.04 SUBMITTALS A. See Section 01300 -Administrative Requirements, for submittal procedures. B. Compaction Density Test Reports. 1.05 PROJECT CONDITIONS ' A. Provide sufficient quantities of fill to meet project schedule and requirements. When necessary, store materials on site in advance of need. ' B. Verify that survey bench marks and intended elevations for the Work are as indicated. PART 2 PRODUCTS 2,01 FILL MATERIALS A. Refer to Civil Drawings and Geotechnical Report PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 EXAMINATION A. Identify required lines, levels, contours, and datum locations. 07128 / Navarro West Center 02317 - 1 TRENCHING FOR SITE UTILITIES Navarro West Center Welbourne Drive and Navarro Drive 3.02 TRENCHING For Permit and Pricing March 12th, 2008 A. Notify Architect of unexpected subsurface conditions and discontinue affected Work in area until notified to resume work. B. Slope banks of excavations deeper than 4 feet (1.2 meters) to angle of repose or less until shored. C. Do not interfere with 45 degree bearing splay of foundations. D. Cut trenches wide enough to allow inspection of installed utilities. E. Hand trim excavations. Remove loose matter. F. Remove excavated material that is unsuitable for re -use from site. G. Remove excess excavated material from site. 3.03 PREPARATION FOR UTILITY PLACEMENT A. Cut out soft areas of subgrade not capable of compaction in place. Backfill with general fill. B. Compact subgrade to density equal to or greater than requirements for subsequent fill material. C. Until ready to backfill, maintain excavations and prevent loose soil from falling into excavation. 3.04 BACKFILLING A. Backfill to contours and elevations indicated using unfrozen materials. B. Employ a placement method that does not disturb or damage other work. C. Systematically fill to allow maximum time for natural settlement. Do not fill over porous, wet, frozen or spongy subgrade surfaces. D. Maintain optimum moisture content of fill materials to attain required compaction density. E. Slope grade away from building minimum 2 inches in 10 ft (50 mm in 3 m), unless noted otherwise. Make gradual grade changes. Blend slope into level areas. F. Correct areas that are over -excavated. 1. Other areas: Use general fill, flush to required elevation, compacted to minimum 97 percent of maximum dry density. G. Compaction Density Unless Otherwise Specified or Indicated: H. Reshape and re -compact fills subjected to vehicular traffic. 3.05 BEDDING AND FILL AT SPECIFIC LOCATIONS 3.06 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL A. See Section 01400 -Quality Requirements, for general requirements for field inspection and testing. B. Perform compaction density testing on compacted fill in accordance with ASTM D1556, ASTM D2167, ASTM D2922, or ASTM D3017. C. Evaluate results in relation to compaction curve determined by testing uncompacted material in accordance with ASTM D 698 ("standard Proctor"), ASTM D 1557 ("modified Proctor"), or AASHTO T 180. D. If tests indicate work does not meet specified requirements, remove work, replace and retest. E. Frequency of Tests: 07128 / Navarro West Center 02317 - 2 TRENCHING FOR SITE UTILITIES Navarro West Center For Permit and Pricing Welbourne Drive and Navarro Drive March 12th, 2008 3.07 CLEAN-UP A. Leave unused materials in a neat, compact stockpile. B. Remove unused stockpiled materials, leave area in a clean and neat condition. Grade stockpile area to prevent standing surface water. C. Leave borrow areas in a clean and neat condition. Grade to prevent standing surface water. END OF SECTION 07128 / Navarro West Center 02317 - 3 TRENCHING FOR SITE UTILITIES Navarro West Center Welbourne Drive and Navarro Drive SECTION 02451 PILE LOAD TESTS For Permit and Pricing March 12th, 2008 PART1 GENERAL 1.01 SECTION INCLUDES A. Pile load testing and documenting results. 1.02 RELATED SECTIONS A. Section 01400 - Quality Requirements: Testing laboratory services. B. Section 02468 - Drilled Concrete Piers (Caissons). 1.03 REFERENCES A. ASTM D 1143/1) 1143M -Standard Test Method for Deep Foundations Under Static Axial Compressive Load; 2007. 1.04 UNIT PRICES -MEASUREMENTAND PAYMENT A. See Section 01270 - Unit Prices, for additional unit price requirements. B. Additional Tests: 1. Basis of Measurement: Each additional test pile. 2. Basis of Payment: Includes set-up, applying test load, test equipment, monitoring, reporting results. 1.05 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Monitor test pile placement and elevations under direct supervision of a Professional Engineer experienced in design of this Work and licensed in Texas. PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.01 EQUIPMENT A. Equipment Type, Load Carrying Device, Load, and Instrumentation: Conform to ASTM D 1143/1) 1143M of same type as will be used for pile placement of the Work. B. Test Crib: Provide one test crib for pile load testing. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 TESTING A. Perform load tests for piles specified in the following Sections: 1. Section 02468 - Drilled Concrete Piers (Caissons). B. Load test the following: 1. 4 indicator piles at locations as directed. C. Perform the following tests on each test pile: 1. ASTM D 1143/1) 1143M tests. 2. Subject piles to 1-3/4 times design load. D. Acceptable Permanent Set of Piles After Load Testing: 1/8 inch (3 mm). E. If tested piles do not conform to requirements, perform additional testing of other piles. 3.02 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL A. Field inspection and monitoring of testing will be performed under provisions of Section 01400. 07128 / Navarro West Center 02451 - 1 PILE LOAD TESTS Navarro West Center For Permit and Pricing Welbourne Drive and Navarro Drive March 12th, 2008 B. An independent inspection firm will be engaged to observe and document test method and results. C. Document test equipment used, method of calibration and recording, test results, recommendations or modification of piling method used. D. Accurately record actual dimensions and locations of tested piles and movement or distortion caused by testing. 3.03 EQUIPMENT REMOVAL A. Remove test and temporary load equipment from site. END OF SECTION 07128 / Navarro West Center 02451 - 2 PILE LOAD TESTS Navarro West Center Welbourne Drive and Navarro Drive SECTION 02468 DRILLED CONCRETE PIERS (CAISSONS) PART1 GENERAL 1.01 SECTION INCLUDES A. Concrete and reinforcement. 1.02 RELATED SECTIONS A. Section 02451 - Pile Load Tests: Requirements for pier load tests. B. Section 03300 - Cast -in -Place Concrete: Requirements for concrete. 1.03 UNIT PRICES - MEASUREMENT AND PAYMENT For Permit and Pricing March 12th, 2008 A. See Section 01270 - Unit Prices, for additional unit price requirements. B. Designed Piers: 1. Design Pier Quantity: Determined by the quantity of piers indicated in the Contract Documents. 2. Design Pier Length: By the linear foot (meter) measured from bearing to top of pier elevation as indicated. 3. Pier Reinforcement: By the linear foot (meter) of full pier. 4. Test Piers: 5 feet (1.5 m) longer than design length piers. C. Actual Piers: 1. Actual Pier Quantity: Determined by quantity of piers identified in the Project Record Documents. 2. Actual Pier Length: Determined by length of piers identified in Project Record Documents. a. Base measurement on total linear measurement of piling from bearing to top of pier, except for test piers calculated at 5 feet (1.5 m) longer. D. Adjustments to the Contract Sum/Price will be made if the Actual Pier Quantity or Length differs from Design Pier Quantity or Length, based on unit prices established in the Agreement and as follows: 1. Actual Pier Quantity, including test piers. 2. Actual Pier Length, including test piers. 3. Unit price per unit length. To calculate cost adjustment, multiply unit price by difference between Design Pier Length and Actual Pier Length. E. Determination of Unit Measurements: Identified by site measurements and verified by the Architect. 1.04 REFERENCES A. ACI 336.1 - Standard Specification for the Construction of Drilled Piers; American Concrete Institute International; 2001. 1.05 SUBMITTALS A. See Section 01300 -Administrative Requirements, for submittal procedures. B. Project Record Documents: Record actual locations of piers, pier diameter, and pier length. Accurately record the following: 1. Sizes, lengths, and locations of piers and footing groups. 2. Sequence of placement. 3. Final base and top elevations. 4. Deviation from indicated locations. 07128 / Navarro West Center 02468 - 1 DRILLED CONCRETE PIERS (CAISSONS) Navarro West Center Welbourne Drive and Navarro Drive For Permit and Pricing March 12th, 2008 1.06 PRE -INSTALLATION MEETING A. Convene one week prior to commencing work of this section. PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.01 MATERIALS A. Concrete Materials and Mix: Specified in Section 03300. B. Equipment: Appropriate for dewatering excavated shaft. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 INSTALLATION A. Construct piers in accordance with ACI 336.1. B. Drill vertical pier shafts to diameters and depths indicated. C. Clean shaft and bottom of loose material. Maintain shafts free of water D. Allow inspection of shaft prior to placement of reinforcement and concrete. E. Place reinforcing steel in accordance with Section 03200. F. Place concrete in single pour, in accordance with Section 03300 with equipment designed for vertical placement of concrete. G. Set tops of piles to elevations indicated. 3.02 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL A. Field inspection and testing will be performed under provisions of Section 01400. B. Perform load tests to requirements of Section 02451. C. Test Piers: Same diameter and type as specified for other piling, placed in same manner. D. Accepted test piers may not be used in the Work. END OF SECTION 67128 / Navarro West Center 02468 - 2 DRILLED CONCRETE PIERS (CAISSONS) Navarro West Center Welbourne Drive and Navarro Drive SECTION 02510 WATER DISTRIBUTION For Permit and Pricing March 12th, 2008 PART1 GENERAL 1.01 SECTION INCLUDES A. Pipe and fittings for site water lines including domestic water lines and firewater lines. B. Valves, Fire hydrants, and Domestic water hydrants. 1.02 RELATED SECTIONS A. Section 02640 - Manholes and Covers. B. Section 03300 - Cast -in -Place Concrete: Concrete for thrust restraints. C. Section 09900 - Paints and Coatings. 1.03 REFERENCES A. ASTM B 88 - Standard Specification for Seamless Copper Water Tube; 2003. B. ASTM D 1785 - Standard Specification for Poly(Vinyl Chloride) (PVC) Plastic Pipe, Schedules 40, 80, and 126; 2006. C. AWWA C151/A21.51 - Ductile -Iron Pipe, Centrifugally Cast, for Water; American Water Works Association; 2002 (ANSI/AWWA C151/A21.51). D. AWWA C502 - Dry Barrel Fire Hydrants; American Water Works Association; 2005 (ANSI/AWWA C502/C502a). E. AWWA C600 - Installation of Ductile -Iron Water Mains and Their Appurtenances; American Water Works Association; 2005 (ANSI/AWWA C600). F. UL 246 - Hydrants for Fire -Protection Service; Underwriters Laboratories Inc.; 1993. PART2 PRODUCTS 2.01 WATER PIPE A. Manufacturers: B. Ductile Iron Pipe: AWWA C151: C. Copper Tubing: ASTM B 88, Type K, annealed: D. PVC Pipe: ASTM D 1785, Schedule 40. E. Trace Wire: Magnetic detectable conductor, clear plastic covering, imprinted with 'Water Service " in large letters. 2.02 VALVES A. Valves: Manufacturer's name and pressure rating marked on valve body. B. Gate Valves Up To 3 Inches (75 mm): C. Ball Valves Up To 2 Inches (50 mm): D. Butterfly Valves From 2 Inches to 24 Inches (50 mm to 600 mm): 2.03 HYDRANTS A. Hydrants: AWWA C502, UL 246, dry barrel type. 07128 / Navarro West Center 02510 - 1 WATER DISTRIBUTION Navarro West Center Welbourne Drive and Navarro Drive For Permit and Pricing March 12th, 2008 2.04 ACCESSORIES A. Concrete for Thrust Restraints: Concrete type specified in Section 03300. B. Backflow Preventer: per plans. C. Meter: per plans. D. Manhole and Cover: Refer to Section 02640. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 TRENCHING A. See Section 02317 for additional requirements. B. Backfill around sides and to top of pipe with cover fill, tamp in place and compact, then complete backfilling. 3.02 INSTALLATION - PIPE A. Install ductile iron piping and fittings to AWWA C600. B. Route pipe in straight line. C. Install pipe to allow for expansion and contraction without stressing pipe or joints. D. Slope water pipe and position drains at low points. 3.03 INSTALLATION - VALVES AND HYDRANTS A. Set valves on solid bearing. B. Center and plumb valve box over valve. Set box cover flush with finished grade. C. Set hydrants plumb; locate pumper nozzle perpendicular to and facing roadway. D. Set hydrants to grade, with nozzles at least 20 inches (500 mm) above ground. E. Locate control valve 4 inches (100 mm) away from hydrant. F. Provide a drainage pit 36 inches (900 mm) square by 24 inches (600 mm) deep filled with 2 inches (50 mm) washed gravel. Encase elbow of hydrant in gravel to 6 inches (150 mm) above drain opening. Do not connect drain opening to sewer. G. Paint hydrants in accordance with Section 09900. END OF SECTION 07128 / Navarro West Center 02510 - 2 WATER DISTRIBUTION Navarro West Center Welbourne Drive and Navarro Drive SECTION 02515 DISINFECTION OF WATER DISTRIBUTION SYSTEM PART1 GENERAL 1.01 SECTION INCLUDES A. Disinfection of building domestic water piping specified in Section 15145. 1.02 For Permit and Pricing March 12th, 2008 A. AWWA B300 - Hypochlorites; American Water Works Association; 2004 (ANSI/AWWA 6300). B. AWWA B301 - Liquid Chlorine; American Water Works Association; 2004 (ANSI/AWWA B301). C. AWWA B302 - Ammonium Sulfate; American Water Works Association; 2005. D. AWWA B303 - Sodium Chlorite; American Water Works Association; 2005. 1.03 REGULATORY REQUIREMENTS A. Conform to applicable code or regulation for performing the work of this Section. B. Provide certificate of compliance from authority having jurisdiction indicating approval of water system. PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.01 DISINFECTION CHEMICALS A. Chemicals: AWWA B300, Hypochlorite, AWWA B301, Liquid Chlorine, AWWA B302, Ammonium Sulfate, and AWWA B303, Sodium Chlorite. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 EXECUTION A. Provide and attach required equipment to perform the work of this Section. B. Inject treatment disinfectant into piping system. C. Maintain disinfectant in system for 24 hours. D. Flush, circulate, and clean until required cleanliness is achieved; use municipal domestic water. E. Replace permanent system devices removed for disinfection. END OF SECTION 07128 / Navarro West Center 0251ESINFECTION OF WATER DISTRIBUTION SYSTEM Navarro West Center Welboume Drive and Navarro Drive SECTION 02535 SANITARY SEWER PIPING For Permit and Pricing March 12th, 2008 PART1 GENERAL 1.01 SECTION INCLUDES A. Sanitary sewerage drainage piping, fittings, and accessories. B. Connection of building sanitary drainage system to municipal sewers. 1.02 REFERENCES A. ASTM A 74 - Standard Specification for Cast Iron Soil Pipe and Fittings; 2006. B. ASTM C 564 - Standard Specification for Rubber Gaskets for Cast Iron Soil Pipe and Fittings; 2003a. C. ASTM D 1785 - Standard Specification for Poly(Vinyl Chloride) (PVC) Plastic Pipe, Schedules 40, 80, and 120; 2006. D. ASTM D 2321 - Standard Practice for Underground Installation of Thermoplastic Pipe for Sewers and Other Gravity -Flow Applications; 2005. PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.01 SEWER PIPE MATERIALS A. Cast Iron Soil Pipe: ASTM A 74, Service type, inside nominal diameter of inches mm), hub and spigot end. B. Joint Seals for Cast Iron Pipe: ASTM C 564 rubber gaskets. C. Plastic Pipe: ASTM D 1785, Schedule 40, Poly(Vinyl Chloride) (PVC) material; inside nominal diameter of inches ( mm), bell and spigot style solvent sealed joint end. D. Fittings: Same material as pipe molded or formed to suit pipe size and end design, in required tee, bends, elbows, cleanouts, reducers, traps and other configurations required. 2.02 PIPE ACCESSORIES A. Trace Wire: Magnetic detectable conductor, clear plastic covering, imprinted with "Sewer Service " in large letters. 2.03 CLEANOUT MANHOLE A. Lid and Frame: Cast iron construction, hinged lid. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 TRENCHING A. See Section 02317 for additional requirements. B. Backfill around sides and to top of pipe with cover fill, tamp in place and compact, then complete backfilling. 3.02 INSTALLATION - PIPE A. Install pipe, fittings, and accessories in accordance with manufacturer's instructions. Seal watertight. 1. Plastic Pipe: Also comply with ASTM D 2321. 07128 / Navarro West Center 02535 - 1 SANITARY SEWER PIPING Navarro West Center For Permit and Pricing Welbourne Drive and Navarro Drive March 12th, 2008 B. Lay pipe to slope gradients noted on layout drawings; with maximum variation from true slope of 1/8 inch (3 mm) in 10 feet (3 m). C. Connect to building sanitary sewer outlet, through installed sleeves. D. Install trace wire 6 inches (150 mm) above top of pipe; coordinate with Section 02317. 3.03 INSTALLATION - CLEANOUTS A. Form bottom of excavation clean and smooth to correct elevation. B. Form and place cast -in -place concrete base pad, with provision for sanitary sewer pipe end sections. C. Establish elevations and pipe inverts for inlets and outlets as indicated. D. Mount lid and frame level in grout, secured to top cone section to elevation indicated. END OF SECTION .07128 / Navarro West Center 02535 - 2 SANITARY SEWER PIPING i Navarro West Center Welbourne Drive and Navarro Drive SECTION 02582 UNDERGROUND ELECTRICAL DUCTS AND MANHOLES For Permit and Pricing March 12th, 2008 PART1 GENERAL 1.01 SECTION INCLUDES A. Metal conduit. B. Nonmetallic duct. C. Manholes. 1.02 RELATED SECTIONS A. Section 03300 - Cast -in -Place Concrete. 1.03 REFERENCES A. ANSI C80.1 - American National Standard for Electrical Rigid Steel Conduit (ERSC); 2005. B. ASTM C 858 - Standard Specification for Underground Precast Concrete Utility Structures; 1983 (Reapproved 2004). C. ASTM C 891 - Standard Practice for Installation of Underground Precast Concrete Utility Structures; 1990 (Reapproved 2003). D. NEMA TC 2 - Electrical Polyvinyl Chloride (PVC) Tubing and Conduit; National Electrical Manufacturers Association; 2003. E. NEMA TC 3 - PVC Fittings for Use with Rigid PVC Conduit and Tubing; National Electrical Manufacturers Association; 2004. F. NEMA TC 6&8 - PVC Plastic Utilities Duct for Underground Installation; National Electrical Manufacturers Association; 2003. G. UL 651A - Type EB and A Rigid PVC Conduit and HDPE Conduit; Underwriters Laboratories Inc.; 2000. PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.01 MANUFACTURERS A. Ducts and Manholes: 2.02 CONDUIT AND DUCT A. Rigid Steel Conduit: ANSI C80.1. B. Rigid Plastic Conduit: NEMA TC 2, Schedule 40 PVC, with fittings and conduit bodies to NEMA TC 3. C. Rigid Plastic Underground Conduit: UL 651A, Type A PVC. D. Plastic Utilities Duct: NEMA TC 6&8; PVC Type EB. E. Plastic Communications Duct and Fittings: NEMA TC 6&8, Type EB. 2.03 PRECAST CONCRETE MANHOLES A. Manufacturers: B. Description: Precast manhole designed in accordance with ASTM C 858, comprising modular, interlocking sections complete with accessories. 07128 / Navarro West Center nNEffiffIGROUND ELECTRICAL DUCTS AND MANHOLES Navarro West Center Welboume Drive and Navarro Drive For Permit and Pricing March 12th, 2008 PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 DUCT BANK INSTALLATION A. Install duct with minimum slope of 4 inches per 100 feet (100 mm per 25.4 m) (0.33 percent). Slope duct away from building entrances. B. Cut duct square using saw or pipe cutter; de -burr cut ends. C. Insert duct to shoulder of fittings; fasten securely. D. Install no more than equivalent of three 90-degree bends between pull points. E. Provide suitable fittings to accommodate expansion and deflection where required. F. Stagger duct joints vertically in concrete encasement 6 inches (150 mm) minimum. G. Use suitable separators and chairs installed not greater than 4 feet (1200 mm) on centers. H. Band ducts together before backfilling. I. Securely anchor duct to prevent movement during concrete placement. J. Place concrete under provisions of Section 03300. Use mineral pigment to color concrete red. K. Provide minimum 3 inch (75 mm) concrete cover at bottom, top, and sides of ductbank. L. Provide two No. 4 steel reinforcing bars in top of bank under paved areas. M. Provide suitable pull string in each empty duct except sleeves and nipples. N. Swab duct. Use suitable caps to protect installed duct against entrance of dirt and moisture. 3.02 PRE -CAST MANHOLE INSTALLATION A. Install and seal precast sections in accordance with ASTM C 891. B. Install manholes plumb. C. Use precast neck and shaft sections to bring manhole cover to finished elevation. END OF SECTION 1 07128 / Navarro West Center n1 MENW ROUND ELECTRICAL DUCTS AND MANHOLES Navarro West Center For Permit and Pricing Welboume Drive and Navarro Drive March 12th, 2008 SECTION 02590 1 SITE GROUNDING PART1 GENERAL 1.01 SECTION INCLUDES A. Electrodes, connectors, and conductors. PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.01 MATERIALS PART 3 EXECUTION ' 3.01 EXAMINATION A. Verify completion of filling and backfilling before beginning grounding work. B. Verify that trenching is completed before installing horizontal electrodes. 3.02 INSTALLATION A. Install products in accordance with manufacturer's instructions. 3.03 CHEMICAL TREATMENT A. Provide chemical treatment where indicated. B. Saturate treatment chemicals with water following application. END OF SECTION 07128 / Navarro West Center 2 - 1 SITE GROUNDING 0 590 U G 1 Navarro West Center Welbourne Drive and Navarro Drive SECTION 02635 STORM DRAINAGE PIPING For Permit and Pricing March 12th, 2008 PART1 GENERAL 1.01 SECTION INCLUDES A. Storm drainage piping, fittings, and accessories. B. Connection of drainage system to municipal sewers. C. Catch basins, Plant area drains, Paved area drainage, Site surface drainage, Detention tank, and Detention basin. 1.02 RELATED SECTIONS A. Section 02317 - Trenching for Site Utilities: Excavating, bedding, and backfilling. 1.03 REFERENCES A. ASTM A 74 - Standard Specification for Cast Iron Soil Pipe and Fittings; 2006. B. ASTM C 564 - Standard Specification for Rubber Gaskets for Cast Iron Soil Pipe and Fittings; 2003a. C. ASTM D 1785 - Standard Specification for Poly(Vinyl Chloride) (PVC) Plastic Pipe, Schedules 40, 80, and 120; 2006. D. ASTM D 2321 - Standard Practice for Underground Installation of Thermoplastic Pipe for Sewers and Other Gravity -Flow Applications; 2005. PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.01 SEWER PIPE MATERIALS A. Cast Iron Soil Pipe: ASTM A 74, Extra Heavy grade, inside nominal diameter of inches (— mm), hub and spigot end. B. Cast Iron Pipe Joint Device: ASTM C 564, rubber gasket joint devices. C. Plastic Pipe: ASTM D 1785, Schedule 40, Poly(Vinyl Chloride) (PVC) material; inside nominal diameter of inches (— mm), bell and spigot style solvent sealed joint end. 2.02 PIPE ACCESSORIES A. Pipe Joints: Mechanical clamp ring type, stainless steel expanding and contracting sleeve, neoprene ribbed gasket for positive seal. B. Fittings: Same material as pipe molded or formed to suit pipe size and end design, in required tee, bends, elbows, cleanouts, reducers, traps and other configurations required. C. Filter Fabric: Non -biodegradable, woven, Provide manufactured by D. Trace Wire: Magnetic detectable conductor, clear plastic covering, imprinted with "Storm Sewer Service " in large letters. 2.03 CATCH BASIN, CLEANOUT, AND AREA DRAIN COMPONENTS A. Lids and Drain Covers: Cast iron, hinged to cast iron frame. 1. Catch Basin: a. Lid Design: Linear grill. 2. Cleanout: 07128 / Navarro West Center 02635 - 1 STORM DRAINAGE PIPING Navarro West Center Welbourne Drive and Navarro Drive For Permit and Pricing March 12th, 2008 3. Area Drain: 2.04 BEDDING AND COVER MATERIALS A. Bedding: As specified in Section 02317. B. Cover: As specified in Section 02317. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 TRENCHING A. See Section 02317 for additional requirements. B. Backfill around sides and to top of pipe with cover fill, tamp in place and compact, then complete backfilling. 3.02 INSTALLATION - PIPE A. Install pipe, fittings, and accessories in accordance with manufacturer's instructions. Seal watertight. 1. Plastic Pipe: Also comply with ASTM D 2321. B. Lay pipe to slope gradients noted on layout drawings; with maximum variation from true slope of 1/8 inch (3 mm) in 10 feet (3 m). C. Install continuous trace wire 6 inches (150 mm) above top of pipe; coordinate with Section 02317. 3.03 INSTALLATION - CATCH BASINS AND CLEANOUTS A. Form bottom of excavation clean and smooth to correct elevation. B. Form and place cast -in -place concrete base pad, with provision for sanitary sewer pipe end sections. C. Establish elevations and pipe inverts for inlets and outlets as indicated. D. Mount lid and frame level in grout, secured to top cone section to elevation indicated. END OF SECTION 07128 / Navarro West Center 02635 - 2 STORM DRAINAGE PIPING Navarro West Center Welbourne Drive and Navarro Drive SECTION 02640 MANHOLES AND COVERS For Permit and Pricing March 12th, 2008 PART1 GENERAL 1.01 SECTION INCLUDES A. Monolithic concrete manholes with masonry transition to lid frame, covers, anchorage, and accessories. B. Modular precast concrete manhole sections with tongue -and -groove joints with masonry transition to lid frame, covers, anchorage, and accessories. 1.02 RELATED SECTIONS A. Section 03300 - Cast -in -Place Concrete. 1.03 REFERENCES A. ASTM A 48/A 48M - Standard Specification for Gray Iron Castings; 2003. B. ASTM C 478 - Standard Specification for Precast Reinforced Concrete Manhole Sections; 2007. C. ASTM C 478M - Standard Specification for Precast Reinforced Concrete Manhole Sections [Metric]; 2007. D. ASTM C 923 - Standard Specification for Resilient Connectors Between Reinforced Concrete Manhole Structures, Pipes, and Laterals; 2007. E. ASTM C 923M - Standard Specification for Resilient Connectors Between Reinforced Concrete Manhole Structures, Pipes, and Laterals [Metric]; 2007. PART2 PRODUCTS 2.01 MATERIALS A. Manhole Sections: Reinforced precast concrete in accordance with ASTM C 478 (ASTM C 478M), with resilient connectors complying with ASTM C 923 (ASTM C 923M). B. Concrete: As specified in Section 03300. C. Concrete Reinforcement: As specified in Section 03300. 2.02 COMPONENTS A. Lid and Frame: ASTM A 48/A 48M, Class 30B Cast iron construction, machined flat bearing surface, removable lockable lid, closed lid design; live load rating of psf ( kPa); sealing gasket; lid molded with identifying name ;. Provide manufactured by 2.03 CONFIGURATION PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 MANHOLES A. Place concrete base pad, trowel top surface level. B. Place manhole sections plumb and level, trim to correct elevations, anchor to base pad. C. Form and place manhole cylinder plumb and level, to correct dimensions and elevations. As work progresses, build in fabricated metal items. D. Cut and fit for pipe. 07128 / Navarro West Center 02640 - 1 MANHOLES AND COVERS Navarro West Center For Permit and Pricing Welbourne Drive and Navarro Drive March 12th, 2008 E. Grout base of shaft sections to achieve slope to exit piping. Trowel smooth. Contour as required. F. Set cover frames and covers level without tipping, to correct elevations. G. Coordinate with other sections of work to provide correct size, shape, and location. END OF SECTION 07128 / Navarro West Center 02640 - 2 MANHOLES AND COVERS Navarro West Center Welboume Drive and Navarro Drive SECTION 02751 PORTLAND CEMENT CONCRETE PAVING PART1 GENERAL 1.01 SECTION INCLUDES A. Concrete sidewalks, integral curbs, gutters, and parking areas. 1.02 RELATED SECTIONS A. Section 07900 - Joint Sealers: Sealant for joints. For Permit and Pricing March 12th, 2008 1.03 REFERENCES A. ACI 211.1 - Standard Practice for Selecting Proportions for Normal, Heavyweight, and Mass Concrete; American Concrete Institute International; 1991 (Reapproved 2002). B. ACI 301 - Specifications for Structural Concrete for Buildings; American Concrete Institute International; 2005. C. ACI 304R - Guide for Measuring, Mixing, Transporting, and Placing Concrete; American Concrete Institute International; 2000. —" D. ACI 305R - Hot Weather Concreting; American Concrete Institute International; 1999. E. ACI 306R - Cold Weather Concreting; American Concrete Institute International; 1988 (Reapproved 2002). F. ASTM A 185/A 185M - Standard Specification for Steel Welded Wire Reinforcement, Plain, for Concrete; 2006. G. ASTM A 615/A 615M - Standard Specification for Deformed and Plain Billet -Steel Bars for Concrete Reinforcement; 2007. rH. ASTM C 33 - Standard Specification for Concrete Aggregates; 2003. I. ASTM C 39/C 39M - Standard Test Method for Compressive Strength of Cylindrical Concrete Specimens; 2005. J. ASTM C 94/C 94M - Standard Specification for Ready -Mixed Concrete; 2007. ' K. ASTM C 150 - Standard Specification for Portland Cement; 2005. L. ASTM C 260 - Standard Specification for Air -Entraining Admixtures for Concrete; 2006. M. ASTM C 494/C 494M - Standard Specification for Chemical Admixtures for Concrete; 2005a. N. ASTM C 618 - Standard Specification for Coal Fly Ash and Raw or Calcined Natural Pozzolan for Use in Concrete; 2005. ' O. ASTM D 1751 - Standard Specification for Preformed Expansion Joint Filler for Concrete Paving and Structural Construction (nonextruding and Resilient Bituminous Types); 2004. 1.04 SUBMITTALS A. See Section 01300 -Administrative Requirements, for submittal procedures. B. Product Data: Provide data on joint filler, admixtures, and curing compound. C. Design Data: Indicate pavement thickness, designed concrete strength, reinforcement, and typical details. 1.05 QUALITY ASSURANCE 07128 / Navarro West Center 02751 - 1 PORTLAND CEMENT CONCRETE PAVING Navarro West Center Welbourne Drive and Navarro Drive For Permit and Pricing March 12th, 2008 A. Perform work in accordance with ACI 301. B. Follow recommendations of AC1305R when concreting during hot weather. C. Follow recommendations of ACI 306R when concreting during cold weather. PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.01 FORM MATERIALS A. Form Materials: Conform to ACI 301. B. Joint Filler: Preformed; non -extruding bituminous type (ASTM D 1751). 1. Thickness: 1/2 inch (12 mm). 2.02 REINFORCEMENT A. Reinforcing Steel: ASTM A 615/A 615M Grade 60 (420); deformed billet steel bars; unfinished finish. B. Steel Welded Wire Reinforcement: Plain type, ASTM A 185/A 185M; in coiled rolls; unfinished. C. Dowels: ASTM A 615/A 615M Grade 60 (420); deformed billet steel bars; unfinished finish. 2.03 CONCRETE MATERIALS A. Cement: ASTM C 150 Normal - Type I portland type, grey color. B. Fine and Coarse Mix Aggregates: ASTM C 33. C. Fly Ash: ASTM C 618, Class C or F. D. Water: Clean, and not detrimental to concrete. E. Air Entrainment Admixture: ASTM C 260. F. Chemical Admixtures: ASTM C 494/C 494M, Type A - Water Reducing, Type D - Water Reducing and Retarding, Type E - Water Reducing and Accelerating, Type F - Water Reducing, High Range, and Type G - Water Reducing, High Range and Retarding. 1. Do not use chemicals that will result in soluble chloride ions in excess of 0.1 percent by weight of cement. 2.04 ACCESSORIES 2.05 CONCRETE MIX DESIGN A. Proportioning Normal Weight Concrete: Comply with ACI 211.1 recommendations. B. Admixtures: Add acceptable admixtures as recommended in ACI 211.1 and at rates recommended by manufacturer. C. Concrete Properties: 1. Compressive Strength, when tested in accordance with ASTM C 39/C 39M at 28 days: 4000 psi ( Mpa). 2. Fly Ash Content: Maximum 25 percent of cementitious materials by weight. 3. Water -Cement Ratio: Maximum 40 percent by weight. 4. Maximum Slump: 3 inches (75 mm). 2.06 MIXING A. Transit Mixers: Comply with ASTM C 94/C 94M. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 SUBBASE 07128 / Navarro West Center 02751 -2 PORTLAND CEMENT CONCRETE PAVING Navarro West Center For Permit and Pricing Welbourne Drive and Navarro Drive March 12th, 2008 A. See Section 02721 for construction of base course for work of this Section. 3.02 PREPARATION A. Moisten base to minimize absorption of water from fresh concrete. B. Notify Architect minimum 24 hours prior to commencement of concreting operations. 3.03 FORMING A. Place and secure forms to correct location, dimension, profile, and gradient. B. Assemble formwork to permit easy stripping and dismantling without damaging concrete. C. Place joint filler vertical in position, in straight lines. Secure to formwork during concrete placement. 3.04 REINFORCEMENT 1 A. Place reinforcement at midheight of slabs -on -grade. B. Interrupt reinforcement at contraction joints. C. Place dowels to achieve pavement and curb alignment as detailed. i3.05 PLACING CONCRETE A. Place concrete in accordance with ACI 304R. B. Ensure reinforcement, inserts, embedded parts, formed joints are not disturbed during concrete placement. C. Place concrete continuously over the full width of the panel and between predetermined construction joints. Do not break or interrupt successive pours such that cold joints occur. D. Place concrete to pattern indicated. 3.06 JOINTS A. Align curb, gutter, and sidewalk joints. B. Place 3/8 inch (10 mm) wide expansion joints at 20 foot (6 m) intervals and to separate paving from vertical surfaces and other components and in pattern indicated. 1. Form joints with joint filler extending from bottom of pavement to within 1/2 inch (13 mm) of finished surface. 2. Secure to resist movement by wet concrete. C. Saw cut contraction joints 3/16 inch (5 mm) wide at an optimum time after finishing. Cut 1/3 into depth of slab. 3.07 FINISHING A. Sidewalk Paving: Light broom, texture perpendicular to direction of travel with troweled and radiused edge 1/4 inch (6 mm) radius. B. Curbs and Gutters: Light broom, texture parallel to pavement direction. C. Inclined Vehicular Ramps: Broomed perpendicular to slope. D. Place curing compound on exposed concrete surfaces immediately after finishing. Apply in accordance with manufacturer's instructions. 3.08 JOINT SEALING A. See Section 07900 for joint sealer requirements. 07128 / Navarro West Center 02751 - 3 PORTLAND CEMENT CONCRETE PAVING Navarro West Center Welboume Drive and Navarro Drive For Permit and Pricing March 12th, 2008 3.09 TOLERANCES A. Maximum Variation of Surface Flatness: 1/4 inch (6 mm) in 10 ft (3 m). 3.10 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL A. An independent testing agency will perform field quality control tests, as specified in Section 01400. 1. Provide free access to concrete operations at project site and cooperate with appointed firm. 2. Submit proposed mix design of each class of concrete to inspection and testing firm for review prior to commencement of concrete operations. 3. Tests of concrete and concrete materials may be performed at any time to ensure conformance with specified requirements. B. Compressive Strength Tests: ASTM C 39/C 39M. For each test, mold and cure three concrete test cylinders. Obtain test samples for every 100 cu yd (76 cu m) or less of each class of concrete placed. 1. Take one additional test cylinder during cold weather concreting, cured on job site under same conditions as concrete it represents. 2. Perform one slump test for each set of test cylinders taken. C. Maintain records of placed concrete items. Record date, location of pour, quantity, air temperature, and test samples taken. 3.11 PROTECTION A. Immediately after placement, protect pavement from premature drying, excessive hot or cold temperatures, and mechanical injury. B. Do not permit pedestrian traffic over pavement for 7 days minimum after finishing. END OF SECTION 07128 / Navarro West Center 02751 - 4 PORTLAND CEMENT CONCRETE PAVING Navarro West Center Welbourne Drive and Navarro Drive SECTION 02765 PAVEMENT MARKINGS For Permit and Pricing March 12th, 2008 PART 2 PRODUCTS 1.01 MATERIALS A. Line and Zone Marking Paint: MPI No. 97 Latex Traffic Marking Paint; color(s) as indicated. B. Temporary Marking Tape: Preformed, reflective, pressure sensitive adhesive tape in color(s) required; Contractor is responsible for selection of material of sufficient durability as to perform satisfactorily during period for which its use is required. PART 3 EXECUTION END OF SECTION 07128 / Navarro West Center 02765 - 1 PAVEMENT MARKINGS Navarro West Center Welboume Drive and Navarro Drive SECTION 02810 IRRIGATION SYSTEM For Permit and Pricing March 12th, 2008 PART1 GENERAL 1.01 SECTION INCLUDES A. Pipe and fittings, valves, sprinkler heads, and accessories. B. Control system. 1.02 RELATED SECTIONS A. Section 02315 - Excavation: Excavating for irrigation piping. B. Section 02316 - Fill and Backfill: Backfilling for irrigation piping. C. Section 16123 - Building Wire and Cable. 1.03 REFERENCES A. ASTM D 2241 - Standard Specification for Poly (Vinyl Chloride) (PVC) Pressure -Rated Pipe (SDR Series); 2005. B. ASTM D 2564 - Standard Specification for Solvent Cements for Poly(Vinyl Chloride) (PVC) Plastic Piping Systems; 2004. C. NEMA 250 - Enclosures for Electrical Equipment (1000 Volts Maximum); National Electrical Manufacturers Association; 2003. 1.04 SUBMITTALS A. See Section 01300 - Administrative Requirements, for submittal procedures. B. Shop Drawings: Indicate piping layout to water source, location of sleeves under pavement, location and coverage of sprinkler heads, components, plant and landscaping features, site structures, schedule of fittings to be used. C. Product Data: Provide component and control system and wiring diagrams. D. Record Documents: Record actual locations of all concealed components piping system. E. Operation and Maintenance Data: 1. Provide instructions for operation and maintenance of system and controls, seasonal activation and shutdown, and manufacturer's parts catalog. 2. Provide schedule indicating length of time each valve is required to be open to provide a determined amount of water. 1.05 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Installer Qualifications: Company specializing in performing the work of this section with minimum three years of experience. 1.06 REGULATORY REQUIREMENTS A. Conform to applicable code for piping and component requirements. 1.07 COORDINATION A. Coordinate the work with site backfilling, landscape grading and delivery of plant life. 1.08 MAINTENANCE SERVICES ' A. Installer's Field Services: Prepare and start systems under provisions of Section 01700. 07128 / Navarro West Center 02810 - 1 IRRIGATION SYSTEM Navarro West Center Welboume Drive and Navarro Drive For Permit and Pricing March 12th, 2008 B. Provide one complete spring start-up and a fall shutdown. PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.01 IRRIGATION SYSTEM A. Manufacturers: 1. Rain Bird Sales, Inc: www.rainbird.com. 2. Weathermatic: www.weathermatic.com. 3. Substitutions: See Section 01600 - Product Requirements. 2.02 PIPE MATERIALS A. PVC Pipe: ASTM D 2241; 200 psi (1.38 MPa) pressure rated upstream from controls, 160 psi (1.10 MPa) downstream; solvent welded sockets. B. Fittings: Type and style of connection to match pipe. C. Pipe Risers at Valves: 160 psi (1.10 mPa) PVC pipe. D. Solvent Cement: ASTM D 2564 for PVC pipe and fittings. E. Sleeve Material: PVC. 2.03 OUTLETS A. Outlets: Brass construction. B. Rotary Type Sprinkler Head: Fixed type with screens; fully adjustable for flow and pressure; size as indicated; with letter or symbol designating degree of arc and arrow indicating center of spray pattern. C. Spray Type Sprinkler Head: Pop -Up head with half circle pattern. 2.04 VALVES A. Gate Valves: Bronze construction non -rising stem. 2.05 CONTROLS A. Controller: Automatic controller, microprocessor solid state control with visible readout display, temporary override feature to bypass cycle for inclement weather, timer for a 4 station system, programmable for 7 days in quarter hour increments, with automatic start and shutdown. B. Controller Housing: NEMA 250 Type 3; weatherproof, watertight, with lockable access door. C. Valves: Electric Solenoid; normally open; wiring, including required fittings and accessories. D. Wire Conductors: Color coded. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 PREPARATION A. Piping layout indicated is diagrammatic only. Route piping to avoid plants, ground cover, and structures. B. Layout and stake locations of system components. C. Review layout requirements with other affected work. Coordinate locations of sleeves under paving to accommodate system. 3.02 TRENCHING A. Trench and backfill in accordance with Section 02315 and Section 02316. 07128 / Navarro West Center 02810 - 2 IRRIGATION SYSTEM Navarro West Center Welbourne Drive and Navarro Drive For Permit and Pricing March 12th, 2008 B. Trench to accommodate grade changes and slope to drains. C. Maintain trenches free of debris, material, or obstructions that may damage pipe. 3.03 INSTALLATION A. Install pipe, valves, controls, and outlets in accordance with manufacturer's instructions. B. Connect to utilities. C. Set outlets and box covers at finish grade elevations. D. Provide for thermal movement of components in system. E. Use threaded nipples for risers to each outlet. F. Install control wiring in accordance with Section 16123. Provide 10 inch (250 mm) expansion coil at each valve to which controls are connected, and at 100 ft (30 m) intervals. Bury wiring beside pipe. G. Mark valves with neoprene valve markers containing locking device. Set valve markers in pipe risers extending from top of valve to finish grade. H. After piping is installed, but before outlets are installed and backfilling commences, open valves and flush system with full head of water. 3.04 BACKFILLING A. Provide 3 inch (75 mm) sand cover over piping. B. Backfill trench and compact to specified subgrade elevation. Protect piping from displacement. 3.05 ADJUSTING A. Adjust control system to achieve time cycles required. B. Adjust head types for full water coverage as directed. 3.06 DEMONSTRATION A. Instruct Owner's personnel in operation and maintenance of system, including adjusting of sprinkler heads. Use operation and maintenance material as basis for demonstration. END OF SECTION 07128 / Navarro West Center 02810 - 3 IRRIGATION SYSTEM Navarro West Center Welbourne Drive and Navarro Drive SECTION 02843 PARKING BUMPERS For Permit and Pricing March 12th, 200$ PART1 GENERAL 1.01 SECTION INCLUDES A. Precast concrete parking bumpers and anchorage. 1.02 REFERENCES A. ASTM A 615/A 615M - Standard Specification for Deformed and Plain Billet -Steel Bars for Concrete Reinforcement; 2007. B. ASTM C 33 - Standard Specification for Concrete Aggregates; 2003. C. ASTM C 150 - Standard Specification for Portland Cement; 2005. D. ASTM C 260 - Standard Specification for Air -Entraining Admixtures for Concrete; 2006. PART2 PRODUCTS 2.01 MATERIALS A. Parking Bumpers: Precast concrete, conforming to the following: 1. Cement: ASTM C 150, Portland Type I - Normal; white color. 2. Concrete Materials: ASTM C 33 aggregate, water, and sand. 3. Reinforcing Steel: ASTM A 615/A 615M, deformed steel bars; unfinished finish, strength and size commensurate with precast unit design. 4. Air Entrainment Admixture: ASTM C 260. 5. Concrete Mix: Minimum 5000 psi (34 MPa), 28 day strength, air entrained to 5 to 7 percent. 6. Use rigid molds, constructed to maintain precast units uniform in shape, size and finish. Maintain consistent quality during manufacture. 7. Embed reinforcing steel, and drill or sleeve for two dowels. 8. Cure units to develop concrete quality, and to minimize appearance blemishes such as non -uniformity, staining, or surface cracking. 9. Minor patching in plant is acceptable, providing appearance of units is not impaired. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01. INSTALLATION A. Install units without damage to shape or finish. Replace or repair damaged units. B. Install units in alignment with adjacent work. C. Fasten units in place with 2 dowels per unit. END OF SECTION 07128 / Navarro West Center 02843 - 1 PARKING BUMPERS Navarro West Center Welbourne Drive and Navarro Drive SECTION 02871 BICYCLE RACKS For Permit and Pricing March 12th, 2008 PART1 GENERAL 1.01 SECTION INCLUDES A. Bicycle racks. 1.02 SUBMITTALS A. See Section 01300 - Administrative Requirements, for submittal procedures. B. Product Data: Manufacturer's data sheets on each product to be used, including: 1. Preparation instructions and recommendations. 2. Storage and handling requirements and recommendations. 3. Installation methods. C. Shop Drawings: Indicate size, shape, and dimensions, including clearances from adjacent walls, doors, and obstructions. 1.03 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND PROTECTION A. Store products in manufacturer's unopened packaging until ready for installation. B. Handle racks with sufficient care to prevent scratches and other damage to the finish. PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.01 MANUFACTURERS A. Bicycle Racks: 2.02 MATERIALS A. Bicycle Racks: Tubular steel pipe formed to allow at least one bicycle to lock simultaneously on each bend and each end, securing one wheel and part of the frame. 1. Style: Serpentine rack formed from a continuous "S." 2. Capacity: 5 bicycles. 3. Mounting: In -ground anchor. 4. Accessories: In -ground grout cover. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 EXAMINATION A. Examine surfaces to receive bicycle racks. B. If substrate preparation is the responsibility of another installer, notify Architect of unsatisfactory preparation before proceeding. C. Do not begin installation until unsatisfactory substrates have been properly repaired. 3.02 PREPARATION A. Ensure surfaces to receive bicycle racks are clean, flat, and level. 3.03 INSTALLATION A. Install in accordance with manufacturer's instructions. B. Install bicycle racks level, plumb, square, and correctly located as indicated on the drawings. C. In -Ground Anchor Installation: 07128 / Navarro West Center 02871 -1 BICYCLE RACKS Navarro West Center For Permit and Pricing Welbourne Drive and Navarro Drive March 12th, 2008 1. Prepare holes in size according to manufacturer's instructions. 2. Place anchoring bolts through the holes in the pipe. 3. Lower rack into holes, ensuring the bottom of lower bends are at least 1-1/2 inch (38 mm) from the ground. 4. Pour concrete and level rack. 5. Support until dry. 3.04 CLEANING AND PROTECTION A. Clean installed work to like -new condition. Do not use cleaning materials or methods that could damage finish. B. Protect installed products until completion of project. C. Touch-up, repair or replace damaged products before Substantial Completion. END OF SECTION 07128 / Navarro West Center 02871 - 2 BICYCLE RACKS Navarro West Center Welbourne Drive and Navarro Drive SECTION 02921 SEEDING For Permit and Pricing March 12th, 2008 PART1 GENERAL 1.01 SECTION INCLUDES A. Hydroseeding, mulching and fertilizer. 1.02 MAINTENANCE SERVICE A. Furnish maintenance of seeded areas for three months from Date of Substantial Completion. B. Maintain seeded areas immediately after placement until grass is well established and exhibits a vigorous growing condition. PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.01 SEED MIXTURE A. Seed Mixture: 1. Bermuda: percent. a. Submit percentage of seed with request to use in lieu of sodding as per plans 2. Perennial Rye: percent. a. Submit percentage of seed with request to use in lieu of sodding as per plans PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 EXAMINATION A. Verify that prepared soil base is ready to receive the work of this Section. 3.02 HYDROSEEDING A. Apply seeded slurry with a hydraulic seeder at a rate of _submit for approval_ Ibs per 1000 sq ft Kg per 1000 sq m) evenly in two intersecting directions. B. Do not hydroseed area in excess of that which can be mulched on same day. C. Immediately following seeding, apply mulch to a thickness of 1/8 inches (3 mm). Maintain clear of shrubs and trees. D. Apply water with a fine spray immediately after each area has been mulched. Saturate to 4 inches (100 mm) of soil. E. Following germination, immediately re -seed areas without germinated seeds that are larger than 4 by 4 inches (100 by 100 mm). END OF SECTION 07128 / Navarro West Center 02921 - 1 SEEDING Navarro West Center Welbourne Drive and Navarro Drive SECTION 02923 SODDING For Permit and Pricing March 12th, 2008 PART1 GENERAL 1.01 SECTION INCLUDES A. Fertilizing. B. Sod installation. 1.02 RELATED SECTIONS A. Section 02310 -Grading: Topsoil material. B. Section 02310 - Grading: Preparation of subsoil and placement of topsoil in preparation for the work of this section. 1.03 REFERENCES A. TPI (SPEC) - Guideline Specifications to Turfgrass Sodding; Turfgrass Producers International; 2006. 1.04 SUBMITTALS A. See Section 01300 - Administrative Requirements, for submittal procedures. B. Certification: Submit certification of grass species and location of sod source. 1.05 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Sod Producer: Company specializing in sod production and harvesting with minimum five years experience, and certified by the State of B. Installer Qualifications: Company approved by the sod producer. 1.06 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. Deliver sod on pallets. Protect exposed roots from dehydration. B. Do not deliver more sod than can be laid within 24 hours. PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.01 MATERIALS A. Sod: TPI, Certified Turfgrass Sod quality; cultivated grass sod; type indicated in plant schedule on Drawings; with strong fibrous root system, free of stones, burned or bare spots; containing no more than 5 weeds per 1000 sq ft (100 sq m). Minimum age of 18 months, with root development that will support its own weight without tearing, when suspended vertically by holding the upper two comers. 1. St. Augustine Grass Type: 100 percent. B. Fertilizer: granular type; recommended for grass, with fifty percent of the elements derived from organic sources; of proportion necessary to eliminate any deficiencies of topsoil, as indicated by analysis. C. Water: Clean, fresh and free of substances or matter which could inhibit vigorous growth of grass. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 FERTILIZING 1 07128 / Navarro West Center 02923 - 1 SODDING Navarro West Center Welbourne Drive and Navarro Drive For Permit and Pricing March 12th, 2008 A. Apply fertilizer in accordance with manufacturer's instructions. B. Apply after smooth raking of topsoil and prior to installation of sod. C. Apply fertilizer no more than 48 hours before laying sod. D. Mix thoroughly into upper 2 inches (50 mm) of topsoil. E. Lightly water to aid the dissipation of fertilizer. 3.02 LAYING SOD A. Moisten prepared surface immediately prior to laying sod. B. Lay sod immediately after delivery to site to prevent deterioration. C. Lay sod tight with no open joints visible, and no overlapping; stagger end joints 12 inches (300 mm) minimum. Do not stretch or overlap sod pieces. D. Lay smooth. Align with adjoining grass areas. E. Place top elevation of sod 1/2 inch (13 mm) below adjoining paving. F. Water sodded areas immediately after installation. Saturate sod to 4 inches (100 mm) of soil. G. After sod and soil have dried, roll sodded areas to ensure good bond between sod and soil and to remove minor depressions and irregularities. END OF SECTION 07128 / Navarro West Center 02923 - 2 SODDING Navarro West Center Welbourne Drive and Navarro Drive SECTION 02930 EXTERIOR PLANTS For Permit and Pricing March 12th, 2008 PART1 GENERAL 1.01 SECTION INCLUDES A. New plants and ground cover. B. Mulch and Fertilizer. 1.02 RELATED SECTIONS A. Section 02310 -Grading: Topsoil material. 1.03 SUBMITTALS A. See Section 01300 -Administrative Requirements, for submittal procedures. B. Maintenance Data: Include cutting and trimming method; types, application frequency, and recommended coverage of fertilizer. C. Submit list of plant life sources. 1.04 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Nursery Qualifications: Company specializing in growing and cultivating the plants with three years documented experience. B. Installer Qualifications: Company specializing in installing and planting the plants with three years experience. 1.05 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. Protect and maintain plant life until planted. B. Deliver plant life materials immediately prior to placement. Keep plants moist. 1.06 ENVIRONMENTAL REQUIREMENTS A. Do not install plant life when ambient temperatures may drop below 35 degrees F (2 degrees C) or rise above 90 degrees F (32 degrees C). B. Do not install plant life when wind velocity exceeds 30 mph (48 k/hr). PART2 PRODUCTS 2.01 TREES, PLANTS, AND GROUND COVER A. Plants and Ground Cover: Species and size identifiable in plant schedule, grown in climatic conditions similar to those in locality of the Work. 2.02 SOIL AMENDMENT MATERIALS A. Fertilizer: Containing fifty percent of the elements derived from organic sources; of proportion necessary to eliminate any deficiencies of topsoil, as indicated in analysis.. B. Peat Moss: Shredded, loose, sphagnum moss; free of lumps, roots, inorganic material or acidic materials; minimum of 85 percent organic material measured by oven dry weight, pH range of 4 to 5; moisture content of 30 percent. C. Water: Clean, fresh, and free of substances or matter which could inhibit vigorous growth of plants. 07128 / Navarro West Center 02930 - 1 EXTERIOR PLANTS 11 Navarro West Center Welbourne Drive and Navarro Drive For Permit and Pricing March 12th, 2008 2.03 MULCH MATERIALS A. Mulching Material: Pine species wood ground bark, free of growth or germination inhibiting ingredients. 2.04 ACCESSORIES A. Decorative Cover: Fir bark chips, 3/4 inch ( mm) minimum and 3 inch (_ mm) maximum size. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 EXAMINATION A. Verify that prepared subsoil and planters are ready to receive work. B. Saturate soil with water to test drainage. 3.02 PLANTING A. Place plants for best appearance. B. Set plants vertical. C. Remove non -biodegradable root containers. D. Set plants in pits or beds, partly filled with prepared plant mix, at a minimum depth of 6 inches (150 mm) under each plant. Remove burlap, ropes, and wires, from the root ball. E. Place bare root plant materials so roots lie in a natural position. Backfill soil mixture in 6 inch (150 mm) layers. Maintain plant life in vertical position. F. Saturate soil with water when the pit or bed is half full of topsoil and again when full. 3.03 INSTALLATION OF ACCESSORIES A. Place decorative cover and membrane, where indicated on drawings. END OF SECTION 07128 / Navarro West Center 02930 - 2 EXTERIOR PLANTS Navarro West Center Welbourne Drive and Navarro Drive SECTION 03300 CAST -IN -PLACE CONCRETE For Permit and Pricing March 12th, 2008 PART1 GENERAL 1.01 SECTION INCLUDES A. Concrete formwork. B. Floors and slabs on grade. C. Concrete reinforcement. D. Joint devices associated with concrete work. E. Miscellaneous concrete elements, including equipment pads, light pole bases, flagpole bases, thrust blocks, and manholes. F. Concrete curing. 1.02 RELATED SECTIONS A. Section 02751 - Portland Cement Concrete Paving: Sidewalks, curbs and gutters. B. Section 07900 - Joint Sealers. 1.03 REFERENCES A. ACI 211.1 - Standard Practice for Selecting Proportions for Normal, Heavyweight, and Mass Concrete; American Concrete Institute International; 1991 (Reapproved 2002). B. ACI 301 - Specifications for Structural Concrete for Buildings; American Concrete Institute International; 2005. C. ACI 302.1 R - Guide for Concrete Floor and Slab Construction; American Concrete Institute International; 2004. D. ACI 304R - Guide for Measuring, Mixing, Transporting, and Placing Concrete; American Concrete Institute International; 2000. E. ACI 305R - Hot Weather Concreting; American Concrete Institute International; 1999. F. ACI 306R - Cold Weather Concreting; American Concrete Institute International; 1988 (Reapproved 2002). G. ACI 308R - Guide to Curing Concrete; American Concrete Institute International; 2001. H. ACI 318 - Building Code Requirements for Structural Concrete and Commentary; American Concrete Institute International; 2005. I. ASTM A 185/A 185M - Standard Specification for Steel Welded Wire Reinforcement, Plain, for Concrete; 2006. J. ASTM A 615/A 615M - Standard Specification for Deformed and Plain Billet -Steel Bars for Concrete Reinforcement; 2007. K. ASTM C 33 - Standard Specification for Concrete Aggregates; 2003. L. ASTM C 39/C 39M - Standard Test Method for Compressive Strength of Cylindrical Concrete Specimens; 2005. M. ASTM C 94/C 94M - Standard Specification for Ready -Mixed Concrete; 2007. N. ASTM C 143/C 143M - Standard Test Method for Slump of Hydraulic -Cement Concrete; 2005a. 07128 / Navarro West Center 03300 - 1 CAST -IN -PLACE CONCRETE Navarro West Center For Permit and Pricing Welbourne Drive and Navarro Drive March 12th, 2008 O. ASTM C 150 - Standard Specification for Portland Cement; 2005. P. ASTM C 171 - Standard Specification for Sheet Materials for Curing Concrete; 2003. Q. ASTM C 173/C 173M - Standard Test Method for Air Content of Freshly Mixed Concrete by the Volumetric Method; 2001. R. ASTM C 260 - Standard Specification for Air -Entraining Admixtures for Concrete; 2006. S. ASTM C 309 - Standard Specification for Liquid Membrane -Forming Compounds for Curing Concrete; 2006. T. ASTM C 618 - Standard Specification for Coal Fly Ash and Raw or Calcined Natural Pozzolan for Use in Concrete; 2005. 1.04 SUBMITTALS A. See Section 01300 - Administrative Requirements, for submittal procedures. B. Product Data: Submit manufacturers' data on manufactured products showing compliance with specified requirements. C. Project Record Documents: Accurately record actual locations of embedded utilities and components that will be concealed from view upon completion of concrete work. 1.05 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Perform work of this section in accordance with ACI 301 and ACI 318. B. Follow recommendations of ACI 305R when concreting during hot weather. C. Follow recommendations of ACI 306R when concreting during cold weather. PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.01 FORMWORK A. Form Materials: Contractor's choice of standard products with sufficient strength to withstand hydrostatic head without distortion in excess of permitted tolerances. 1. Form Facing for Exposed Finish Concrete: Contractor's choice of materials that will provide smooth, stain -free final appearance. 2. Form Coating: Release agent that will not adversely affect concrete or interfere with application of coatings. 3. Form Ties: Cone snap type that will leave no metal within 1-1/2 inches (38 mm) of concrete surface. 2.02 . REINFORCEMENT A. Reinforcing Steel: ASTM A 615/A 615M Grade 60 (420). 1. Type: Deformed billet -steel bars. 2. Finish: Unfinished, unless otherwise indicated. B. Steel Welded Wire Reinforcement: ASTM A 185/A 185M, plain type. 1. Form: Coiled Rolls. 2. Mesh Size: 6 x 6 (150 x 150). C. Reinforcement Accessories: 1. Tie Wire: Annealed, minimum 16 gage (1.5 mm). 2. Chairs, Bolsters, Bar Supports, Spacers: Sized and shaped for adequate support of reinforcement during concrete placement. 07128 / Navarro West Center 03300 - 2 CAST -IN -PLACE CONCRETE ' Navarro West Center Welbourne Drive and Navarro Drive For Permit and Pricing March 12th, 2008 3. Provide stainless steel, galvanized, plastic, or plastic coated steel components for placement within 1-1/2 inches (38 mm) of weathering surfaces. 2.03 CONCRETE MATERIALS A. Cement: ASTM C 150, Type I - Normal portland type. B. Fine and Coarse Aggregates: ASTM C 33. C. Fly Ash: ASTM C 618, Class C or F. D. Water: Clean and not detrimental to concrete. 2.04 CHEMICAL ADMIXTURES A. Do not use chemicals that will result in soluble chloride ions in excess of 0.1 percent by weight of cement. B. Air Entrainment Admixture: ASTM C 260. 2.05 ACCESSORY MATERIALS A. Moisture -Retaining Cover: ASTM C 171; regular curing paper, white curing paper, clear polyethylene, white polyethylene, or white burlap -polyethylene sheet. B. Liquid Curing Compound: ASTM C 309, Type 1, clear or translucent. 2.06 BONDING AND JOINTING PRODUCTS A. Joint Filler: Nonextruding, resilient asphalt impregnated fiberboard or felt, 1/4 inch (6 mm) thick and 4 inches (200 mm) deep; tongue and groove profile. 2.07 CONCRETE MIX DESIGN A. Proportioning Normal Weight Concrete: Comply with ACI 211.1 recommendations. B. Admixtures: Add acceptable admixtures as recommended in ACI 211.1 and at rates recommended by manufacturer. C. Normal Weight Concrete: 1. Compressive Strength, when tested in accordance with ASTM C 39/C 39M at 28 days: 3,000 psi (20.7 MPa). 2. Fly Ash Content: Maximum 15 percent of cementitious materials by weight. 3. Water -Cement Ratio: Maximum 40 percent by weight. 4. Total Air Content: 4 percent, determined in accordance with ASTM C 173/C 173M. 5. Maximum Slump: 3 inches (75 mm). t 2.08 MIXING A. Transit Mixers: Comply with ASTM C 94/C 94M. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 PREPARATION A. Formwork: Comply with requirements of ACI 301. Design and fabricate forms to support all applied loads until concrete is cured, and for easy removal without damage to concrete. B. Verify that forms are clean and free of rust before applying release agent. C. Coordinate placement of embedded items with erection of concrete formwork and placement of form accessories. 3.02 INSTALLING REINFORCEMENT 1 07128 / Navarro West Center 03300 - 3 CAST -IN -PLACE CONCRETE t Navarro West Center Welbourne Drive and Navarro Drive For Permit and Pricing March 12th, 2008 A. Comply with requirements of ACI 301. Clean reinforcement of loose rust and mill scale, and accurately position, support, and secure in place to achieve not less than minimum concrete coverage required for protection. B. Install welded wire reinforcement in maximum possible lengths, and offset end laps in both directions. Splice laps with tie wire. 3.03 PLACING CONCRETE A. Place concrete in accordance with ACI 304R. B. Place concrete for floor slabs in accordance with ACI 302.1 R. C. Notify Architect not less than 24 hours prior to commencement of placement operations. D. Ensure reinforcement, inserts, embedded parts, and formed construction joint devices will not be disturbed during concrete placement. E. Separate slabs on grade from vertical surfaces with joint filler. F. Place joint filler in floor slab pattern placement sequence. Set top to required elevations. Secure to resist movement by wet concrete. G. Extend joint filler from bottom of slab to within 1/2 inch (13 mm) of finished slab surface. Conform to Section 07900 for finish joint sealer requirements. H. Install joint devices in accordance with manufacturer's instructions. I. Maintain records of concrete placement. Record date, location, quantity, air temperature, and test samples taken. J. Place concrete continuously between predetermined expansion, control, and construction joints. K. Do not interrupt successive placement; do not permit cold joints to occur. L. Saw cut joints within 24 hours after placing. Use 3/16 inch (5 mm) thick blade, cut into 1/4 depth of slab thickness. M. Screed floors level, maintaining surface flatness of maximum 1/4 inch in 10 ft (6 mm /3 m). 3.04 CONCRETE FINISHING A. Repair surface defects, including tie holes, immediately after removing formwork. B. Unexposed Form Finish: Rub down or chip off fins or other raised areas 1/4 inch (6 mm) or more in height. C. Concrete Slabs: Finish to requirements of ACI 302.1 R, and as follows: 1. Steel trowel surfaces that will receive carpeting, resilient flooring, seamless flooring, thin set quarry tile, and thin set ceramic tile. 2. Steel trowel surfaces that will be left exposed. 3.05 CURING AND PROTECTION A. Comply with requirements of ACI 308. Immediately after placement, protect concrete from premature drying, excessively hot or cold temperatures, and mechanical injury. B. Maintain concrete with minimal moisture loss at relatively constant temperature for period necessary for hydration of cement and hardening of concrete. 1. Normal concrete: Not less than 7 days. C. Surfaces Not in Contact with Forms: 07128 / Navarro West Center 03300 - 4 CAST -IN -PLACE CONCRETE ' Navarro West Center For Permit and Pricing Welbourne Drive and Navarro Drive March 12th, 2008 ' 1. Start initial curing as soon as free water has disappeared and before surface is dry. Keep continuously moist for not less than three days by water ponding, water -saturated sand, water -fog spray, or saturated burlap. 2. Begin final curing after initial curing but before surface is dry. a. Moisture -retaining cover: Seal in place with waterproof tape or adhesive. ' b. Curing compound: Apply in two coats at right angles, using application rate recommended by manufacturer. 3.06 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL A. An independent testing agency will perform field quality control tests, as specified in Section 01400. 1 B. Provide free access to concrete operations at project site and cooperate with appointed firm. C. Submit proposed mix design of each class of concrete to inspection and testing firm for review prior to commencement of concrete operations. ' D. Tests of concrete and concrete materials may be performed at any time to ensure conformance with specified requirements. E. Compressive Strength Tests: ASTM C 39/C 39M. For each test, mold and cure three concrete test cylinders. Obtain test samples for every 100 cu yd (76 cu m) or less of each class of concrete placed. F. Take one additional test cylinder during cold weather concreting, cured on job site under same conditions as concrete it represents. G. Perform one slump test for each set of test cylinders taken, following procedures of ASTM C ' 143/C 143M. 3.07 DEFECTIVE CONCRETE A. Test Results: The testing agency shall report test results in writing to Architect and Contractor within 24 hours of test. B. Defective Concrete: Concrete not conforming to required lines, details, dimensions, tolerances ' or specified requirements. C. Repair or replacement of defective concrete will be determined by the Architect. The cost of additional testing shall be bome by Contractor when defective concrete is identified. ' D. Do not patch, fill, touch-up, repair, or replace exposed concrete except upon express direction of Architect for each individual area. END OF SECTION 07128 / Navarro West Center 03300 - 5 CAST -IN -PLACE CONCRETE Navarro West Center Welbourne Drive and Navarro Drive SECTION 04720 CAST STONE For Permit and Pricing March 12th, 2008 PART1 GENERAL 1.01 SECTION INCLUDES A. Architectural cast stone. B. Units required are: 1. Exterior wall units, including wall caps, coping, and sills. 1.02 RELATED SECTIONS A. Section 04810 - Unit Masonry Assemblies: Installation of cast stone in conjunction with masonry. B. Section 07900 - Joint Sealers: Materials and execution methods for sealing soft joints in cast stone work. 1.03 REFERENCES A. ACI 318 - Building Code Requirements for Structural Concrete and Commentary; American Concrete Institute International; 2005. B. ASTM A 185/A 185M - Standard Specification for Steel Welded Wire Reinforcement, Plain, for Concrete; 2006. C. ASTM A 615/A 615M - Standard Specification for Deformed and Plain Billet -Steel Bars for Concrete Reinforcement; 2007. D. ASTM C 33 - Standard Specification for Concrete Aggregates; 2003. E. ASTM C 150 - Standard Specification for Portland Cement; 2005. F. ASTM C 270 - Standard Specification for Mortar for Unit Masonry; 2007. G. ASTM C 494/C 494M - Standard Specification for Chemical Admixtures for Concrete; 2005a. H. ASTM C 1364 - Standard Specification for Architectural Cast Stone; 2006. 1.04 SUBMITTALS A. See Section 01300 -Administrative Requirements, for submittal procedures. B. Mortar Color Selection Samples. C. Full -Size Samples: One unit of each shape, for review. PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.01 MANUFACTURERS A. Architectural Cast Stone: 1. Any current producer member of the Cast Stone Institute. 2.02 ARCHITECTURAL CAST STONE A. Cast Stone: Architectural concrete product manufactured to simulate appearance of natural granite, complying with ASTM C 1364. 1. Compressive Strength: As specified in ASTM C 1364; calculate strength of pieces to be field cut at 80 percent of uncut piece. 2. Freeze -Thaw Resistance: Demonstrated by field experience. 07128 / Navarro West Center 04720 - 1 CAST STONE Navarro West Center Welboume Drive and Navarro Drive For Permit and Pricing March 12th, 2008 3. Surface Texture: Fine grained texture, with no bugholes, air voids, or other surface blemishes visible from distance of 20 feet (6 meters). 4. Remove cement film from exposed surfaces before packaging for shipment. B. Shapes: Provide shapes indicated on drawings. 1. Variation from Any Dimension, Including Bow, Camber, and Twist: Maximum of plus/minus 1/8 inch (3 mm) or length divided by 360, whichever is greater, but not more than 1/4 inch (6 mm). 2. Unless otherwise indicated on drawings, provide: a. Wash or slope of 1:12 on exterior horizontal surfaces. b. Drips on projecting components, wherever possible. c. Raised fillets at back of sills and at ends to be built in. C. Reinforcement: Provide reinforcement as required to withstand handling and structural stresses; comply with ACI 318. 2.03 MATERIALS A. Portland Cement: ASTM C 150. 1. For Mortar: Type I or 11, except Type III may be used in cold weather. B. Coarse Aggregate: ASTM C 33, except for gradation; granite, quartz, or limestone. C. Fine Aggregate: ASTM C 33, except for gradation; natural or manufactured sands. D. Admixtures: ASTM C 494/C 494M. E. Water: Potable. F. Reinforcing Bars: ASTM A 615/A 615M deformed bars, galvanized or epoxy coated. G. Steel Welded Wire Reinforcement: ASTM A 185/A 185M, galvanized or epoxy coated. H. Embedded Anchors, Dowels, and Inserts: Type 304 stainless steel, of type and size as required for conditions. I. Mortar: Portland cement -lime, ASTM C 270, Type N; do not use masonry cement. J. Sealant: As specified in Section 07900. K. Cleaner: General-purpose cleaner designed for removing mortar and grout stains, efflorescence, and other construction stains from new masonry surfaces without discoloring, or damaging masonry surfaces; approved for intended use by cast stone manufacturer and by cleaner manufacturer for use on cast stone and adjacent masonry materials. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 INSTALLATION A. Install cast stone components in conjunction with masonry, complying with requirements of Section 04810. B. Mechanically anchor cast stone units indicated; set remainder in mortar. C. Setting: 1. Drench cast stone components with clear, running water immediately before installation. 2. Set units in a full bed of mortar unless otherwise indicated. 3. Fill vertical joints with mortar. 4. Fill dowel holes and anchor slots completely with mortar or non -shrink grout. D. Joints: Make all joints 3/8 inch (9.5 mm), except as otherwise detailed. t 07128 / Navarro West Center 04720 - 2 CAST STONE Navarro West Center Welbourne Drive and Navarro Drive For Permit and Pricing March 12th, 2008 1. Rake mortar joints 3/4 inch (19 mm) for pointing. Scrub face of each stone to remove excess mortar before it sets. 2. Point joints with mortar in layers 3/8 inch (9.5 mm) thick and tool to a slight concave profile. 3. Leave the following joints open for sealant: a. Head joints in top courses, including copings, parapets, cornices, sills, and steps. b. Joints in projecting units. c. Joints between rigidly anchored units, including soffits, panels, and column covers. d. Joints below lugged sills and stair treads. e. Joints below ledge and relieving angles. f. Joints labeled "expansion joint". E. Sealant Joints: Install sealants as specified in Section 07900. 3.02 CLEANING AND PROTECTION A. Repair chips and other surface damage noticeable when viewed in direct daylight at 20 feet (6 m). 1. Repair with matching touchup material provided by the manufacturer and in accordance with manufacturer's instructions. 2. Repair methods and results subject to Architect's approval. B. Protect from splashing by mortar and other damage. END OF SECTION 07128 / Navarro West Center 04720 - 3 CAST STONE Navarro West Center Welbourne Drive and Navarro Drive SECTION 04810 UNIT MASONRY ASSEMBLIES For Permit and Pricing March 12th, 2008 PART1 GENERAL 1.01 SECTION INCLUDES A. Concrete Block. B. Reinforcement and Anchorage. C. Flashings. 1.02 RELATED SECTIONS A. Section 03200 - Concrete Reinforcement: Reinforcing steel for grouted masonry. B. Section 07900 - Joint Sealers: Backing rod and sealant at control and expansion joints. 1.03 REFERENCES A. ASTM A 82/A 82M - Standard Specification for Steel Wire, Plain, for Concrete Reinforcement; 2005a. B. ASTM A 641/A 641 M - Standard Specification for Zinc -Coated (Galvanized) Carbon Steel Wire; 2003. ' C. ASTM A 653/A 653M - Standard Specification for Steel Sheet, Zinc -Coated (Galvanized) or Zinc -Iron Alloy -Coated (Galvannealed) by the Hot -Dip Process; 2006a. D. ASTM C 270 - Standard Specification for Mortar for Unit Masonry; 2007. E. ASTM C 476 - Standard Specification for Grout for Masonry; 2002. 1.04 SUBMITTALS A. See Section 01300 - Administrative Requirements, for submittal procedures. B. Samples: Submit _2_ samples of decorative block units to illustrate color, texture, and extremes of color range. 1.05 MOCK-UP A. Construct a masonry wall as a mock-up panel sized 4 feet (_ m) long by _4_ feet (_ m) high, which includes mortar and accessories and structural backup. 1.06 EXTRA MATERIALS A. See Section 01600 -Product Requirements, for additional provisions. B. Provide _20_ of each size, color, and type of pre -faced units for Owner's use in maintenance of project. PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.01 CONCRETE MASONRY UNITS A. Concrete Block: Comply with referenced standards and as follows: 2.02 REINFORCEMENT AND ANCHORAGE A. Manufacturers of Joint Reinforcement and Anchors: 1. Dur-O-Wal: www.dur-o-wal.com. 2. Hohmann & Barnard, Inc: www.h-b.com. 07128 / Navarro West Center 04810 - 1 UNIT MASONRY ASSEMBLIES Navarro West Center For Permit and Pricing Welboume Drive and Navarro Drive March 12th, 2008 3. Masonry Reinforcing Corporation of America: www.wirebond.com. 4. Substitutions: See Section 01600 - Product Requirements. B. Reinforcing Steel: Type specified in Section 03200; size as indicated on drawings; galvanized finish. C. Single Wythe Joint Reinforcement: Truss type; ASTM A 82/A 82M steel wire, mill galvanized to ASTM A 641/A 641 M, Class 3; 0.1483 inch (3.8 mm) side rods with 0.1483 inch (3.8 mm) cross rods; width as required to provide not more than 1 inch (25 mm) and not less than 1/2 inch (13 mm) of mortar coverage on each exposure. 2.03 FLASHINGS A. Rubberized Asphalt Flashing: Self -adhering polymer -modified asphalt sheet; 0.030 inch (0.75 mm) total thickness; with cross -linked polyethylene top and bottom surfaces. B. Pre -Coated Galvanized Steel: ASTM A 653/A 653M, with G90/Z275 coating, 24 gage (0.61 mm) total thickness, shop precoated with fluoropolymer coating in color matching masonry. C. Lap Sealant: Butyl type as specified in Section 07900. 2.04 MORTAR AND GROUT MIXES A. Mortar for Unit Masonry: ASTM C 270, using the Proportion Specification. 1. Masonry below grade and in contact with earth: Type S. 2. Exterior, loadbearing masonry: Type N. 3. Exterior, non-loadbearing masonry: Type N. B. Colored Mortar: Proportion selected pigments and other ingredients to match Architect's sample, without exceeding manufacturer's recommended pigment -to -cement ratio. C. Grout: ASTM C 476. Consistency required to fill completely volumes indicated for grouting; fine grout for spaces with smallest horizontal dimension of 2 inches (50 mm) or less; coarse grout for spaces with smallest horizontal dimension greater than 2 inches (50 mm). D. Mixing: Use mechanical batch mixer and comply with referenced standards. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 EXAMINATION A. Verify that field conditions are acceptable and are ready to receive masonry. B. Verify that related items provided under other sections are properly sized and located. C. Verify that built-in items are in proper location, and ready for roughing into masonry work. 3.02 PREPARATION A. Direct and coordinate placement of metal anchors supplied for installation under other sections. B. Provide temporary bracing during installation of masonry work. Maintain in place until building structure provides permanent bracing. 3.03 COURSING A. Establish lines, levels, and coursing indicated. Protect from displacement. B. Maintain masonry courses to uniform dimension. Form vertical and horizontal joints of uniform thickness. C. Concrete Masonry Units: 1. Bond: Running. 2. Mortar Joints: Concave. 07128 / Navarro West Center 04810 - 2 UNIT MASONRY ASSEMBLIES ' Navarro West Center For Permit and Pricing Welbourne Drive and Navarro Drive March 12th, 2008 3.04 WEEPS/CAVITY VENTS A. Install weeps in veneer and cavity walls at 24 inches (600 mm) on center horizontally above through -wall flashing, above shelf angles and lintels, and at bottom of walls. 3.05 CAVITY MORTAR CONTROL A. Do not permit mortar to drop or accumulate into cavity air space or to plug weep/cavity vents. B. Install cavity mortar diverter at base of cavity and at other flashing locations as recommended by manufacturer to prevent mortar droppings from blocking weep/cavity vents. 3.06 REINFORCEMENT AND ANCHORAGE - GENERAL A. Unless otherwise indicated on drawings or specified under specific wall type, install horizontal joint reinforcement 16 inches (400 mm) on center. B. Place masonry joint reinforcement in first and second horizontal joints above and below openings. Extend minimum 16 inches (400 mm) each side of opening. C. Place continuous joint reinforcement in first and second joint below top of walls. D. Lap joint reinforcement ends minimum 6 inches (150 mm). iE. Reinforce stack bonded unit joint comers and intersections with strap anchors 16 inches (400 mm) on center. 3.07 MASONRY FLASHINGS A. Whether or not specifically indicated, install masonry flashing to divert water to exterior at all locations where downward flow of water will be interrupted. B. Extend plastic, laminated, and EPDM flashings to within 1/4 inch (6 mm) of exterior face of masonry. 3.08 CONTROL AND EXPANSION JOINTS A. Do not continue horizontal joint reinforcement through control and expansion joints. B. Size control joint in accordance with Section 07900 for sealant performance. 3.09 BUILT-IN WORK A. As work progresses, install built-in metal door frames and other items to be built into the work ' and furnished under other sections. B. Install built-in items plumb, level, and true to line. C. Bed anchors of metal door and glazed frames in adjacent mortar joints. Fill frame voids solid with grout. 1. Fill adjacent masonry cores with grout minimum 12 inches (300 mm) from framed openings. D. Do not build into masonry construction organic materials that are subject to deterioration. 3.10 CLEANING A. Remove excess mortar and mortar droppings. B. Clean soiled surfaces with cleaning solution. 3.11 PROTECTION OF FINISHED WORK A. Without damaging completed work, provide protective boards at exposed external corners which are subject to damage by construction activities. 07128 / Navarro West Center 04810 - 3 UNIT MASONRY ASSEMBLIES Navarro West Center Welbourne Drive and Navarro Drive END OF SECTION For Permit and Pricing March 12th, 2008 07128 / Navarro West Center 04810 - 4 UNIT MASONRY ASSEMBLIES Navarro West Center Welbourne Drive and Navarro Drive SECTION 04816 MASONRY VENEER For Permit and Pricing March 12th, 2008 PART1 GENERAL 1.01 SECTION INCLUDES A. Clay Facing Brick. B. Mortar and Grout. C. Reinforcement and Anchorage. D. Flashings. E. Installation of Lintels. F. Accessories. 1.02 RELATED SECTIONS A. Section 05400 - Cold Formed Metal Framing: Steel stud backup for masonry veneer. B. Section 05500 - Metal Fabrications: Loose steel lintels. C. Section 07900 - Joint Sealers: Backing rod and sealant at control and expansion joints. 1.03 REFERENCES A. ASTM A 82/A 82M - Standard Specification for Steel Wire, Plain, for Concrete Reinforcement; 2005a. B. ASTM A 153/A 153M - Standard Specification for Zinc Coating (Hot -Dip) on Iron and Steel Hardware; 2005. C. ASTM A 653/A 653M - Standard Specification for Steel Sheet, Zinc -Coated (Galvanized) or Zinc -Iron Alloy -Coated (Galvannealed) by the Hot -Dip Process; 2006a. D. ASTM C 144 - Standard Specification for Aggregate for Masonry Mortar; 2004. E. ASTM C 150 - Standard Specification for Portland Cement; 2005. F. ASTM C 207 - Standard Specification for Hydrated Lime for Masonry Purposes; 2006. G. ASTM C 216 - Standard Specification for Facing Brick (Solid Masonry Units Made From Clay or Shale); 2007. H. ASTM C 270 - Standard Specification for Mortar for Unit Masonry; 2007. I. ASTM C 979 - Standard Specification for Pigments for Integrally Colored Concrete; 2005. J. ASTM D 226 - Standard Specification for Asphalt -Saturated Organic Felt Used in Roofing and Waterproofing; 2006. 1.04 SUBMITTALS A. See Section 01300 -Administrative Requirements, for submittal procedures. B. Samples: Submit four samples of facing brick units to illustrate color, texture, and extremes of color range. C. Manufacturer's Certificate: Certify that masonry units meet or exceed specified requirements. 1.05 MOCK-UP 07128 / Navarro West Center 04816 - 1 MASONRY VENEER Navarro West Center Welbourne Drive and Navarro Drive For Permit and Pricing March 12th, 2008 A. Construct a masonry wall as a mock-up panel sized 4 feet (— m) long by 4 feet (— m) high, which includes mortar and accessories, structural backup, wall openings, and (lashings. 1.06 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. Deliver, handle, and store masonry units by means that will prevent mechanical damage and contamination by other materials. 1.07 ENVIRONMENTAL REQUIREMENTS A. Maintain materials and surrounding air temperature to minimum 40 degrees F (5 degrees C) prior to, during, and 48 hours after completion of masonry work. B. Maintain materials and surrounding air temperature to maximum 90 degrees F (32 degrees C) prior to, during, and 48 hours after completion of masonry work. 1.08 EXTRA MATERIALS A. See Section 01600 -Product Requirements, for additional provisions. B. Provide 25 of each size, color, and type of face brick units for Owner's use in maintenance of project. PART2 PRODUCTS 2.01 BRICK UNITS A. Facing Brick: ASTM C 216, Type FBS, Grade SW. 1. Color and texture to match Architect's sample. 2. Actual size: As indicated on drawings. 3. Special shapes: Molded units as required by conditions indicated, unless standard units can be sawn to produce equivalent effect. 2.02 MORTAR MATERIALS A. Portland Cement: ASTM C 150, Type I; color as required to produce approved color sample. B. Hydrated Lime: ASTM C 207, Type S. C. Mortar Aggregate: ASTM C 144. D. Pigments for Colored Mortar: Pure, concentrated mineral pigments specifically intended for mixing into mortar and complying with ASTM C 979. E. Water: Clean and potable. F. Accelerating Admixture: Nonchloride type for use in cold weather. 2.03 REINFORCEMENT AND ANCHORAGE A. Joint Reinforcement: Truss type; ASTM A 82/A 82M steel wire, hot dip galvanized after fabrication to ASTM A 153/A 153M, Class B; 0.1483 inch (3.8 mm) side rods with 0.1483 inch (3.8 mm) cross rods; width as required to provide not more than 1 inch (25 mm) and not less than 1/2 inch (13 mm) of mortar coverage on each exposure. 1. Manufacturers: a. Dur-O-Wal: www.dur-o-wal.com. b. Hohmann & Barnard, Inc: www.h-b.com. c. Masonry Reinforcing Corporation of America: www.wirebond.com. d. Substitutions: See Section 01600 - Product Requirements. B. Masonry Veneer Anchors: 2-piece anchors that permit differential movement between masonry veneer and structural backup, hot dip galvanized to ASTM A 153/A 153M, Class B. 07128 / Navarro West Center 04816 - 2 MASONRY VENEER Navarro West Center Welbourne Drive and Navarro Drive For Permit and Pricing March 12th, 2008 1. Anchor plates: Not less than 0.075 inch (1.91 mm) thick, designed for fastening to structural backup through sheathing by two fasteners; provide design with legs that penetrate sheathing and insulation to provide positive anchorage. 2. Wire ties: Manufacturer's standard shape, 0.1875 inch (4.75 mm) thick. 3. Vertical adjustment: Not less than 3-1/2 inches (89 mm). 2.04 FLASHINGS A. Rubberized Asphalt Flashing: Self -adhering composite material comprising rubberized asphalt adhesive compound bonded to cross -laminated polyethylene film, minimum 0.030 inch (0.75 mm) total thickness. Provide manufactured by B. Pre -Coated Galvanized Steel: ASTM A 653/A 653M, with G90/Z275 coating, total thickness, shop precoated with fluoropolymer coating in color matching masonry. C. Lap Sealant: Butyl type as specified in Section 07900. 2.05 ACCESSORIES A. Preformed Control Joints: Rubber material. Provide with corner and tee accessories, fused joints. B. Building Paper: ASTM D 226, Type I ("No. 15") asphalt felt. C. Weeps: Polyester mesh. D. Cavity Mortar Diverter: Semi -rigid polyethylene or polyester mesh blocks, sized to fill bottom of wall cavity and suspend mortar droppings above weep/cavity vents to allow cavity drainage. E. Cleaning Solution: Non -acidic, not harmful to masonry work or adjacent materials. 2.06 MORTAR AND GROUT MIXES A. Mortar for Unit Masonry: ASTM C 270, Proportion Specification. 1. Masonry below grade and in contact with earth: Type S. 2. Exterior, non-loadbearing masonry: Type N. B. Colored Mortar: Proportion selected pigments and other ingredients to match Architect's sample, without exceeding manufacturer's recommended pigment -to -cement ratio. C. Mixing: Use mechanical batch mixer and comply with referenced standards. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 EXAMINATION A. Verify that field conditions are acceptable and are ready to receive masonry. B. Verify that related items provided under other sections are properly sized and located. C. Verify that built-in items are in proper location, and ready for roughing into masonry work. 3.02 COURSING A. Establish lines, levels, and coursing indicated. Protect from displacement. B. Maintain masonry courses to uniform dimension. Form vertical and horizontal joints of uniform thickness. C. Brick Units: 1. Bond: As indicated for different locations. 2. Coursing: Three units and three mortar joints to equal 8 inches (200 mm). 3. Mortar Joints: Concave. 07128 / Navarro West Center 04816 - 3 MASONRY VENEER Navarro West Center Welbourne Drive and Navarro Drive 3.03 PLACING AND BONDING For Permit and Pricing March 12th, 2008 A. Lay solid masonry units in full bed of mortar, with full head joints, uniformly jointed with other work. B. Remove excess mortar as work progresses. C. Interlock intersections and external corners, except for units laid in stack bond. D. Do not shift or tap masonry units after mortar has achieved initial set. Where adjustment must be made, remove mortar and replace. E. Perform job site cutting of masonry units with proper tools to provide straight, clean, unchipped edges. Prevent broken masonry unit comers or edges. F. Isolate top joint of masonry veneer from horizontal structural framing members or support angles with compressible joint filler. 3.04 WEEPS/CAVITY VENTS A. Install weeps in veneer walls at 24 inches (600 mm) on center horizontally above through -wall flashing. B. Install cavity mortar diverter at base of cavity as recommended by manufacturer to prevent mortar droppings from blocking weep/cavity vents. C. Do not permit mortar to drop or accumulate into cavity air space or to plug weep/cavity vents. 3.05 REINFORCEMENT AND ANCHORAGE -MASONRY VENEER A. Place masonry joint reinforcement in first and second horizontal joints above and below openings. Extend minimum 16 inches (400 mm) each side of opening. B. Place continuous joint reinforcement in first and second joint below top of walls. C. Lap joint reinforcement ends minimum 6 inches (150 mm). D. Stud Back -Up: Secure veneer anchors to stud framed back-up and embed into masonry veneer at maximum 16 inches (400 mm) on center vertically and 24 inches (600 mm) on center horizontally. Place additional anchors at perimeter of openings and ends of panels, so maximum spacing of anchors is 8 (200 mm) inches on center. 3.06 MASONRY FLASHINGS A. Whether or not specifically indicated, install masonry flashing to divert water to exterior at all locations where downward flow of water will be interrupted. 1. Extend flashings full width at such interruptions and at least 4 inches (100 mm) into adjacent masonry or turn up at least 4 inches (100 mm) to form watertight pan at non -masonry construction. 2. Remove or cover protrusions or sharp edges that could puncture flashings. 3. Seal lapped ends and penetrations of flashing before covering with mortar. B. Extend metal flashings through exterior face of masonry and turn down to form drip. C. Extend plastic, laminated, and EPDM flashings to within 1/4 inch (6 mm) of exterior face of masonry. D. Lap end joints of flashings at least 4 inches (100 mm) and seal watertight with mastic or elastic sealant. 3.07 LINTELS 07128 / Navarro West Center 04816 - 4 MASONRY VENEER Navarro West Center Welbourne Drive and Navarro Drive For Permit and Pricing March 12th, 2008 A. Install loose steel lintels over openings. B. Maintain minimum 8 inch (— mm) bearing on each side of opening. 3.08 CONTROL AND EXPANSION JOINTS A. Do not continue horizontal joint reinforcement through control and expansion joints. B. Install preformed control joint device in continuous lengths. Seal butt and corner joints in accordance with manufacturer's instructions. C. Size control joint in accordance with Section 07900 for sealant performance. 3.09 CUTTING AND FITTING A. Cut and fit for pipes and conduit. Coordinate with other sections of work to provide correct size, shape, and location. B. Obtain approval prior to cutting or fitting masonry work not indicated or where appearance or strength of masonry work may be impaired. 3.10 CLEANING A. Remove excess mortar and mortar smears as work progresses. B. Replace defective mortar. Match adjacent work. C. Clean soiled surfaces with cleaning solution. D. Use non-metallic tools in cleaning operations. 3.11 PROTECTION OF FINISHED WORK A. Without damaging completed work, provide protective boards at exposed external comers that are subject to damage by construction activities. 07128 / Navarro West Center END OF SECTION 04816 - 5 MASONRY VENEER Navarro West Center Welbourne Drive and Navarro Drive SECTION 05120 STRUCTURAL STEEL For Permit and Pricing March 12th, 2008 PART1 GENERAL 1.01 SECTION INCLUDES A. Structural steel framing members, support members. B. Grouting under base plates. 1.02 RELATED SECTIONS A. Section 05210 - Steel Joists. B. Section 05310 - Steel Deck: Support framing for small openings in deck. 1.03 REFERENCES A. AISC (MAN) - Steel Construction Manual; American Institute of Steel Construction, Inc.; 2005. B. AISC S303 - Code of Standard Practice for Steel Buildings and Bridges; American Institute of Steel Construction, Inc.; 2005. C. AISC S348 - Specification for Structural Joints Using ASTM A325 or A490 Bolts; 2004. D. ASTM A 36/A 36M - Standard Specification for Carbon Structural Steel; 2005. E. ASTM A 53/A 53M - Standard Specification for Pipe, Steel, Black and Hot -Dipped, Zinc -Coated, Welded and Seamless; 2006a. F. ASTM A 153/A 153M - Standard Specification for Zinc Coating (Hot -Dip) on Iron and Steel Hardware; 2005. G. ASTM A 307 - Standard Specification for Carbon Steel Bolts and Studs, 60 000 PSI Tensile Strength; 2004. H. ASTM A 325 - Standard Specification for Structural Bolts, Steel, Heat Treated, 120/105 ksi Minimum Tensile Strength; 2006. I. ASTM A 325M - Standard Specification for Structural Bolts, Steel, Heat Treated 830 MPa Tensile Strength (Metric); 2005. J. ASTM A 500 - Standard Specification for Cold -Formed Welded and Seamless Carbon Steel Structural Tubing in Rounds and Shapes; 2003a. K. ASTM A 501 - Standard Specification for Hot -Formed Welded and Seamless Carbon Steel Structural Tubing; 2001 (Reapproved 2005). L. ASTM A 992/A 992M - Standard Specification for Structural Steel Shapes; 2006. M. ASTM C 1107/C 1107M - Standard Specification for Packaged Dry, Hydraulic -Cement Grout (Nonshrink); 2007. N. ASTM E 709 - Standard Guide for Magnetic Particle Examination; 2001. O. AWS A2.4 - Standard Symbols for Welding, Brazing, and Nondestructive Examination; American Welding Society; 2007. P. AWS D1.1/D1.1M - Structural Welding Code - Steel; American Welding Society; 2006. 1.04 SUBMITTALS A. See Section 01300 -Administrative Requirements, for submittal procedures. 07128 / Navarro West Center 05120 - 1 STRUCTURAL STEEL Navarro West Center Welbourne Drive and Navarro Drive For Permit and Pricing March 12th, 2008 B. Shop Drawings: 1. Indicate profiles, sizes, spacing, locations of structural members, openings, attachments, and fasteners. 2. Connections not detailed. 3. Indicate welded connections with AWS A2.4 welding symbols. Indicate net weld lengths. C. Manufacturer's Mill Certificate: Certify that products meet or exceed specified requirements. D. Welders Certificates: Certify welders employed on the Work, verifying AWS qualification within the previous 12 months. 1.05 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Fabricate structural steel members in accordance with AISC "Steel Construction Manual." B. Fabricator: Company specializing in performing the work of this section with minimum three years of documented experience. C. Erector: Company specializing in performing the work of this section with minimum three years of documented experience. D. Design connections not detailed on the drawings under direct supervision of a Professional Structural Engineer experienced in design of this work and licensed in Texas. PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.01 MATERIALS A. Steel Angles, Plates, and Channels: ASTM A 36/A 36M. B. Rolled Steel Structural Shapes: ASTM A 992/A 992M. C. Cold -Formed Structural Tubing: ASTM A 500, Grade B. D. Hot -Formed Structural Tubing: ASTM A 501, seamless. E. Pipe: ASTM A 53/A 53M, Grade B, Finish black. F. Structural Bolts and Nuts: Carbon steel, ASTM A 307, Grade A galvanized to ASTM A 153/A 153M, Class C. G. High -Strength Structural Bolts, Nuts, and Washers: ASTM A 325 (ASTM A 325M), Type 1, medium carbon, plain. H. Headed Anchor Rods: ASTM A 307, Grade C. I. Welding Materials: AWS D1.1; type required for materials being welded. J. Grout: Non -shrink, non-metallic aggregate type, complying with ASTM C 1107/C 1107M and capable of developing a minimum compressive strength of 7,000 psi (48 MPa) at 28 days. K. Shop and Touch -Up Primer: Fabricator's standard, complying with VOC limitations of authorities having jurisdiction. 2.02 FABRICATION A. Shop fabricate to greatest extent possible. B. Continuously seal joined members by continuous welds. Grind exposed welds smooth. 2.03 FINISH A. Prepare structural component surfaces in accordance with SSPC SP 3. 07128 / Navarro West Center 05120 - 2 I STRUCTURAL STEEL LNavarro West Center Welbourne Drive and Navarro Drive For Permit and Pricing March 12th, 2008 B. Shop prime structural steel members. Do not prime surfaces that will be fireproofed, field welded, in contact with concrete, or high strength bolted. 2.04 SOURCE QUALITY CONTROL AND TESTS A. Welded Connections: Visually inspect all shop -welded connections and test at least 20 percent of welds using the following: 1. Magnetic particle inspection performed in accordance with ASTM E 709. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 ERECTION A. Erect structural steel in compliance with AISC "Code of Standard Practice for Steel Buildings and Bridges". B. Allow for erection loads, and provide sufficient temporary bracing to maintain structure in safe condition, plumb, and in true alignment until completion of erection and installation of permanent bracing. C. Use carbon steel bolts only for temporary bracing during construction, unless otherwise specifically permitted on drawings. Install high -strength bolts in accordance with AISC "Specification for Structural Joints Using ASTM A325 or A490 Bolts". D. Do not field cut or alter structural members without approval of Architect. E. After erection, prime welds, abrasions, and surfaces not shop primed, Except surfaces to be in contact with concrete. F. Grout solidly between column plates and bearing surfaces, complying with manufacturer's instructions for nonshrink grout. Trowel grouted surfaces smooth, splaying neatly to 45 degrees. 3.02 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL A. An independent testing agency will perform field quality control tests, as specified in Section 01400. B. Welded Connections: Visually inspect all field -welded connections and test at least 20 percent of welds using the following: 1. Magnetic particle inspection performed in accordance with ASTM E 709. 1 07128 / Navarro West Center END OF SECTION 05120 - 3 STRUCTURAL STEEL Navarro West Center Welbourne Drive and Navarro Drive SECTION 05210 STEEL JOISTS For Permit and Pricing March 12th, 2008 PART1 GENERAL 1.01 SECTION INCLUDES A. Open web steel joists and shear stud connectors, with bridging, attached seats and anchors. 1.02 RELATED SECTIONS A. Section 05120 - Structural Steel: Superstructure framing. 1.03 REFERENCES A. ASTM A 108 - Standard Specification for Steel Bar, Carbon and Alloy, Cold Finished; 2003. B. ASTM A 307 - Standard Specification for Carbon Steel Bolts and Studs, 60 000 PSI Tensile Strength; 2004. C. ASTM E 709 - Standard Guide for Magnetic Particle Examination; 2001. D. AWS D1.1/D1.1M - Structural Welding Code - Steel; American Welding Society; 2006. E. SJI (SPEC) - Catalog of Standard Specifications and Load Tables for Steel Joists and Joist Girders; Steel Joist Institute; 2005. F. SJI Technical Digest No. 9 - Handling and Erection of Steel Joists and Joist Girders; Steel Joist Institute; 2006. G. SSPC-Paint 25 - Zinc Oxide, Alkyd, Linseed Oil Primer for Use Over Hand Cleaned Steel, Type I and Type 11; Society for Protective Coatings; 1997 (Ed. 2004). H. SSPC-SP 3 - Power Tool Cleaning; Society for Protective Coatings; 1982 (Ed. 2004). 1.04 SUBMITTALS A. See Section 0.1300 - Administrative Requirements, for submittal procedures. B. Shop Drawings: Indicate standard designations, joist coding, configurations, sizes, spacings, cambers, locations of joists, joist leg extensions, bridging, connections, and attachments. C. Welders' Certificates: Submit manufacturer's certificates, certifying welders employed on the Work, verifying AWS qualification within the previous 12 months. 1.05 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Perform Work, including that for headers and other supplementary framing, in accordance with SJI Standard Specifications Load Tables and SJI Technical Digest No.9. B. Erector Qualifications: Company specializing in performing the work of this section with minimum three years documented experience. PART2 PRODUCTS 2.01 MANUFACTURERS A. Steel Joists: 1. Vulcraft/Nucor Corporation: www.vulcraft.com. 2. Substitutions: See Section 01600 - Product Requirements. 2.02 MATERIALS A. Open Web Joists: Types as indicated on drawings: 07128 / Navarro West Center 05210 - 1 STEEL JOISTS Navarro West Center Welbourne Drive and Navarro Drive For Permit and Pricing March 12th, 2008 1. Provide bottom chord extensions as indicated. 2. End bearing of 2-1/2 inches (62 mm) on steel supports. 3. Finish: Shop primed. B. Anchor Bolts, Nuts and Washers: ASTM A 307, plain. C. Shear Stud Connectors: Made from ASTM A 108 Grade 1015 bars. D. Welding Materials: AWS D1.1; type required for materials being welded. E. Shop and Touch -Up Primer: SSPC-Paint 25, zinc oxide, complying with VOC limitations of authorities having jurisdiction. 2.03 FABRICATION A. Drill holes in chords for attachment of wood nailers where indicated. B. Space stud shear connectors on top of top chords at inches mm) on center. 2.04 FINISH A. Shop prime joists. B. Prepare surfaces to be finished in accordance with SSPC-SP 3. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 ERECTION A. Erect joists with correct bearing on supports. B. Allow for erection loads. Provide sufficient temporary bracing to maintain framing safe, plumb, and in true alignment. C. After joist alignment and installation of framing, field weld joist seats to steel bearing surfaces. D. Do not permit erection of decking until joists are braced bridged, and secured or until completion of erection and installation of permanent bridging and.bracing. E. Do not field cut or alter structural members without approval of joist manufacturer. 3.02 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL A. An independent testing agency will perform field quality control tests, as specified in Section 01400. B. Welded Connections: Visually inspect all field -welded connections and test at least 20 percent of welds using the following: 1. Magnetic particle inspection performed in accordance with ASTM E 709. END OF SECTION 07128 / Navarro West Center 05210 - 2 I STEEL JOISTS ' Navarro West Center Welbourne Drive and Navarro Drive SECTION 05310 STEEL DECK For Permit and Pricing March 12th, 2008 PART1 GENERAL 1.01 SECTION INCLUDES A. Roof deck. B. Supplementary framing for openings up to and including 18 inches (450 mm). 1.02 REFERENCES A. ASTM A 653/A 653M - Standard Specification for Steel Sheet, Zinc -Coated (Galvanized) or Zinc -Iron Alloy -Coated (Galvannealed) by the Hot -Dip Process; 2006a. B. AWS 131.1/131 A M - Structural Welding Code - Steel; American Welding Society; 2006. C. AWS D1.3 - Structural Welding Code - Sheet Steel; American Welding Society; 2007. D. SDI (DM) - Publication No.30, Design Manual for Composite Decks, Form Decks, Roof Decks; Steel Deck Institute; 2007. E. SSPC-Paint 20 - Zinc -Rich Primers (Type I, "Inorganic," and Type II, "Organic"); The Society for Protective Coatings; 2002 (Ed. 2004). 1.03 SUBMITTALS A. See Section 01300 - Administrative Requirements, for submittals procedures. B. Shop Drawings: Indicate deck plan, support locations, projections, openings, pertinent details, and accessories. C. Product Data: Provide deck profile characteristics, dimensions, structural properties, and finishes. D. Welders Certificates: Certify welders employed on the Work, verifying AWS qualification within the previous 12 months. 1.04 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Installer Qualifications: Company specializing in performing the work of this Section with minimum three years of experience. 1.05 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. Cut plastic wrap to encourage ventilation. B. Separate sheets and store deck on dry wood sleepers; slope for positive drainage. PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.01 MANUFACTURERS A. Steel Deck: 1. United Steel Deck, Inc: www.njb-united.com. 2. Vulcraft/Nucor Corporation: www.vulcraft.com. 3. Wheeling Corrugating Co: www.wheelingcorrugating.com. 4. Substitutions: See Section 01600 - Product Requirements. 2.02 STEEL DECK A. Roof Deck: Non -composite type, fluted steel sheet: 1 07128 / Navarro West Center 05310 - 1 STEEL DECK Navarro West Center Welbourne Drive and Navarro Drive For Permit and Pricing March 12th, 2008 1. Galvanized Steel Sheet: ASTM A 653/A 653M, Structural Steel (SS) Grade 33/230, with G90/Z275 galvanized coating. 2. Minimum Metal Thickness, Excluding Finish: 22 gage (0.8 mm). 3. Nominal Height: 1-1/2 inch (38 mm). 4. Profile: Fluted; SDI WR. 5. Side Joints: Lapped, mechanically fastened. 6. End Joints: Lapped, mechanically fastened. 2.03 ACCESSORY MATERIALS A. Welding Materials: AWS D1.1. B. Fasteners: Galvanized hardened steel, self tapping. C. Weld Washers: Mild steel, uncoated, 3/4 inch (19 mm) outside diameter, 1/8 inch (3 mm) thick. D. Touch -Up Primer for Galvanized Surfaces: SSPC-Paint 20, complying with VOC limitations of authorities having jurisdiction. E. Flute Closures: Closed cell foam rubber, 1 inch (25 mm) thick; profiled to fit tight to the deck. 2.04 FABRICATED DECK ACCESSORIES A. Sheet Metal Deck Accessories: Metal closure strips, wet concrete stops, and cover plates, 22 gage (0.8 mm) thick sheet steel; of profile and size as indicated; finished same as deck. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 INSTALLATION A. Erect metal deck in accordance with SDI Design Manual and manufacturer's instructions. Align and level. B. On steel supports provide minimum 1-1/2 inch (38 mm) bearing. C. Fasten deck to steel support members at ends and intermediate supports at 12 inches (300 mm) on center maximum, parallel with the deck flute and at each transverse flute using methods specified. 1. Welding: Use fusion welds through weld washers. D. At mechanically fastened male/female side laps fasten at 24 inches (600 mm) on center maximum. E. Weld deck in accordance with AWS D1.3. F. At deck openings from 6 inches (150 mm) to 18 inches (450 mm) in size, provide 2 x 2 x 1/4 inch (50 x 50 x 6 mm) steel angle reinforcement. Place angles perpendicular to flutes; extend minimum two flutes beyond each side of opening and fusion weld to deck at each flute. G. At openings between deck and walls, columns, and openings, provide sheet steel closures and angle flashings to close openings. H. Close openings above walls and partitions perpendicular to deck flutes with single row of foam cell closures. I. Place metal cant strips in position and mechanically attach. J. Immediately after welding deck and other metal components in position, coat welds, burned areas, and damaged surface coating, with touch-up primer. END OF SECTION 07128 / Navarro West Center 05310 - 2 STEEL DECK Navarro West Center Welbourne Drive and Navarro Drive SECTION 05400 COLD FORMED METAL FRAMING PART1 GENERAL 1.01 SECTION INCLUDES A. Load bearing formed steel stud exterior wall framing. 1.02 RELATED SECTIONS For Permit and Pricing March 12th, 2008 A. Section 04816 - Masonry Veneer: Veneer masonry supported by wall stud metal framing. B. Section 09260 - Gypsum Board Assemblies: Wall sheathing. C. Section 07212 - Board and Batt Insulation: Insulation within framing members. D. Section 09260 - Gypsum Board Assemblies: Lightweight, non -load bearing metal stud framing. ' 1.03 REFERENCES A. ASTM A 153/A 153M - Standard Specification for Zinc Coating (Hot -Dip) on Iron and Steel Hardware; 2005. B. ASTM A 653/A 653M - Standard Specification for Steel Sheet, Zinc -Coated (Galvanized) or Zinc -Iron Alloy -Coated (Galvannealed) by the Hot -Dip Process; 2006a. C. ASTM C 955 - Standard Specification for Load -Bearing (Transverse and Axial) Steel Studs, Runners (Tracks), and Bracing or Bridging for Screw Application of Gypsum Panel Products and Metal Plaster Bases; 2006. 1 D. SSPC-Paint 20 - Zinc -Rich Primers (Type I, "Inorganic," and Type II, "Organic"); Society for Protective Coatings; 2002 (Ed. 2004). 1.04 SUBMITTALS A. See Section 01300 - Administrative Requirements, for submittal procedures. B. Product Data: Provide data on standard framing members; describe materials and finish, product criteria, limitations. C. Manufacturer's Installation Instructions: Indicate special procedures, conditions requiring special attention. 1.05 QUALITY ASSURANCE ' A. Installer Qualifications: Company specializing in performing the work of this section with minimum three years of experience. PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.01 MANUFACTURERS A. Metal Framing, Connectors, and Accessories: 1. Marino -Ware: www.mar*noware.com. 2. United States Steel. 3. Substitutions: See Section 01600 -Product Requirements. 2.02 FRAMING SYSTEM A. Provide primary and secondary framing members, bridging, bracing, plates, gussets, clips, fittings, reinforcement, and fastenings as required to provide a complete framing system. 07128 / Navarro West Center 05400 - 1 COLD FORMED METAL FRAMING 1 Navarro West Center Welbourne Drive and Navarro Drive For Permit and Pricing March 12th, 2008 2.03 FRAMING MATERIALS A. Studs and Track: ASTM C 955; studs formed to channel, "C", or "Sigma" shape with punched web; U-shaped track in matching nominal width and compatible height. 1. Gage and depth: As indicated on the drawings. 2. Galvanized in accordance with ASTM A 653/A 653M G90/Z275 coating. 2.04 ACCESSORIES A. Bracing, Furring, Bridging: Formed sheet steel, thickness determined for conditions encountered; finish to match framing components. B. Plates, Gussets, Clips: Formed Sheet Steel, thickness determined for conditions encountered; finish to match framing components. C. Touch -Up Primer for Galvanized Surfaces: SSPC-Paint 20, Type I - Inorganic, complying with VOC limitations of authorities having jurisdiction. 2.05 FASTENERS A. Self -Drilling, Self -Tapping Screws, Bolts, Nuts and Washers: Hot dip galvanized per ASTM A 153/A 153M. B. Anchorage Devices: Power actuated. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 INSTALLATION OF STUDS A. Install components in accordance with manufacturers' instructions. B. Align floor and ceiling tracks; locate to wall layout. Secure in place with fasteners at maximum 24 inches (600 mm) on center. C. Place studs at 16 inches (400 mm) on center; not more than 2 inches (50 mm) from abutting walls and at each side of openings. Connect studs to tracks using clip and tie method. D. Construct comers using minimum of three studs. Install double studs at wall openings, door and window jambs. E. Install load bearing studs full length in one piece. Splicing of studs is not permitted. F. Install load bearing studs, brace, and reinforce to develop full strength and achieve design requirements. G. Coordinate placement of insulation in multiple stud spaces made inaccessible after erection. H. Install intermediate studs above and below openings to align with wall stud spacing. I. Attach cross studs to studs for attachment of fixtures anchored to walls. J. Install framing between studs for attachment of mechanical and electrical items, and to prevent stud rotation. K. Touch-up field welds and damaged galvanized surfaces with primer. END OF SECTION 07128 / Navarro West Center 05400 - 2 COLD FORMED METAL FRAMING 1 Navarro West Center Welboume Drive and Navarro Drive SECTION 05500 METAL FABRICATIONS For Permit and Pricing March 12th, 2008 PART1 GENERAL 1.01 SECTION INCLUDES A. Shop fabricated steel items. 1.02 REFERENCES A. ASTM A 36/A 36M - Standard Specification for Carbon Structural Steel; 2005. B. ASTM A 53/A 53M - Standard Specification for Pipe, Steel, Black and Hot -Dipped, Zinc -Coated, Welded and Seamless; 2006a. C. ASTM A 123/A 123M - Standard Specification for Zinc (Hot -Dip Galvanized) Coatings on Iron and Steel Products; 2002. D. AWS A2.4 - Standard Symbols for Welding, Brazing, and Nondestructive Examination; American Welding Society; 2007. E. AWS 131.101.1 M - Structural Welding Code - Steel; American Welding Society; 2006. F. SSPC-Paint 15 - Steel Joist Shop Primer; Society for Protective Coatings; 1999 (Ed. 2004). G. SSPC-Paint 20 - Zinc -Rich Primers (Type I, "Inorganic," and Type II, "Organic"); Society for Protective Coatings; 2002 (Ed. 2004). 1.03 SUBMITTALS A. See Section 01300 - Administrative Requirements, for submittal procedures. B. Shop Drawings: Indicate profiles, sizes, connection attachments, reinforcing, anchorage, size and type of fasteners, and accessories. Include erection drawings, elevations, and details where applicable. 1. Indicate welded connections using standard AWS A2.4 welding symbols. Indicate net weld lengths. C. Welders' Certificates: Submit certification for welders employed on the project, verifying AWS qualification within the previous 12 months. PART PRODUCTS 2.01 MATERIALS - STEEL A. Steel Sections: ASTM A 36/A 36M. B. Pipe: ASTM A 53/A 53M, Grade B Schedule 40, black finish. C. Welding Materials: AWS D1.1/131 A M; type required for materials being welded. D. Shop and Touch -Up Primer: SSPC-Paint 15, complying with VOC limitations of authorities having jurisdiction. E. Touch -Up Primer for Galvanized Surfaces: SSPC-Paint 20, Type I - Inorganic, complying with VOC limitations of authorities having jurisdiction. 2.02 FABRICATION A. Fit and shop assemble items in largest practical sections, for delivery to site. B. Fabricate items with joints tightly fitted and secured. 07128 / Navarro West Center 05500 - 1 METAL FABRICATIONS Navarro West Center Welbourne Drive and Navarro Drive For Permit and Pricing March 12th, 2008 C. Grind exposed joints flush and smooth with adjacent finish surface. Make exposed joints butt tight, flush, and hairline. Ease exposed edges to small uniform radius. D. Supply components required for anchorage of fabrications. Fabricate anchors and related components of same material and finish as fabrication, except where specifically noted otherwise. 2.03 FABRICATED ITEMS A. Bollards: Steel pipe, concrete filled, crowned cap, as detailed; prime paint finish. B. Lintels: As detailed; galvanized finish. 2.04 FINISHES • STEEL A. Prime paint all steel items. 1. Exceptions: Galvanize items to be embedded in concrete or masonry and items specified for finish. B. Prepare surfaces to be primed in accordance with SSPC-SP 3. C. Prime Painting: One coat. D. Galvanizing of Non-structural Items: Galvanize after fabrication to ASTM A 123/A 123M requirements. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 PREPARATION A. Supply setting templates to the appropriate entities for steel items required to be cast into concrete or embedded in masonry. 3.02 INSTALLATION A. Install items plumb and level, accurately fitted, free from distortion or defects. B. Provide for erection loads, and for sufficient temporary bracing to maintain true alignment until completion of erection and installation of permanent attachments. C. Field weld components indicated. D. Perform field welding in accordance with AWS D1.1/D1.1M. E. Obtain approval prior to site cutting or making adjustments not scheduled. F. After erection, prime welds, abrasions, and surfaces not shop primed or galvanized, except surfaces to be in contact with concrete. END OF SECTION 07128 / Navarro West Center 05500 - 2 METAL FABRICATIONS ' Navarro West Center Welbourne Drive and Navarro Drive SECTION 06100 ROUGH CARPENTRY For Permit and Pricing March 12th, 2008 PART1 GENERAL 1.01 SECTION INCLUDES A. Rough opening framing for doors, windows, and roof openings. B. Roof -mounted curbs. C. Roofing nailers. D. Roofing cant strips. E. Preservative treated wood materials. F. Miscellaneous framing and sheathing. G. Concealed wood blocking, nailers, and supports. 1.02 REFERENCES A. ASTM E 84 - Standard Test Method for Surface Burning Characteristics of Building Materials; 2007. B. AWPA C2 - Lumber, Timber, Bridge Ties and Mine Ties -- Preservative Treatment by Pressure Processes; American Wood -Preservers' Association; 2002. C. AWPA U1 - Use Category System: User Specification for Treated Wood; American Wood -Preservers' Association; 2007. D. PS 20 - American Softwood Lumber Standard; National Institute of Standards and Technology (Department of Commerce); 2005. 1.03 SUBMITTALS A. See Section 01300 -Administrative Requirements, for submittal procedures. PART2 PRODUCTS 2.01 GENERAL REQUIREMENTS A. Dimension Lumber: Comply with PS 20 and requirements of specified grading agencies. 1. If no species is specified, provide any species graded by the agency specified; if no grading agency is specified, provide lumber graded by any grading agency meeting the specified requirements. 2. Grading Agency: Any grading agency whose rules are approved by the Board of Review, American Lumber Standard Committee (www.alsc.org) and who provides grading service for the species and grade specified; provide lumber stamped with grade mark unless otherwise indicated. B. Lumber fabricated from old growth timber is not permitted. 2.02 DIMENSION LUMBER FOR CONCEALED APPLICATIONS A. Sizes: Nominal sizes as indicated on drawings, S4S. B. Moisture Content: S-dryor MC19. C. Miscellaneous Framing, Blocking, Nailers, Grounds, and Furring: 1. Lumber: S4S, No. 2 or Standard Grade. 2. Boards: Standard or No. 3. 07128 / Navarro West Center 06100 -1 ROUGH CARPENTRY Navarro West Center Welbourne Drive and Navarro Drive 2.03 CONSTRUCTION PANELS For Permit and Pricing March 12th, 2008 A. Communications and Electrical Room Mounting Boards: Interior grade, A-D plywood, or medium density fiberboard; 3/4 inch (19 mm) thick; flame spread index of 25 or less, smoke developed index of 450 or less, when tested in accordance with ASTM E 84. 2.04 FACTORY WOOD TREATMENT A. Treated Lumber and Plywood: Comply with requirements of AWPA U1 - Use Category System for wood treatments determined by use categories, expected service conditions, and specific applications. 1. Preservative -Treated Wood: Provide lumber and plywood marked or stamped by an ALSC-accredited testing agency, certifying level and type of treatment in accordance with AWPA standards. B. Preservative Treatment: C. Preservative Pressure Treatment of Lumber Above Grade: AWPA Use Category UC313, Commodity Specification A (Treatment C2) using waterborne preservative to 0.25 Ib/cu ft (4.0 kg/cu m) retention. 1. Kiln dry lumber after treatment to maximum moisture content of 19 percent. 2. Treat lumber in contact with roofing, flashing, or waterproofing. 3. Treat lumber in contact with masonry or concrete. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 INSTALLATION -GENERAL A. Select material sizes to minimize waste. B. Reuse scrap to the greatest extent possible; clearly separate scrap for use on site as accessory components, including: shims, bracing, and blocking. C. Where treated wood is used on interior, provide temporary ventilation during and immediately after installation sufficient to remove indoor air contaminants. 3.02 BLOCKING, NAILERS, AND SUPPORTS A. Provide framing and blocking members as indicated or as required to support finishes, fixtures, specialty items, and trim. B. In framed assemblies that have concealed spaces, provide solid wood fireblocking as required by applicable local code, to close concealed draft openings between floors and between top story and roof/attic space; other material acceptable to code authorities may be used in lieu of solid wood blocking. C. In metal stud walls, provide continuous blocking around door and window openings for anchorage of frames, securely attached to stud framing. D. In walls, provide blocking attached to studs as backing and support for wall -mounted items, unless item can be securely fastened to two or more studs or other method of support is explicitly indicated. E. Where ceiling -mounting is indicated,- provide blocking and supplementary supports above ceiling, unless other method of support is explicitly indicated. 3.03 ROOF -RELATED CARPENTRY A. Coordinate installation of roofing carpentry with deck construction, framing of roof openings, and roofing assembly installation. 07128 / Navarro West Center 06100 - 2 ROUGH CARPENTRY Navarro West Center For Permit and Pricing Welbourne Drive and Navarro Drive March 12th, 2008 B. Provide wood curb at all roof openings except where specifically indicated otherwise. Form corners by alternating lapping side members. 3.04 INSTALLATION OF CONSTRUCTION PANELS A. Communications and Electrical Room Mounting Boards: Secure with screws to studs with edges over firm bearing; space fasteners at maximum 24 inches (610 mm) on center on all edges and into studs in field of board. 1. At fire -rated walls, install board over wall board indicated as part of the fire -rated assembly. 2. Where boards are indicated as full floor -to -ceiling height, install with long edge of board parallel to studs. 3. Install adjacent boards without gaps. END OF SECTION 07128 / Navarro West Center 06100 - 3 ROUGH CARPENTRY Navarro West Center Welbourne Drive and Navarro Drive SECTION 06200 FINISH CARPENTRY For Permit and Pricing March 12th, 2008 PART 2 PRODUCTS 1.01 MATERIALS - GENERAL 1.02 WOOD -BASED COMPONENTS A. Wood fabricated from old growth timber is not permitted. 1.03 FABRICATION A. Shop assemble work for delivery to site, permitting passage through building openings. B. When necessary to cut and fit on site, provide materials with ample allowance for cutting. Provide trim for scribing and site cutting. END OF SECTION 07128 / Navarro West Center 06200 - 1 FINISH CARPENTRY Navarro West Center Welbourne Drive and Navarro Drive SECTION 06410 CUSTOM CABINETS For Permit and Pricing March 12th, 2008 PART1 GENERAL 1.01 SECTION INCLUDES A. Specially fabricated cabinet units. B. Countertops. C. Cabinet hardware. 1.02 RELATED SECTIONS , 1.03 REFERENCES A. ANSI A135.4 - American National Standard for Basic Hardboard; 2004. B. ANSI A208.2 - American National Standard for Medium Density Fiberboard for Interior Use; 2002. C. AWI/AWMAC (QSI) - Architectural Woodwork Quality Standards Illustrated; Architectural Woodwork Institute and Architectural Woodwork Manufacturers Association of Canada; 2006, 8th Ed., Version 2.0. D. HPVA HP-1 - American National Standard for Hardwood and Decorative Plywood; Hardwood Plywood & Veneer Association; 2004 (ANSI/HPVA HP-1). E. NEMA LD 3 - High -Pressure Decorative Laminates; National Electrical Manufacturers Association; 2005. F. PS 20 - American Softwood Lumber Standard; National Institute of Standards and Technology (Department of Commerce); 2005. 1.04 SUBMITTALS A. See Section 01300 - Administrative Requirements, for submittal procedures. B. Shop Drawings: Indicate materials, component profiles and elevations, assembly methods, joint details, fastening methods, accessory listings, hardware location and schedule of finishes. C. Product Data: Provide data for hardware accessories. D. Samples: Submit actual samples of architectural cabinet construction, minimum 12 inches (300 mm) square, illustrating proposed cabinet substrate and finish. E. Samples: Submit actual sample items of proposed pulls and hinges, demonstrating hardware design, quality, and finish. 1.05 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Perform work in accordance with AWI/AWMAC Architectural Woodwork Quality Standards Illustrated, Premium quality, unless other quality is indicated for specific items. B. Manufacturer Qualifications: Company specializing in manufacturing the products specified in this section with minimum three years of documented experience. 1.06 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND PROTECTION A. Protect units from moisture damage. 1 07128 / Navarro West Center 06410 - 1 CUSTOM CABINETS Navarro West Center Welbourne Drive and Navarro Drive For Permit and Pricing March 12th, 2008 1.07 ENVIRONMENTAL REQUIREMENTS A. During and after installation of custom cabinets, maintain temperature and humidity conditions in building spaces at same levels planned for occupancy. PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.01 WOOD -BASED COMPONENTS A. Wood fabricated from old growth timber is not permitted. 2.02 LUMBER MATERIALS A. Softwood Lumber: NIST PS 20; Graded in accordance with AWI/AWMAC Architectural Woodwork Quality Standards Illustrated, Grade III/Economy; average moisture content of 4-9 percent; species as follows: 1. Exposed Surfaces: Species Douglas fir. 2. Semi -Exposed Surfaces: Species 3. Concealed Surfaces: Species Douglas fir. 2.03 PANEL MATERIALS A. Hardwood Faced Plywood: HPVA HP-1; graded in accordance with AWI/AWMAC Architectural Woodwork Quality Standards Illustrated, core of particleboard; type of glue recommended for specific application; thickness as required; face veneer as follows: B. Medium Density Fiberboard (MDF): ANSI A208.2; type as specified in AWI/AWMAC Architectural Woodwork Quality Standards Illustrated; composed of wood fibers pressure bonded with moisture resistant adhesive to suit application; sanded faces; thickness as required. C. Hardboard: AHA A135.4; Pressed wood fiber with resin binder, Class 1 - Tempered, 1/4 inch (6 mm) thick, smooth one side (S1S); use for drawer bottoms, dust panels, , and other components indicated on drawings. 2.04 LAMINATE MATERIALS A. Manufacturers: 1. Formica Corporation: www.formica.com. 2. Panolam Industries International, Inc\Nevamar: www.nevamar.com. 3. Wilsonart International, Inc: www.wilsonart.com. 4. Substitutions: Not permitted. B. High Pressure Decorative Laminate (HPDL): NEMA LD 3, types as recommended for specific applications and as follows: 2.05- COUNTERTOPS A. Plastic Laminate Countertops: Medium density fiberboard substrate covered with HPDL, conventionally fabricated and self -edge banded. 2.06 ACCESSORIES A. Fasteners: Size and type to suit application. B. Grommets: Standard plastic grommets for cut-outs, in color to match adjacent surface. 2.07 HARDWARE A. Drawer and Door Pulls: Stanley #4484. B. Drawer Slides: 07128 / Navarro West Center 06410 - 2 CUSTOM CABINETS Navarro West Center Welbourne Drive and Navarro Drive For Permit and Pricing March 12th, 2008 2.08 FABRICATION A. Assembly: Shop assemble cabinets for delivery to site in units easily handled and to permit passage through building openings. B. Edging: Fit shelves, doors, and exposed edges with specified edging. Do not use more than one piece for any single length. C. Fitting: When necessary to cut and fit on site, provide materials with ample allowance for cutting. Provide matching trim for scribing and site cutting. D. Plastic Laminate: Apply plastic laminate finish in full uninterrupted sheets consistent with manufactured sizes. Fit comers and joints hairline; secure with concealed fasteners. Slightly bevel arises. Locate counter butt joints minimum 2 feet (600 mm) from sink cut-outs. E. Mechanically fasten back splash to countertops with steel brackets at 16 inches (400 mm) on center. F. Provide cutouts for plumbing fixtures. Verify locations of cutouts from on -site dimensions. Prime paint cut edges. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 EXAMINATION A. Verify adequacy of backing and support framing. B. Verify location and sizes of utility rough -in associated with work of this section. 3.02 INSTALLATION A. Set and secure custom cabinets in place, assuring that they are rigid, plumb, and level. B. Use fixture attachments in concealed locations for wall mounted components. C. Use concealed joint fasteners to align and secure adjoining cabinet units. D. Carefully scribe casework abutting other components, with maximum gaps of 1/32 inch (1 mm). Do not use additional overlay trim for this purpose. E. Secure cabinets to floor using appropriate angles and anchorages. 3.03 ADJUSTING A. Adjust moving or operating parts to function smoothly and correctly. END OF SECTION 07128 / Navarro West Center 06410 - 3 CUSTOM CABINETS 1 Navarro West Center Welbourne Drive and Navarro Drive SECTION 07130 SHEET WATERPROOFING For Permit and Pricing March 12th, 2008 PART1 GENERAL 1.01 RELATED SECTIONS A. Section 07620 - Sheet Metal Flashing and Trim: Metal parapet, coping, and counterFlashing. 1.02 REFERENCES A. ASTM D 412 - Standard Test Methods for Vulcanized Rubber and Thermoplastic Elastomers- Tension; 2006a. B. ASTM D 2581 - Standard Specification for Polybutylene (PB) Plastics Molding and Extrusion Materials; 2002. C. ASTM D 4551 - Standard Specification for Poly (Vinyl Chloride) (PVC) Plastic Flexible Concealed Water -Containment Membrane; 1996 (Reapproved 2001). D. ASTM D 4637 - Standard Specification for EPDM Sheet Used in Single Ply Roof Membrane; 2004. 1.03 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Installer Qualifications: Company specializing in performing the work of this section with minimum three years experience. 1.04 WARRANTY A. See Section 01780 -Closeout Submittals, for additional warranty requirements. PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.01 MANUFACTURERS A. Other Acceptable Rubber Manufacturers: 1. Carlisle Coatings & Waterproofing, Inc.; Product Sure -Seal EPDM: www.carlisle-ccw.com. 2. Substitutions: See Section 01600 - Product Requirements. B. Other Acceptable Plastic Manufacturers: 1. Sika Samafil, Inc.; Product Samafil G476: www.samafilus.com. 2. Substitutions: See Section 01600 - Product Requirements. 2.02 MEMBRANE MATERIALS A. Rubber Membrane: Butylene, conforming to ASTM D 2581. 1. Formulated for seaming by solvent welding. 2. Tensile Strength: 1305 psi ( MPa), measured in accordance with ASTM D 412. 3. Ultimate Elongation: 300 percent, measured in accordance with ASTM D 412. B. Plastic Membrane: PVC conforming to ASTM D 4551. 1. Formulated for seaming by solvent welding. C. Seaming Materials: As recommended by membrane manufacturer. D. Adhesives: As recommended by membrane manufacturer. E. Thinner and Cleaner: As recommended by adhesive manufacturer, compatible with sheet membrane. 2.03 ACCESSORIES 07128 / Navarro West Center 07130 - 1 SHEET WATERPROOFING Navarro West Center Welbourne Drive and Navarro Drive For Permit and Pricing March 12th, 2008 A. Flexible Flashings: Type recommended by membrane manufacturer. B. Counterflashings: Galvanized steel sheet as specified in Section 07620. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 PREPARATION A. Clean and prepare surfaces to receive waterproofing in accordance with manufacturer's instructions. Vacuum substrate clean. B. Do not apply waterproofing to surfaces unacceptable to membrane manufacturer. C. Surfaces for Adhesive Bonding: Apply surface conditioner at a rate recommended by manufacturer. Protect conditioner from rain or frost until dry. 3.02 INSTALLATION - MEMBRANE A. Install membrane waterproofing in accordance with manufacturer's instructions. B. Roll out membrane. Minimize wrinkles and bubbles. C. Adhesive Bonded Membrane: Apply adhesive in accordance with manufacturer's instructions. Bond sheet to substrate except those areas directly over or within 3 inches (75 mm) of a control or expansion joint. D. Overlap edges and ends and seal by method recommended by manufacturer, minimum 3 inches (75 mm). Seal permanently waterproof. Apply uniform bead of sealant to joint edge. E. Reinforce membrane with multiple thickness of membrane material over joints, whether joints are static or dynamic. F. Weather lap joints on sloped substrate in direction of drainage. Seal joints and seams. G. Install flexible flashings. Seal items penetrating through membrane with flexible flashings. Seal watertight to membrane. H. Seal membrane and flashings to adjoining surfaces. Install termination bar at all edges. Install counterflashing over all exposed edges. END OF SECTION 07128 / Navarro West`Center 07130 - 2 SHEET WATERPROOFING Navarro West Center Welbourne Drive and Navarro Drive SECTION 07212 BOARD AND BATT INSULATION PART1 GENERAL 1.01 SECTION INCLUDES A. Batt insulation and vapor retarder in exterior wall and ceiling construction. For Permit and Pricing March 12th, 2008 B. Batt insulation for filling perimeter window and door shim spaces and crevices in exterior wall and roof. 1.02 RELATED SECTIONS A. Section 05400 - Cold Formed Metal Framing: Supporting construction for batt insulation. B. Section 09260 - Gypsum Board Assemblies: Acoustic insulation. 1.03 REFERENCES A. ASTM C 665 - Standard Specification for Mineral -Fiber Blanket Thermal Insulation for Light Frame Construction and Manufactured Housing; 2006. B. ASTM E 136 - Standard Test Method for Behavior of Materials in a Vertical Tube Furnace At 750 Degrees C; 2004. 1.04 SUBMITTALS t A. See Section 01300 -Administrative Requirements, for submittal procedures. B. Product Data: Provide data on product characteristics, performance criteria, and product limitations. PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.01 BATT INSULATION MATERIALS A. Batt Insulation: ASTM C 665; preformed batt; friction fit, conforming to the following: 1. Combustibility: Non-combustible, when tested in accordance with ASTM E 136, except for facing, if any. 2. Manufacturers: a. CertainTeed Corporation: www.certainteed.com. b. Johns Manville Corporation: www.jm.com. c. Owens Corning Corp: www.owenscoming.com. 3. Substitutions: See Section 01600 - Product Requirements. 2.02 ACCESSORIES A. Tape: Bright aluminum self -adhering type, mesh reinforced, 2 inch (50 mm) wide. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 BATT INSTALLATION A. Install insulation and vapor retarder in accordance with manufacturer's instructions. B. Install in exterior wall spaces without gaps or voids. Do not compress insulation. C. Trim insulation neatly to fit spaces. Insulate miscellaneous gaps and voids. D. Fit insulation tightly in cavities and tightly to exterior side of mechanical and electrical services within the plane of the insulation. � I 07128 / Navarro West Center 07212 -1 BOARD AND BATT INSULATION � I Navarro West Center Welbourne Drive and Navarro Drive 3.02 PROTECTION OF FINISHED WORK A. Do not permit installed insulation to be damaged prior to its concealment. END OF SECTION 07128 / Navarro West Center For Permit and Pricing March 12th, 2008 07212 - 2 BOARD AND BATT INSULATION r Navarro West Center Welbourne Drive and Navarro Drive SECTION 07240 EXTERIOR INSULATION AND FINISH SYSTEMS PART1 GENERAL 1.01 SECTION INCLUDES For Permit and Pricing March 12th, 2008 A. Drainage and water -resistive barriers behind insulation board. B. Incidental uses of same finish coating applied directly to concrete and masonry. 1.02 REFERENCES A. ASTM B 117 - Standard Practice for Operating Salt Spray (Fog) Apparatus; 2003. B. ASTM C 1397 - Standard Practice for Application of Class PB Exterior Insulation and Finish Systems; 2005. C. ASTM D 226 - Standard Specification for Asphalt -Saturated Organic Felt Used in Roofing and Waterproofing; 2006. D. ASTM D 968 - Standard Test Methods for Abrasion Resistance of Organic Coatings by Falling Abrasive; 2005. E. ASTM D 2247 - Standard Practice for Testing Water Resistance of Coatings in 100% Relative Humidity; 2002. F. ASTM D 3273 - Standard Test Method for Resistance to Growth of Mold on the Surface of Interior Coatings in an Environmental Chamber; 2000 (Reapproved 2005). G. ASTM E 331 - Standard Test Method for Water Penetration of Exterior Windows, Skylights, Doors, and Curtain Walls by Uniform Static Air Pressure Difference; 2000. H. ASTM E 1677 - Standard Specification for an Air Barrier (AB) Material or System for Low -Rise Framed Building Walls; 2005. I. ASTM E 2273 - Standard Test Method for Determining the Drainage Efficiency of Exterior Insulation and Finish Systems (EIFS) Clad Wall Assemblies; 2003. J. ASTM E 2485 - Standard Test Method for Freeze/Thaw Resistance of Exterior Insulation and Finish Systems (EIFS) and Water Resistive Barrier Coatings; 2006. K. ASTM G 153 - Standard Practice for Operating Enclosed Carbon Arc Light Apparatus for Exposure of Nonmetallic Materials; 2004. L. ASTM G 155 - Standard Practice for Operating Xenon Arc Light Apparatus for Exposure of Nonmetallic Materials; 2005a. M. EIMA 101.01 - Standard Test Method for Freeze/Thaw Resistance of Exterior Insulation and Finish Systems (EIFS), Class PB; 1995, Revised August 1995 (modified ASTM C 67). N. NFPA 259 - Standard Test Method for Potential Heat Building Materials; 2003. O. NFPA 268 - Standard Test Method for Determining Ignitibility of Exterior Wall Assemblies Using a Radiant Heat Energy Source; 2007. P. NFPA 285 - Standard Method of Test for the Evaluation of Flammability Characteristics of Exterior Nonload Bearing Wall Assemblies Containing Components Using the Intermediate Scale Multi -Story Test Apparatus; 2006. 1.03 SUBMITTALS A. See Section 01300 -Administrative Requirements, for submittal procedures. 07128 / Navarro West Center 07240 - EXTERIOR INSULATION AND FINISH SYSTEMS Navarro West Center For Permit and Pricing Welboume Drive and Navarro Drive March 12th, 2008 B. Product Data: Provide data on system materials. C. Selection Samples: Submit manufacturer's standard range of samples illustrating available coating colors and textures. 1.04 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Maintain copy of specified installation standard and manufacturer's installation instructions at project site at all times during installation. B. Installer Qualifications: Company specializing in EIFS work. 1.05 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. Delivery: Deliver materials to project site in manufacturer's original, unopened containers -with labels intact. Inspect materials and notify manufacturer of any discrepancies. B. Storage: Protect adhesives and finish materials from freezing and temperatures in excess of 90 degrees F (32 degrees C). 1. Protect Portland cement based materials from moisture and humidity. Store under cover off the ground in a dry location. 2. Protect insulation materials from exposure to sunlight. 1.06 ENVIRONMENTAL REQUIREMENTS A. Do not prepare materials or apply EIFS during inclement weather unless areas of installation are protected. Protect installed EIFS areas from inclement weather until dry. B. Do not install finish or sealants when ambient temperature is below 40 degrees F (5 degrees C). C. Do not leave installed insulation board exposed to sunlight. PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.01 MANUFACTURERS A. United States Gypsum Company; System DuroScreen 1000. B. Substitutions: See Section 01600 - Product Requirements. 2.02 EXTERIOR INSULATION AND FINISH SYSTEM A. Exterior Insulation and Finish System: Reinforced finish coating on mechanically -fastened insulation board over sheet -type drainage layer or spacers and separate sheet -type water -resistive barrier over substrate; provide a complete system that has been tested to show compliance with the following characteristics; include all components of specified system and substrate(s) in tested samples. B. Fire Characteristics: 1. Flammability: Pass, when tested in accordance with NFPA 285. 2. Ignitibility: No sustained flaming when tested in accordance with NFPA 268. 3. Potential Heat of Foam Plastic Insulation Tested Independently of Assembly: No portion of the assembly having potential heat that exceeds that of the insulation sample tested for flammability (above), when tested in accordance with NFPA 259 with results expressed in Btu per square foot (mJ/sq m). C. Water Penetration Resistance: No water penetration beyond the plane of the base coat/insulation board interface after 15 minutes, when tested in accordance with ASTM E 331 at 6.24 psf (299 Pa) differential pressure with tracer dye in the water spray; include in tested sample at least two vertical joints and one horizontal joint of same type to be used in construction; disassemble sample if necessary to determine extent of water penetration. 07128 / Navarro West Center STE 07240 - EXTERIOR INSULATION AND FINISH SY MS Navarro West Center For Permit and Pricing Welbourne Drive and Navarro Drive March 12th, 2008 D. Drainage Efficiency: Average minimum efficiency of 90 percent, when tested in accordance with ASTM E 2273 for 75 minutes. E. Salt Spray Resistance: No cracking, checking, crazing, erosion, blistering, peeling, delamination, or corrosion of finish coating after 300 hours exposure in accordance with ASTM B 117, using at least three samples matching intended assembly, at least 4 by 6 inches (100 by 150 mm ) in size. F. Freeze -Thaw Resistance: No cracking, checking, crazing, erosion, blistering, peeling, delamination, or corrosion of finish coating when viewed under 5x magnification after 60 cycles, when tested in accordance with EIMA 101.01. G. Weathering Resistance: No cracking, checking, crazing, erosion; blistering, peeling, delamination, or corrosion of finish coating when viewed under 5x magnification after 2000 hours of accelerated weathering conducted in accordance with ASTM G 153 Cycle 1 or ASTM G 155 Cycle 1, 5, or 9. H. Water Degradation Resistance: No cracking, checking, crazing, erosion, blistering, peeling, delamination, or corrosion of finish coating after 14 days exposure, when tested in accordance with ASTM D 2247. I. Mildew Resistance: No growth supported on finish coating during 28 day exposure period, when tested in accordance with ASTM D 3273. J. Abrasion Resistance Of Finish: No cracking, checking or loss of film integrity when tested in accordance with ASTM D 968 with 500 liters of sand. 2.03 MATERIALS A. Finish Coating Top Coat: Water -based, air curing, acrylic or polymer -based finish with integral color and texture. 1. Texture: Medium. 2. Color: As selected from manufacturer's range of standard colors. B. Reinforcing Mesh: Balanced, open weave glass fiber fabric, treated for compatibility and improved bond with coating, weight, strength, and number of layers as required to meet required system impact rating. iC. Drainage Layer or Spacers: Furnished or approved by EIFS manufacturer; capable of achieving specified drainage rate; not required to be water -resistive, air retarder, or vapor retarder. D. Water -Resistive Barrier: Sheet type material that constitutes an air retarder but which is vapor permeable; one of the following unless otherwise required by EIFS manufacturer or authorities having jurisdiction: 1. Asphalt Felt: No.15, complying with ASTM D 226 Type I. 2. Air Retarder: Air- and water -resistive sheet complying with ASTM E 1677 Type I, with MINIMUM vapor permeance of 20 perms (1150 ng/(s m sq Pa)); furnished or approved by EIFS manufacturer. 2.04 ACCESSORY MATERIALS A. Insulation Fasteners: Fastener and plate system appropriate for substrate and as recommended by EIFS manufacturer. B. Trim: EIFS manufacturer's standard PVC or galvanized steel trim accessories, as required for a complete project and including starter track. C. Sealant Materials: Type as specified in Section 07900. PART 3 EXECUTION 07128 / Navarro West Center 07240 - EXTERIOR INSULATION AND FINISH SYSTEMS Navarro West Center Welbourne Drive and Navarro Drive 3.01 GENERAL For Permit and Pricing March 12th, 2008 A. Install in accordance with EIFS manufacturer's instructions and ASTM C 1397. B. Where different requirements appear in either document, comply with the most stringent. C. Neither of these documents supercedes the provisions of the Contract Documents that define the contractual relationships between the parties or the scope of work. 3.02 INSTALLATION - WATER -RESISTIVE BARRIER A. Mechanically attach sheet materials to substrate using fasteners and fastener spacing recommended by EIFS manufacturer. B. Seal all substrate transitions and intersections with other materials with flashing tape, to form continuous water -resistive barrier on exterior of sheathing. C. At door and window openings, apply flashing tape to seal water -resistive barrier to rough opening structure before installation of metal flashings, sills, or frames. D. Lap flashing tape at least 2 inches (50 mm) on each side of joint or transition. E. Install drainage layer or spacers after flashing tape has been completed. 3.03 INSTALLATION - INSULATION A. Install in accordance with manufacturer's instructions. B. Install back wrap reinforcing mesh at all openings and terminations that are not to be protected with trim. C. On wall surfaces, install boards vertically. On horizontal surfaces, install boards D. Place boards in a method to maximize tight joints. Stagger vertical joints and interlock at comers. Butt edges and ends tight to adjacent board and to protrusions. Achieve a continuous flush insulation surface, with no gaps in excess of 1/16 inch (1.6 mm). E. Rasp irregularities off surface of installed insulation board. F. Mechanical Fastening: Space fasteners as recommended by EIFS manufacturer. 3.04 INSTALLATION - FINISH A. Base Coat: Apply in thickness as necessary to fully embed reinforcing mesh, wrinkle free, including back -wrap at all terminations of the EIFS. Install reinforcing fabric as recommended by EIFS manufacturer. B. Apply finish coat after base coat has dried not less than 24 hours and finish to a uniform texture and color. C. Finish Coat Thickness: 1/16 inch (1.5 mm). D. Apply sealant at finish perimeter and expansion joints in accordance with Section 07900. 3.05 CLEANING AND PROTECTION A. Do not permit finish surface to become soiled or damaged. B. Remove excess and waste EIFS materials from project site. C. Clean EIFS surfaces and work areas of foreign materials resulting from EIFS operations. END OF SECTION 07128 / Navarro West Center 07240 - 4EXTERIOR INSULATION AND FINISH SYSTEMS Navarro West Center Welbourne Drive and Navarro Drive SECTION 07411 PREFORMED METAL ROOF PANELS PART1 GENERAL 1.01 SECTION INCLUDES A. Architectural roofing system of preformed steel panels. B. Fastening system. C. Factory finishing. D. Accessories and miscellaneous components. 1.02 RELATED SECTIONS A. Section 07900 - Joint Sealers: Field -installed sealants. 1.03 SUBMITTALS For Permit and Pricing March 12th, 2008 A. See Section 01300 - Administrative Requirements, for submittal procedures. B. Shop Drawings: Include layouts of roof panels, details of edge and penetration conditions, spacing and type of connections, flashings, underlayments, and special conditions. 1. Show work to be field -fabricated or field -assembled. C. Test Reports: Indicate compliance of preformed metal roofing system to specified requirements. D. Warranty: Submit specified manufacturer's warranty and ensure that forms have been completed in Owner's name and are registered with manufacturer. 1.04 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Manufacturer Qualifications: Company specializing in the manufacture of roofing systems similar to those required for this project, with not less than 5 years of documented experience. 1.05 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. Store roofing panels on project site as recommended by manufacturer to minimize damage to panels prior to installation. 1.06 WARRANTY A. See Section 01780 - Closeout Submittals, for additional warranty requirements. B. Finish Warranty: Provide manufacturer's special warranty covering failure of factory -applied exterior finish on metal roof panels and agreeing to repair or replace panels that show evidence of finish degradation, including significant fading, chalking, cracking, or peeling within specified warranty period of 5 year period from date of Substantial Completion. C. Waterproofing Warranty: Provide manufacturer's warranty for weathertightness of roofing system, including agreement to repair or replace roofing that fails to keep out water within specified warranty period of 5 years from date of Substantial Completion. PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.01 MANUFACTURERS A. Design is based on 1" seam at 1" o.c., manufactured by _Berridge B. Substitutions: See Section 01600 -Product Requirements. 2.02 STRUCTURAL ROOF PANELS 07128 / Navarro West Center 07411 -1 PREFORMED METAL ROOF PANELS Navarro West Center Welbourne Drive and Navarro Drive For Permit and Pricing March 12th, 2008 A. Engineering: Provide panel assemblies designed to safely support design loads at support spacing indicated, with deflection not to exceed 1/180 of the span when tested in accordance with ASTM E 1592. B. Performance Requirements: Provide complete roofing assemblies, including roof panels, clips, fasteners, connectors, and miscellaneous accessories, tested for conformance to the following minimum standards: 1. Overall: Complete weathertight system tested and approved in accordance with ASTM E 1592. 2. Thermal Movement: Design system to accommodate without deformation anticipated thermal movement over ambient temperature range of 100 degrees F (56 degrees C). C. Metal Roofing: Factory -formed panels with factory -applied finish. 1. Texture: Smooth. 2. Width: Maximum panel coverage of 16 inches (406 mm). 2.03 ARCHITECTURAL ROOF PANELS A. Performance Requirements: Provide complete engineered system complying with specified requirements and capable of remaining weathertight while withstanding anticipated movement of substrate and thermally induced movement of roofing system. B. Metal Roofing: Factory -formed panels with factory -applied finish. 1. Steel Panels: a. Zinc -coated steel conforming to ASTM A 653/A 653M; minimum G60 (Z180) galvanizing. b. Aluminum -zinc alloy -coated steel conforming to ASTM A 792/A 792M; minimum AZ50 (AZM150) coating. c. Aluminum -coated steel conforming to ASTM A 463/A 463M; minimum Type 2 T2-65 (T2M-200) coating. d. Steel Thickness: Minimum 0.023 inch (0.584 mm). 2. Profile: Standing seam, with minimum 1.0 inch (25 mm) seam height; concealed fastener system for field seaming with special tool. 3. Texture: Smooth. 4. Length: Full length of roof slope, without lapped horizontal joints. 5. Width: Maximum panel coverage of 12 inches (305 mm). 2.04 ATTACHMENT SYSTEM A. Concealed System: Provide manufacturer's standard stainless steel or nylon -coated aluminum concealed anchor clips designed for specific roofing system and engineered to meet performance requirements, including anticipated thermal movement. 2.05 PANEL FINISH 2.06 ACCESSORIES AND MISCELLANEOUS ITEMS A. Miscellaneous Sheet Metal Items: Provide flashings, gutters, downspouts, trim, moldings, closure strips, preformed crickets, caps, and equipment curbs of the same material, thickness, and finish as used for the roofing panels. Items completely concealed after installation may optionally be made of stainless steel. B. Rib and Ridge Closures: Provide prefabricated, close -fitting components of steel with corrosion resistant finish, closed -cell synthetic rubber, neoprene, or PVC, or combination steel and closed -cell foam. C. Sealants: As specified in Section 07900. 1. Exposed sealant must cure to rubber -like consistency. 2. Concealed sealant must be non -hardening type. 07128 / Navarro West Center 07411 -2 PREFORMED METAL ROOF PANELS Navarro West Center Welbourne Drive and Navarro Drive For Permit and Pricing March 12th, 2008 D. Framing: 1. 1 1/2" x 1 1/2" & 1 1/2" x 3" annodized aluminum framing. 2. Designed to withstand 3 second gust of 90 mph. 3. Anchor to building design by Fabricator. 4. All frame joints welded, ground smooth and galvanized paint to match framing surface. 2.07 FABRICATION A. Panels: Fabricate panels and accessory items at factory, using manufacturer's standard processes as required to achieve specified appearance and performance requirements. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 PREPARATION A. Coordinate roofing work with provisions for roof drainage, flashing, trim, penetrations, and other adjoining work to assure that the completed roof will be free of leaks. B. Separate dissimilar metals by applying a bituminous coating, self -adhering rubberized asphalt sheet, or other permanent method approved by roof panel manufacturer. C. Where metal will be in contact with wood or other absorbent material subject to wetting, seal joints with sealing compound and apply one coat of heavy -bodied bituminous paint. 3.02 INSTALLATION A. Overall: Install roofing system in accordance with approved shop drawings and panel manufacturer's instructions and recommendations, as applicable to specific project conditions. Anchor all components of roofing system securely in place while allowing for thermal and structural movement. 1. Install roofing system with concealed clips and fasteners, except as otherwise recommended by manufacturer for specific circumstances. 2. Minimize field cutting of panels. Where field cutting is absolutely required, use methods that will not distort panel profiles. Use of torches for field cutting is absolutely prohibited. B. Accessories: Install all components required for a complete roofing assembly, including flashings, gutters, downspouts, trim, moldings, closure strips, preformed crickets, caps, equipment curbs, rib closures, ridge closures, and similar roof accessory items. C. Roof Panels: Install panels in strict accordance with manufacturer's instructions, minimizing transverse joints except at junction with penetrations. END OF SECTION 07128 / Navarro West Center 07411 -3 PREFORMED METAL ROOF PANELS Navarro West Center Welbourne Drive and Navarro Drive SECTION 07550 MODIFIED BITUMINOUS MEMBRANE ROOFING For Permit and Pricing March 12th, 2008 PART1 GENERAL 1.01 SECTION INCLUDES A. Modified bituminous roofing membrane, conventional application. B. Insulation; flat and tapered. C. Vapor retarders. D. Base flashings. E. Roofing cant strips, accessories, roofing expansion joints, and walkway pads. 1.02 REFERENCES A. ASTM C 208 - Standard Specification for Cellulosic Fiber Insulating Board; 1995 (Reapproved 2001). B. ASTM C 1289 - Standard Specification for Faced Rigid Cellular Polyisocyanurate Thermal Insulation Board; 2006. C. NRCA ML104 - The NRCA Roofing and Waterproofing Manual; National Roofing Contractors Association; Fifth Edition, with interim updates. 1.03 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Perform work in accordance with NRCA Roofing and Waterproofing Manual and manufacturer's instructions. 1.04 PROJECT CONDITIONS A. Coordinate the work with installation of associated flashings and counterflashings installed by other sections as the work of this section proceeds. B. Do not apply roofing membrane when environmental conditions are outside the ranges recommended by manufacturer. C. Do not apply roofing membrane during unsuitable weather. D. Do not apply roofing membrane when ambient temperature is below 40 degrees F (5 degrees C). E. Do not apply roofing membrane to damp or frozen deck surface or when precipitation is expected or occurring. F. Do not expose materials vulnerable to water or sun damage in quantities greater than can be weatherproofed the same day. 1.05 WARRANTY A. See Section 01780 -Closeout Submittals, for additional warranty requirements. B. Correct defective Work within a 1 year period after Date of Substantial Completion. PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.01 MANUFACTURERS A. Membrane Materials: 1. GAF Materials Corporation: www.gaf.com. 2. Firestone Building Products Co: www.firestonebpco.com. 07128 / Navarro West Center 07550 - MODIFIED BITUMINOUS MEMBRANE ROOFING Navarro West Center For Permit and Pricing Welbourne Drive and Navarro Drive March 12th, 2008 3. Substitutions: See Section 01600 - Product Requirements. B. Insulation: 1. Atlas Roofing Corporation: www.atlasroofing.com. 2. Dow Chemical Co: www.dow.com. 3. Owens Coming Corp: www.owenscorning.com. 4. Substitutions: See Section 01600 - Product Requirements. 2.02 ROOFING -CONVENTIONAL APPLICATION A. Modified Bituminous Roofing: Two-ply membrane, with insulation. B. Roofing Assembly Requirements: C. Acceptable Insulation Types - Constant Thickness Application: Any of the types specified. 1. Single layer of polyisocyanu rate board. D. Acceptable Insulation Types - Tapered Application: Any of the types specified. 1. Uniform thickness cellulose board covered with tapered board as required per plans and slope. 2.03 MEMBRANE AND SHEET MATERIALS A. Membrane: Polymer modified asphalt, reinforced with non -woven fabric; granule surfaced; with the following characteristics: B. Flexible Flashing Material: Same material as membrane. 2.04 INSULATION A. Cellulose Fiber Board Insulation: ASTM C 208, Type II; one faces finished with mineral fiber, asphalt and kraft paper, with the following characteristics: B. Polyisocyanurate Board Insulation: Rigid cellular foam, complying with ASTM C 1289, Type I, aluminum foil both faces; Class 1, non -reinforced foam core, and with the following characteristics: PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 EXAMINATION A. Verify that surfaces and site conditions are ready to receive work. B. Verify deck is supported and secure. C. Verify deck is clean and smooth, flat, free of depressions, waves, or projections, properly sloped and suitable for installation of roof system. D. Verify deck surfaces are dry and free of snow or ice. E. Verify that roof openings, curbs, and penetrations through roof are solidly set, and cant strips are in place. 3.02 INSULATION INSTALLATION -CONVENTIONAL APPLICATION A. Attachment of Insulation: 1. Mechanically fasten first layer of insulation to deck in accordance with roofing manufacturer's instructions and Factory Mutual requirements. B. Attachment of Insulation: Mechanically fasten insulation to deck in accordance with roofing manufacturer's instructions and Factory Mutual requirements. 07128 / Navarro West Center 07550 - MODIFIED BITUMINOUS MEMBRANE ROOFING Navarro West Center Welbourne Drive and Navarro Drive For Permit and Pricing March 12th, 2008 C. Place tapered insulation to the required slope pattern in accordance with manufacturer's instructions. D. On metal deck, place boards parallel to flutes with insulation board edges bearing on deck flutes. E. Lay boards with edges in moderate contact without forcing. Cut insulation to fit neatly to perimeter blocking and around penetrations through roof. F. Do not apply more insulation than can be covered with membrane in same day. 3.03 MEMBRANE APPLICATION A. Apply membrane in accordance with manufacturer's instructions. B. Apply membrane; lap and seal edges and ends permanently waterproof. C. Apply smooth, free from air pockets, wrinkles, fish -mouths, or tears. Ensure full bond of membrane to substrate. D. At end of day's operation, install waterproof cut-off. Remove cut-off before resuming roofing. E. At intersections with vertical surfaces: 1. Extend membrane over cant strips and up a minimum of 8 inches (200 mm) onto vertical surfaces. 2. Apply flexible flashing over membrane. F. Around roof penetrations, mop in and seal flanges and flashings with flexible flashing. G. Coordinate installation of roof drains and sumps and related flashings. 3.04 PROTECTION OF FINISHED WORK A. Protect installed roofing and flashings from construction operations. B. Where traffic must continue over finished roof membrane, protect surfaces using durable materials. END OF SECTION 07128 / Navarro West Center 07550 - 910DIFIED BITUMINOUS MEMBRANE ROOFING Navarro West Center Welbourne Drive and Navarro Drive SECTION 01620 SHEET METAL FLASHING AND TRIM For Permit and Pricing March 12th, 2008 PART1 GENERAL 1.01 SECTION INCLUDES A. Fabricated sheet metal items, including flashings, counterflashings, gutters, downspouts, sheet metal roofing, , and other items indicated in Schedule. 1.02 RELATED SECTIONS A. Section 04816 - Masonry Veneer: Through -wall flashings in masonry. B. Section 07510 - Built -Up Bituminous Membrane Roofing: Roofing system. C. Section 07611 - Custom Sheet Metal Roofing. D. Section 07900 - Joint Sealers. 1.03 REFERENCES A. ASTM A 653/A 653M - Standard Specification for Steel Sheet, Zinc -Coated (Galvanized) or Zinc -Iron Alloy -Coated (Galvannealed) by the Hot -Dip Process; 2006a. B. ASTM A 666 - Standard Specification for Annealed or Cold -Worked Austenitic Stainless Steel Sheet, Strip, Plate, and Flat Bar; 2003. C. ASTM B 32 - Standard Specification for Solder Metal; 2004. D. ASTM B 749 - Standard Specification for Lead and Lead Alloy Strip, Sheet, and Plate Products; 2003. E. ASTM D 4586 - Standard Specification for Asphalt Roof Cement, Asbestos -Free; 2000 (Reapproved 2006). F. SMACNA (ASMM) - Architectural Sheet Metal Manual; Sheet Metal and Air Conditioning Contractors' National Association; 2003. 1.04 SUBMITTALS A. See Section 01300 -Administrative Requirements, for submittal procedures. B. Shop Drawings: Indicate material profile, jointing pattern, jointing details, fastening methods, flashings, terminations, and installation details. C. Samples: Submit two samples 6 x 6 inch (__x mm) in size illustrating metal finish color. 1.05 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Perform work in accordance with SMACNA Architectural Sheet Metal Manual requirements and standard details, except as otherwise indicated. B. Fabricator and Installer Qualifications: Company specializing in sheet metal work with two years of experience. 1.06 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. Stack material to prevent twisting, bending, and abrasion, and to provide ventilation. Slope metal sheets to ensure drainage. B. Prevent contact with materials which may cause discoloration or staining. PART 2 PRODUCTS 07128 / Navarro West Center 07620 - 1 SHEET METAL FLASHING AND TRIM Navarro West Center Welbourne Drive and Navarro Drive For Permit and Pricing March 12th, 2008 2.01 SHEET MATERIALS A. Galvanized Steel: ASTM A 653/A 653M, with G90/Z275 zinc coating; minimum 0.02 inch (0.6 mm) thick base metal. B. Pre -Finished Galvanized Steel: ASTM A 653/A 653M, with G90/Z275 zinc coating; minimum 0.02 inch (0.6 mm) thick base metal, shop pre -coated with fluoropolymer coating. C. Lead: ASTM B 749, 2.5 Ib/sq ft (0.99 mm) thick. D. Stainless Steel: ASTM A 666 Type 304, soft temper,.0187 inch mm) thick; smooth 2D finish. 2.02 ACCESSORIES A. Fasteners: Galvanized steel, with soft neoprene washers. B. Underlayment: Polyethylene, 6 mils. C. Slip Sheet: Rosin sized building paper. D. Primer: Zinc chromate type. E. Protective Backing Paint: Zinc molybdate alkyd. F. Sealant: Type ES3 specified in Section 07900. G. Plastic Cement: ASTM D 4586, Type I. H. Solder: ASTM B 32; Sn50 (50/50) type. 2.03 FABRICATION A. Form sections true to shape, accurate in size, square, and free from distortion or defects. B. Fabricate cleats of same material as sheet, continuous. C. Form pieces in longest possible lengths. D. Hem exposed edges on underside 1/2 inch (13 mm); miter and seam comers. E. Form material with flat lock seams, except where otherwise indicated. At moving joints, use sealed lapped, bayonet -type or interlocking hooked seams. F. Fabricate comers from one piece with minimum 18 inch (450 mm) long legs; seam for rigidity, seal with sealant. G. Fabricate vertical faces with bottom edge formed outward 1/4 inch (6 mm) and hemmed to form drip. H. Fabricate flashings to allow toe to extend 2 inches (50 mm) over roofing gravel. Retum and brake edges. 2.04 GUTTER AND DOWNSPOUT FABRICATION A. Gutters: SMACNA Architectural Sheet Metal Manual, Rectangular profile. B. Downspouts: Rectangular profile. C. Gutters and Downspouts: Size indicated. D. Accessories: Profiled to suit gutters and downspouts. 1. Anchorage Devices: In accordance with SMACNA requirements. 2. Gutter Supports: Brackets. 3. Downspout Supports: Brackets. 07128 / Navarro West Center 07620 - 2 SHEET METAL FLASHING AND TRIM Navarro West Center Welbourne Drive and Navarro Drive For Permit and Pricing March 12th, 2008 E. Seal metal joints. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 EXAMINATION A. Verify roof openings, curbs, pipes, sleeves, ducts, and vents through roof are solidly set, reglets in place, and nailing strips located. B. Verify roofing termination and base flashings are in place, sealed, and secure. 3.02 PREPARATION A. Install starter and edge strips, and cleats before starting installation. B. Back paint concealed metal surfaces with protective backing paint to a minimum dry film thickness of 15 mil (0.4 mm). 3.03 INSTALLATION A. Insert flashings into reglets to form tight fit. Secure in place with lead wedges. Pack remaining spaces with lead wool. Seal flashings into reglets with sealant. B. Secure flashings in place using concealed fasteners. Use exposed fasteners only where permitted. C. Apply plastic cement compound between metal flashings and felt flashings. D. Fit flashings tight in place. Make comers square, surfaces true and straight in planes, and lines accurate to profiles. E. Solder metal joints for full metal surface contact. After soldering, wash metal clean with neutralizing solution and rinse with water. F. Secure gutters and downspouts in place using concealed fasteners. G. Slope gutters 1/4 inch per foot (20 mm/m) minimum. 3.04 SCHEDULE A. Gutters and Downspouts: Prefinished galvanized steel, 0.0217 inch thick. B. Scuppers: Prefinished glavanized steel, 0.0217 inch thick. C. Coping, Cap, Parapet, Sill and Ledge Flashings: Prefinished galvanized steel, 0.0396 inch thick. END OF SECTION 07128 / Navarro West Center 07620 - 3 SHEET METAL FLASHING AND TRIM -v Navarro West Center Welbourne Drive and Navarro Drive SECTION 07631 GUTTERS AND DOWNSPOUTS For Permit and Pricing March 12th, 2008 PART1 GENERAL 1.01 SECTION INCLUDES A. Pre -finished aluminum gutters and downspouts. 1.02 RELATED SECTIONS 1.03 REFERENCES A. ASTM A 653/A 653M - Standard Specification for Steel Sheet, Zinc -Coated (Galvanized) or Zinc -Iron Alloy -Coated (Galvannealed) by the Hot -Dip Process; 2006a. PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.01 MANUFACTURERS A. Gutters and Downspouts: 1. Substitutions: See Section 01600 - Product Requirements. 2.02 MATERIALS A. Pre -Finished Galvanized Steel Sheet: ASTM A 653/A 653M, with G90/Z275 zinc coating; minimum 0.02 inch (0.6 mm) thick base metal. 1. Finish: Shop pre -coated with modified silicone coating. 2. Color: As scheduled. 2.03 COMPONENTS A. Gutters: CDA rectangular style profile. B. Downspouts: CDA Rectangular profile. C. Anchors and Supports: Profiled to suit gutters and downspouts. 1. Anchoring Devices: In accordance with CDA requirements. 2. Gutter Supports: Brackets. 3. Downspout Supports: Brackets. D. Fasteners: Galvanized steel, with soft neoprene washers. 2.04 ACCESSORIES 2.05 FABRICATION A. Form gutters and downspouts of profiles and size indicated. B. Fabricate with required connection pieces. C. Form sections square, true, and accurate in size, in maximum possible lengths, free of distortion or defects detrimental to appearance or performance. Allow for expansion at joints. D. Hem exposed edges of metal. E. Fabricate gutter and downspout accessories; seal watertight. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 INSTALLATION A. Install gutters, downspouts, and accessories in accordance with manufacturer's instructions. 1 07128 / Navarro West Center 07631 -1 GUTTERS AND DOWNSPOUTS Navarro West Center For Permit and Pricing Welbourne Drive and Navarro Drive March 12th, 2008 B. Slope gutters inch per foot ( mm/m), _ percent minimum. END OF SECTION 07128 / Navarro West Center 07631 - 2 GUTTERS AND DOWNSPOUTS P, C Navarro West Center Welbourne Drive and Navarro Drive SECTION 07720 ROOF ACCESSORIES For Permit and Pricing March 12th, 2008 PART1 GENERAL 1.01 SECTION INCLUDES A. Manufactured curbs, equipment rails, and pedestals. PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.01 MANUFACTURED CURBS A. Manufactured Curbs, Equipment Rails, and Other Roof Mounting Assemblies: Factory -assembled hollow sheet metal construction with fully mitered and welded comers, integral counterflashing, internal reinforcing, and top side and edges formed to shed water. 1. Manufacture curb bottom and mounting flanges for installation directly on roof deck, not on insulation; match slope and configuration of roof deck. 2. Provide the layouts and configurations shown on the drawings. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 EXAMINATION A. Do not begin installation until substrates have been properly prepared. B. If substrate preparation is the responsibility of another installer, notify Architect of unsatisfactory preparation before proceeding. 3.02 INSTALLATION A. Install in accordance with manufacturer's instructions, in manner that maintains roofing weather integrity. 07128 / Navarro West Center END OF SECTION 07720 - 1 ROOF ACCESSORIES Navarro West Center Welbourne Drive and Navarro Drive SECTION 07900 JOINT SEALERS For Permit and Pricing March 12th, 2008 PART1 GENERAL 1.01 SECTION INCLUDES A. Sealants and joint backing. 1.02 RELATED SECTIONS A. Section 08800 - Glazing: Glazing sealants and accessories. 1.03 REFERENCES A. ASTM C 834 - Standard Specification for Latex Sealants; 2005. B. ASTM C 920 - Standard Specification for Elastomeric Joint Sealants; 2005. C. ASTM C 1193 - Standard Guide for Use of Joint Sealants; 2005a. D. ASTM D 1667 - Standard Specification for Flexible Cellular Materials--Poly(Vinyl Chloride) Foam (Closed -Cell); 2005. E. SCAQMD 1168 - South Coast Air Quality Management District Rule No.1168; current edition; www.aqmd.gov. 1.04 SUBMITTALS A. See Section 01300 -Administrative Requirements, for submittal procedures. B. Product Data: Provide data indicating sealant chemical characteristics. C. Samples: Submit two samples, 1/4 x 2 inch (_x mm) in size illustrating sealant colors for selection. 1.05 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Applicator Qualifications: Company specializing in performing the work of this section with minimum two years experience. 1.06 ENVIRONMENTAL REQUIREMENTS A. Maintain temperature and humidity recommended by the sealant manufacturer during and after installation. PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.01 SEALANTS A. Sealants and Primers - General: Provide only products having lower volatile organic compound (VOC) content than required by South Coast Air Quality Management District Rule No.1168. B. Type _ - General Purpose Interior Sealant: Acrylic emulsion latex; ASTM C 834, Type OP, Grade NF single component, paintable. 1. Color: Standard colors matching finished surfaces. a. Tremco Acrylic Latex 834 manufactured by Tremco, Inc. 2. Applications: Use for: a. Interior wall and ceiling control joints. b. Painted wood trim. c. Other interior joints for which no other type of sealant is indicated. 07128 / Navarro West Center 07900 - 1 JOINT SEALERS Navarro West Center For Permit and Pricing Welbourne Drive and Navarro Drive March 12th, 2008 C. Type _ - Bathtub/Tile Sealant: White silicone; ASTM C 920, Uses 1, M and A; single component, mildew resistant. D. Rhodorsil 6C manufactured by Rhone-Poulenc, Inc. 1. Applications: Use for: a. Joints between plumbing fixtures and floor and wall surfaces. b. Joints between kitchen and bath countertops and wall surfaces. E. Type _ - Concrete Paving Joint Sealant: Polyurethane, self -leveling; ASTM C 920, Class 25, Uses T, I, M and A; multi- component. 1. Color: Color as selected. a. Dymeric manufactured by Tremco Inc. 2. Applications: Use for: a. Joints in sidewalks and vehicular paving. F. Type _ - Butyl Sealant: ASTM C 920, Grade NS, Class 12-1 /2, Uses NT, M, A, G, O; single component, solvent release, non -skinning, non -sagging. 1. Applications: Use for: a. Under thresholds at doors in exterior walls. G. Type _ - Nonsag Polyurethane Sealant: ASTM C 920, Grade NS, Class 25, Uses NT, M, A, O; single component, chemical curing, non -staining, non bleeding, non -sagging type. 1. Color: Standard colors matching finished surfaces. a. Dymonic manufactured by Tremco Inc. 2. Applications: Use for: a. As specified in Section 07620 - Sheet Metal Falshing and Trim. H. Type _ - Silicone Sealant: ASTM C 920, Grade NS, Class 25, Uses NT, A, G, M, O; single component, neutral curing, non -sagging, non -staining, fungus resistant, non -bleeding. 1. Color: Standard colors matching finished surfaces. a. Rhodorsil 5C manufactured by Rhone-Poulenc, Inc. 2. Movement Capability: Plus and minus 25 percent. 3. Service Temperature Range: -65 to 180 degrees F (-54 to 82 degrees C). 4. Shore A Hardness Range: 15 to 35. 5. Applications: Use for: a. Exterior joints invertical surfaces of masonry and exterior insulation and finish system. b. Interior and exterior perimeter joints of metal frames in exterior walls. 2.02 .ACCESSORIES A. Primer: Non -staining type, recommended by sealant manufacturer to suit application. B. Joint Backing: Round foam rod compatible with sealant; ASTM D 1667, closed cell PVC; oversized 30 to 50 percent larger than joint width. C. Bond Breaker: Pressure sensitive tape recommended by sealant manufacturer to suit application. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 EXAMINATION A. Verify that substrate surfaces are ready to receive work. B. Verify that joint backing and release tapes are compatible with sealant. 3.02 PREPARATION A. Remove loose materials and foreign matter which might impair adhesion of sealant. 07128 / Navarro West Center 07900 = 2 JOINT SEALERS Navarro West Center For Permit and Pricing Welbourne Drive and Navarro Drive March 12th, 2008 B. Clean and prime joints in accordance with manufacturer's instructions. C. Perform preparation in accordance with manufacturer's instructions and ASTM C 1193. D. Protect elements surrounding the work of this section from damage or disfigurement. 3.03 INSTALLATION A. Perform work in accordance with sealant manufacturer's requirements for preparation of surfaces and material installation instructions. B. Perform installation in accordance with ASTM C 1193. C. Measure joint dimensions and size joint backers to achieve width -to -depth ratio, neck dimension, and surface bond area as recommended by manufacturer, except where specific dimensions are indicated. D. Install bond breaker where joint backing is not used. E. Install sealant free of air pockets, foreign embedded matter, ridges, and sags. F. Apply sealant within recommended application temperature ranges. Consult manufacturer when sealant cannot be applied within these temperature ranges. G. Tool joints concave. 3.04 CLEANING A. Clean adjacent soiled surfaces. 3.05 PROTECTION OF FINISHED WORK A. Protect sealants until cured. 1 07128 / Navarro West Center END OF SECTION 07900 - 3 JOINT SEALERS Navarro West Center Welbourne Drive and Navarro Drive SECTION 08110 STEEL DOORS AND FRAMES PART1 GENERAL 1.01 SECTION INCLUDES A. Non -fire -rated steel doors and frames. B. Thermally insulated steel doors. 1.02 RELATED SECTIONS A. Section 08800 - Glazing: Glass for doors and borrowed lites. For Permit and Pricing March 12th, 2008 1.03 REFERENCES A. ANSI A250.8 - SDI-100 Recommended Specifications for Standard Steel Doors and Frames; 2003. B. ANSI A250.10 - Test Procedure and Acceptance Criteria for Prime Painted Steel Surfaces for Steel Doors and Frames; 1998 (R2004). C. ASTM A 653/A 653M - Standard Specification for Steel Sheet, Zinc -Coated (Galvanized) or Zinc -Iron Alloy -Coated (Galvannealed) by the Hot -Dip Process; 2006a. D. NAAMM HMMA 840 - Guide Specifications for Installation and Storage of Hollow Metal Doors and Frames; The National Association of Architectural Metal Manufacturers; 1999. 1.04 SUBMITTALS A. See Section 01300 -Administrative Requirements for submittal procedures. B. Product Data: Materials and details of design and construction, hardware locations, reinforcement type and locations, anchorage and fastening methods, and finishes; and one copy of referenced grade standard. C. Shop Drawings: Details of each opening, showing elevations, glazing, frame profiles, and identifying location of different finishes, if any. PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.01 DOORS AND FRAMES A. Requirements for All Doors and Frames: B. Combined Requirements: If a particular door and frame unit is indicated to comply with more than one type of requirement, comply with all the specified requirements for each type; for instance, an exterior door that is also indicated as being sound -rated must comply with the requirements specified for exterior doors and for sound -rated doors; where two requirements conflict, comply with the most stringent. 2.02 STEEL DOORS I A. Exterior Doors: 1. Grade: ANSI A250.8 Level 4, physical performance Level A, Model 2, seamless. 2. Core: Polystyrene foam. 3. Top Closures for Outswinging Doors: Flush with top of faces and edges. 4. Galvanizing: All components hot -dipped zinc -iron alloy -coated (galvannealed) in accordance with ASTM A 653/A 653M, with manufacturer's standard coating thickness. 5. Texture: Smooth faces. 6. Weatherstripping: Integral, recessed into door edge or frame. 07128 / Navarro West Center 08110 - 1 STEEL DOORS AND FRAMES Navarro West Center For Permit and Pricing Welbourne Drive and Navarro Drive March 12th, 2008 7. Finish: Factory primed, for field finishing. B. Interior Doors, Non -Fire -Rated: 2.03 STEEL FRAMES A. General: 1. Comply with the requirements of grade specified for corresponding door, except: a. ANSI A250.8 Level 4 Doors: 12 gage frames. 2. Finish: Same as for door. 3. Provide mortar guard boxes for hardware cut-outs in frames to be installed in masonry or to be grouted. 4. Frames in Masonry Walls: Size to suit masonry coursing with head member 4 inches (100 mm) high to fill opening without cutting masonry units. 5. Frames Wider than 48 Inches (1200 mm): Reinforce with steel channel fitted tightly into frame head, flush with top. B. Exterior Door Frames: Face welded, seamless with joints filled. 1. Galvanizing: All components hot -dipped zinc -iron alloy -coated (galvannealed) in accordance with ASTM A 653/A 653M, with manufacturer's standard coating thickness. 2. Weatherstripping: Separate, see Section 08710. C. Interior Door Frames, Non -Fire -Rated: Knock -down type. 2.04 ACCESSORY MATERIALS A. Glazing: As specified in Section 08800, factory installed. B. Grout for Frames: Portland cement grout of maximum 4-inch slump for hand troweling; thinner pumpable grout is prohibited. 2.05 FINISH MATERIALS A. Primer: Rust -inhibiting, complying with ANSI A250.10, door manufacturer's standard. B. Bituminous Coating: Asphalt emulsion or other high -build, water-resistant, resilient coating. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 PREPARATION A. Coat inside of frames to be installed in masonry or to be grouted, with bituminous coating, prior to installation. 3.02 INSTALLATION A. Install in accordance with the requirements of the specified door grade standard and NAAMM HMMA 840. B. Coordinate frame anchor placement with wall construction. C. Grout frames in masonry construction, using hand trowel methods; brace frames so that pressure of grout before setting will not deform frames. D. Coordinate installation of hardware. E. Coordinate installation of glazing. F. Touch up damaged factory finishes. 3.03 ERECTION TOLERANCES A. Clearances Between Door and Frame: As specified in ANSI A250.8. 07128 / Navarro West Center 08110 - 2 STEEL DOORS AND FRAMES Navarro West Center For Permit and Pricing Welbourne Drive and Navarro Drive March 12th, 2008 B. Maximum Diagonal Distortion: 1/16 in (1.5 mm) measured with straightedge, corner to corner. 3.04 ADJUSTING A. Adjust for smooth and balanced door movement. END OF SECTION 07128 / Navarro West Center 08110 - 3 STEEL DOORS AND FRAMES Navarro West Center Welbourne Drive and Navarro Drive SECTION 08211 FLUSH WOOD DOORS PART1 GENERAL 1.01 SECTION INCLUDES A. Flush wood doors; flush configuration; non -rated. 1.02 RELATED SECTIONS A. Section 09900 - Paints and Coatings: Site finishing of doors. For Permit and Pricing March 12th, 2008 1.03 REFERENCES A. AWI/AWMAC (QSI) - Architectural Woodwork Quality Standards Illustrated; Architectural Woodwork Institute and Architectural Woodwork Manufacturers Association of Canada; 2006, 8th Ed., Version 2.0. 1.04 SUBMITTALS A. See Section 01300 - Administrative Requirements for submittal procedures. iB. Product Data: Indicate door core materials and construction; veneer species, type and characteristics. C. Specimen warranty. D. Shop Drawings: Illustrate door opening criteria, elevations, sizes, types, swings, undercuts required, special beveling, special blocking for hardware, factory machining criteria. E. Samples: Submit two samples of door construction, 6 x 6 inch L_x mm) in size cut from top comer of door. F. Warranty, executed in Owner's name. 1.05 QUALITY ASSURANCE 1.06 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND PROTECTION A. Package, deliver and store doors in accordance with specified quality standard. B. Accept doors on site in manufacturer's packaging. Inspect for damage. C. Protect doors with resilient packaging sealed with heat shrunk plastic. Do not store in damp or wet areas; or in areas where sunlight might bleach veneer. Seal top and bottom edges with tinted sealer if stored more than one week. Break seal on site to permit ventilation. 1.07 PROJECT CONDITIONS A. Coordinate the work with door opening construction, door frame and door hardware installation. 1.08 WARRANTY A. See Section 01780 -Closeout Submittals for additional warranty requirements. B. Interior Doors: Provide manufacturer's warranty for the life of the installation. C. Include coverage for delamination of veneer, warping beyond specified installation tolerances, defective materials, and telegraphing core construction. PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.01 MANUFACTURERS 07128 / Navarro West Center 08211 - 1 FLUSH WOOD DOORS Navarro West Center Welbourne Drive and Navarro Drive For Permit and Pricing March 12th, 2008 A. Wood Veneer Faced Doors: 1. Eggers Industries: www.eggersindustries.com. 2. Marshfield Door Systems: www.marshfielddoors.com. 3. Substitutions: See Section 01600 - Product Requirements. 2.02 DOORS A. All Doors: See drawings for locations and additional requirements. B. Interior Doors: 1-3/4 inches (44 mm) thick unless otherwise indicated; flush construction. 1. Provide solid core doors at all locations except provide hollow core doors at 2.03 DOOR AND PANEL CORES A. Non -Rated Solid Core and 20 Minute Rated Doors: Type particleboard core (PC), plies and faces as indicated above. B. Hollow Core Doors: Type Standard (SHC/FSHC); plies and faces as indicated above. 2.04 DOOR CONSTRUCTION A. Fabricate doors in accordance with door quality standard specified. B. Cores Constructed with Stiles and Rails: C. Provide solid blocks at lock edge and top of door for closer for hardware reinforcement. D. Fit door edge trim to edge of stiles after applying veneer facing. E. Factory machine doors for hardware other than -surface -mounted hardware, in accordance with hardware requirements and dimensions. F. Factory fit doors for frame opening dimensions identified on shop drawings, with edge clearances in accordance with specified quality standard. G. Provide edge clearances in accordance with AWI Quality Standards Illustrated Section 1700. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 INSTALLATION A. Install doors in accordance with manufacturer's instructions and specified quality standard. B. Use machine tools to cut or drill for hardware. C. Coordinate installation of doors with installation of frames and hardware. 3.02 ADJUSTING A. Adjust doors for smooth and balanced door movement. B. Adjust closers for full closure. END OF SECTION 07128 / Navarro West Center 08211 - 2 FLUSH WOOD DOORS Navarro West Center Welbourne Drive and Navarro Drive SECTION 08331 For Permit and Pricing March 12th, 2008 OVERHEAD COILING DOORS PART1 GENERAL ' 1.01 SECTION INCLUDES A. Overhead coiling doors, operating hardware, exterior, manual operation. 1.02 REFERENCES A. ASTM A 653/A 653M - Standard Specification for Steel Sheet, Zinc -Coated (Galvanized) or Zinc -Iron Alloy -Coated (Galvannealed) by the Hot -Dip Process; 2006a. PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.01 MANUFACTURERS 1 A. Overhead Coiling Doors: 1. Cornell Iron Works, Inc; Product www.cornelliron.com. 2. Substitutions: See Section 01600 -Product Requirements. 2.02 COILING DOORS A. Exterior Coiling Doors: Steel slat curtain. 1. Capable of withstanding positive and negative wind loads of 20 psf (940 Pa), without undue deflection or damage to components. 2. Single thickness slats. 3. Finish: Galvanized. 4. Finish: Factory painted, see drawings color. 5. Guides: Angles; galvanized steel. 6. Hood Enclosure: Manufacturer's standard; primed steel. 7. Manual hand chain lift operation. 8. Mounting: Within framed opening. 2.03 MATERIALS 1 A. Curtain Construction: Interlocking slats. 1. Slat Ends: Alternate slats fitted with end locks to act as wearing surface in guides and to prevent lateral movement. 2. Curtain Bottom: Fitted with angles to provide reinforcement and positive contact in closed position. 3. Weatherstripping: Moisture and rot proof, resilient type, located at jamb edges, bottom of curtain, and where curtain enters hood enclosure of exterior doors. B. Steel Slats: Minimum gage ( mm) ASTM A 653/A 653M galvanized steel sheet. 1. Galvanizing: Minimum G90/Z275 coating. C. Guide Construction: Continuous, of profile to retain door in place with snap -on trim, mounting brackets of same metal. D. Steel Guides: Formed from galvanized steel sheet, gage (_ mm thick); inch (— mm) wide; complying with ASTM A 653/A 653M. 1. Galvanizing: Minimum G90/Z275 coating. E. Hood Enclosure: Intemally reinforced to maintain rigidity and shape. 07128 / Navarro West Center 08331 -1 OVERHEAD COILING DOORS Navarro West Center For Permit and Pricing Welbourne Drive and Navarro Drive March 12th, 2008 F. Roller Shaft Counterbalance: Steel pipe and helical steel spring system, capable of producing torque sufficient to ensure smooth operation of curtain from any position and capable of holding position at mid -travel; with adjustable spring tension; requiring 25 lb (10 kg) nominal force to operate. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 INSTALLATION A. Install units in accordance with manufacturer's instructions. B. Use anchorage devices to securely fasten assembly to wall construction and building framing without distortion or stress. C. Securely and rigidly brace components suspended from structure. Secure guides to structural members only. D. Fit and align assembly including hardware; level and plumb, to provide smooth operation. 3.02 ADJUSTING A. Adjust operating assemblies for smooth and noiseless operation. END OF SECTION 07128 / Navarro West Center 08331 - 2 OVERHEAD COILING DOORS Navarro West Center Welbourne Drive and Navarro Drive SECTION 08410 METAL -FRAMED STOREFRONTS For Permit and Pricing March 12th, 2008 PART1 GENERAL 1.01 SECTION INCLUDES A. Aluminum -framed storefront, with vision glass. B. Aluminum doors. C. Weatherstripping. D. Door hardware. 1.02 RELATED SECTIONS A. Section 07900 - Joint Sealers: Perimeter sealant and back-up materials. B. Section 08710 - Door Hardware: Cylinders. C. Section 08800 - Glazing: Glass and glazing accessories. 1.03 REFERENCES A. AAMA CW-10 - Care and Handling of Architectural Aluminum From Shop to Site; American Architectural Manufacturers Association; 2004. B. AAMA 611 - Voluntary Specification for Anodized Architectural Aluminum; American Architectural Manufacturers Association; 1998. C. AAMA 1503 - Voluntary Test Method for Thermal Transmittance and Condensation Resistance of Windows, Doors and Glazed Wall Sections; American Architectural Manufacturers Association; 1998. D. ASTM A 36/A 36M - Standard Specification for Carbon Structural Steel; 2005. E. ASTM A 123/A 123M - Standard Specification for Zinc (Hot -Dip Galvanized) Coatings on Iron and Steel Products; 2002. F. ASTM B 221 - Standard Specification for Aluminum and Aluminum -Alloy Extruded Bars, Rods, Wire, Profiles, and Tubes; 2006. G. ASTM B 221 M - Standard Specification for Aluminum and Aluminum -Alloy Extruded Bars, Rods, Wire, Profiles, and Tubes [Metric]; 2006. H. ASTM E 283 - Standard Test Method for Determining the Rate of Air Leakage Through Exterior Windows, Curtain Walls, and Doors Under Specified Pressure Differences Across the Specimen; 2004. I. ASTM E 330 - Standard Test Method for Structural Performance of'Exterior Windows, Doors, Skylights and Curtain Walls by Uniform Static Air Pressure Difference; 2002. J. ASTM E 331 - Standard Test Method for Water Penetration of Exterior Windows, Skylights, Doors, and Curtain Walls by Uniform Static Air Pressure Difference; 2000. K. SSPC-Paint 20 - Zinc -Rich Primers (Type I, 'Inorganic," and Type II, "Organic"); Society for Protective Coatings; 2002 (Ed. 2004). 07128 1 Navarro West Center 08410 - 1 METAL -FRAMED STOREFRONTS Navarro West Center Welbourne Drive and Navarro Drive 1.04 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS For Permit and Pricing March 12th, 2008 A. Design and size components to withstand the following load requirements without damage or permanent set, when tested in accordance with ASTM E 330, using loads 1.5 times the design wind loads and 10 second duration of maximum load. 1. Member Deflection: Limit member deflection to flexure limit of glass in any direction, with full recovery of glazing materials. B. Movement: Accommodate movement between storefront and perimeter framing and deflection of lintel, without damage to components or deterioration of seals. C. Air Infiltration: Limit air infiltration through assembly to 0.06 cu ft/min/sq ft (0.3 Us/sq m) of wall area, measured at a reference differential pressure across assembly of 1.57 psf (75 Pa) as measured in accordance with ASTM E 283. D. Condensation Resistance Factor: CRF of 45 when measured in accordance with AAMA 1503.1. E. Water Leakage: None, when measured in accordance with ASTM E 331 with a test pressure difference of 2.86 Ibf/sq ft (140 Pa). F. System Internal Drainage: Drain to the exterior by means of a weep drainage network any water entering joints, condensation occurring in glazing channel, and migrating moisture occurring within system. G. Expansion/Contraction: Provide for expansion and contraction within system components caused by cycling temperature range of 170 degrees F (95 degrees C) over a 12 hour period without causing detrimental effect to system components, anchorages, and other building elements. 1.05 SUBMITTALS A. See Section 01300 - Administrative Requirements, for submittal procedures. B. Product Data: Provide component dimensions, describe components within assembly, anchorage and fasteners, glass and infill, door hardware, internal drainage details. C. Shop Drawings: Indicate system dimensions, framed opening requirements and tolerances, affected related Work, expansion and contraction joint location and details, and field welding required. D. Design Data: Provide framing member structural and physical characteristics, engineering calculations, dimensional limitations. E. Hardware Schedule: Complete itemization of each item of hardware to be provided for each door, cross-referenced to door identification numbers in Contract Documents. F. Samples: Submit two samples 12 x 12 inches (_x mm) in size illustrating finished aluminum surface, glass, infill panels, glazing materials. G. Manufacturer's Certificate: Certify that the products supplied meet or exceed the specified requirements. H. Warranty: Submit manufacturer warranty and ensure forms have been completed in Owner's name and registered with manufacturer. 1.06 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Design structural support framing components under direct supervision of a Professional Structural Engineer experienced in design of this Work and licensed at Texas. 1.07 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND PROTECTION 07128 / Navarro West Center 08410 - 2 METAL -FRAMED STOREFRONTS Navarro West Center Welbourne Drive and Navarro Drive For Permit and Pricing March 12th, 2008 A. Handle products of this section in accordance with AAMA CW-10. B. Protect finished aluminum surfaces with wrapping. Do not use adhesive papers or sprayed coatings which bond to aluminum when exposed to sunlight or weather. 1.08 WARRANTY A. See Section 01780 - Closeout Submittals, for additional warranty requirements. B. Correct defective Work within a two year period after Date of Substantial Completion. C. Provide five year manufacturer warranty against excessive degradation of exterior finish. Include provision for replacement of units with excessive fading, chalking, or flaking. PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.01 MANUFACTURERS A. ; Product B. Other Acceptable Manufacturers: 1. Kawneer Company, Inc: www.kawneer.com. 2. United States Aluminum Corp: www.usalum.com. 3. Vistawall Architectural Products: www.vistawall.com. 4. Substitutions: See Section 01600 - Product Requirements. 2.02 COMPONENTS iA. Aluminum -Framed Storefront: Factory fabricated, factory finished aluminum framing members with infill, and related flashings, anchorage and attachment devices. 1. Finish: Class I natural anodized. B. Aluminum Framing Members: Tubular aluminum sections, drainage holes and internal weep drainage system. 1. Glazing stops: Flush. 2. Cross -Section: 2 x 4-1/2 inch (_x mm) nominal dimension. 3. Structurally Reinforced Members: Extruded aluminum with internal reinforcement of structural steel member. C. Doors: Glazed aluminum. 1. Thickness: 1-3/4 inches (43 mm). 2. Top Rail: 3-1/2 inches( mm) wide. 3. Vertical Stiles: 3-1/2 inches L- mm) wide. 4. Bottom Rail: 6-1/2 inches mm) wide. 5. Glazing Stops: Square. ' 6. Finish: Same as storefront. 2.03 MATERIALS A. Extruded Aluminum: ASTM B 221 (ASTM B 221M). B. Structural Steel Sections: ASTM A 36/A 36M; galvanized in accordance with requirements of ASTM A 123/A 123M. C. Fasteners: Stainless steel. D. Concealed Flashings: 0.018 inch (0.5 mm) thick stainless steel. E. Glass: As specified in Section 08800. F. Glazing Gaskets: Type to suit application to achieve weather, moisture, and air infiltration requirements. 07128 / Navarro West Center 08410 - 3 METAL -FRAMED STOREFRONTS Navarro West Center For Permit and Pricing Welbourne Drive and Navarro Drive March 12th, 2008 G. Glazing Accessories: As specified in Section 08800. H. Touch -Up Primer for Galvanized Steel Surfaces: SSPC-Paint 20, zinc rich. 2.04 FINISHES A. Class I Natural Anodized Finish: AAMA 611 AA-M12C22A41 Clear anodic coating not less than 0.7 mils (0.018 mm) thick. 2.05 HARDWARE A. Weatherstripping: Wool pile, continuous and replaceable; provide on all doors. B. Sill Sweep Strips: Resilient seal type, retracting, of neoprene; provide on all doors. C. Threshold: Extruded aluminum, one piece per door opening, ribbed surface; provide on all doors. D. Pivots: Offset type; top, intermediate, and bottom. 1. Provide on all doors. E. Push/Pull Set: As selected from storefront manufacturer's full range. 1. Provide on all doors. F. Closers: Surface mounted, overhead; ANSI/BHMA A156.4, Grade 1; parallel arm; with automatic hold open and adjustable back check. 1. Provide on all doors. G. Locks: Dead latch with thumbtum inside; keyed cylinder outside. 2.06 FABRICATION A. Fabricate components with minimum clearances and shim spacing around perimeter of assembly, yet enabling installation and dynamic movement of perimeter seal. B. Accurately fit and secure joints and corners. Make joints flush, hairline, and weatherproof. C. Prepare components to receive anchor devices. Fabricate anchors. D. Coat concealed metal surfaces that will be in contact with cementitious materials or dissimilar metals with bituminous paint. E. Arrange fasteners and attachments to conceal from view. F. Reinforce components internally for door hardware. G. Reinforce framing members for imposed loads. H. Finishing: Apply factory finish to all surfaces that will be exposed in completed assemblies. 1. Touch-up surfaces cut during fabrication so that no natural aluminum is visible in completed assemblies, including joint edges. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 INSTALLATION A. Install wall system in accordance with manufacturer's instructions. B. Attach to structure to permit sufficient adjustment to accommodate construction tolerances and other irregularities. C. Provide alignment attachments and shims to permanently fasten system to building structure. D. Align assembly plumb and level, free of warp or twist. Maintain assembly dimensional tolerances, aligning with adjacent work. 07128 / Navarro West Center 08410 - 4 METAL -FRAMED STOREFRONTS Navarro West Center Welbourne Drive and Navarro Drive For Permit and Pricing March 12th, 2008 E. Provide thermal isolation where components penetrate or disrupt building insulation. F. Install sill flashings. Turn up ends and edges; seal to adjacent work to form water tight dam. G. Coordinate attachment and seal of perimeter air and vapor barrier materials. H. Pack fibrous insulation in shim spaces at perimeter of assembly to maintain continuity of thermal barrier. I. Set thresholds in bed of mastic and secure. J. Install hardware using templates provided. K. Install glass and infill panels in accordance with Section 08800, using glazing method required to achieve performance criteria. 3.02 ERECTION TOLERANCES A. Maximum Variation from Plumb: 0.06 inches every 3 ft (1.5 mm/m) non -cumulative or 1/16 inches per 10 ft (1.5 mm/3 m), whichever is less. B. Maximum Misalignment of Two Adjoining Members Abutting in Plane: 1/32 inch (0.8 mm). 3.03 ADJUSTING A. Adjust operating hardware for smooth operation. 3.04 CLEANING AND PROTECTION A. Remove protective material from pre -finished aluminum surfaces. B. Wash down surfaces with a solution of mild detergent in warm water, applied with soft, clean wiping cloths. Take care to remove dirt from comers. Wipe surfaces clean. C. Remove excess sealant by method acceptable to sealant manufacturer. D. Touch-up minor damage to factory applied finish; replace components that cannot be satisfactorily repaired. E. Protect finished work from damage. ' 7128/ Navarro West Center 0 END OF SECTION 08410 - 5 METAL -FRAMED STOREFRONTS Navarro West Center Welbourne Drive and Navarro Drive SECTION 08460 AUTOMATIC ENTRANCE DOORS PART 1 GENERAL 1.01 SECTION INCLUDES A. Automatic sliding doors, with frames. B. Actuators and safety devices. For Permit and Pricing March 12th, 2008 1.02 REFERENCES A. BHMA A156.10 - American National Standard for Power Operated Pedestrian Doors; Builders Hardware Manufacturers Association; 2005 (ANSI/BHMA Al56.10). B. BHMA A156.19 - American National Standard for Power Assist and Low Energy Power Operated Doors; Builders Hardware Manufacturers Association; 2007 (ANSI/BHMA Al56.19). C. NEMA MG 1 - Motors and Generators; National .Electrical Manufacturers Association; 2006. D. NFPA 70 - National Electrical Code; National Fire Protection Association; 2005. E. UL 325 - Standard for Door, Drapery, Gate, Louver, and Window Operators and Systems; Underwriters Laboratories Inc.; 2002. 1.03 SUBMITTALS A. See Section 01300 -Administrative Requirements, for submittal procedures. B. Warranty: Submit manufacturer warranty and ensure that forms have been completed in Owner's name and registered with manufacturer. 1.04 QUALITY ASSURANCE 1.05 PROJECT CONDITIONS 1.06 WARRANTY A. See Section 01780 -Closeout Submittals, for additional warranty requirements. PART PRODUCTS 2.01 MANUFACTURERS A. Automatic Entrance Doors: 1. Besam Entrance Solutions; Product www.besam.com. 2. Substitutions: See Section 01600 - Product Requirements. 2.02 AUTOMATIC ENTRANCE DOORS A. Automatic Sliding Door Type _: Single leaf track -mounted, electric operation, extruded aluminum glazed door, with frame, and operator concealed overhead. 1. Operation: Power open, spring close operation. 2. "Outside" Side Actuator: Mat switch. 3. "Inside" Side Actuator: Mat switch. 4. Hold Open: Toggle switch at inside head of doors. 5. Door and Frame Finish: Same as adjacent framing system. 2.03 DOOR OPERATORS A. Door Operators -General Requirements: Comply with BHMA A156.10, BHMA A156.19, and UL ' 325, as applicable. 07128 / Navarro West Center 08460 - 1 AUTOMATIC ENTRANCE DOORS Navarro West Center For Permit and Pricing Welbourne Drive and Navarro Drive March 12th, 2008 1. Select equipment to accommodate light pedestrian traffic and weight of doors. 2. Provide equipment capable of operating, holding open, and closing doors under positive and negative wind pressures calculated in accordance with applicable code. 3. Provide operators that are fully adjustable for opening and closing speeds, checking speeds, and hold -open time. 4. Sliding Door Operators: Provide for manual open, close, and break -away operation of door leaves in the event of power failure. Maximum Force for Break -Away Function: Ibf ( N). 2.04 ACTUATORS A. Proximity Detector Actuator: Microwave; distance of control sensitivity adjustable. 2.05 ELECTRICAL CHARACTERISTICS AND COMPONENTS A. Electrical Characteristics: 1. See Drawings. B. Motors: NEMA MG 1. C. Wiring Terminations: Provide terminal lugs to match branch circuit conductor quantities, sizes, and materials indicated. Enclose terminal lugs in terminal box sized to NFPA 70. D. Disconnect Switch: Factory mount disconnect switch in control panel. 2.06 ACCESSORIES PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 INSTALLATION A. Install equipment in accordance with manufacturer's instructions. END OF SECTION 07128 / Navarro West Center 08460 - 2 AUTOMATIC ENTRANCE DOORS Navarro West Center Welbourne Drive and Navarro Drive SECTION 08710 DOOR HARDWARE For Permit and Pricing March 12th, 2008 PART1 GENERAL 1.01 SECTION INCLUDES A. Hardware for hollow steel doors. B. Lock cylinders for doors for which hardware is specified in other sections. C. Thresholds. D. Weatherstripping, seals and door gaskets. 1.02 RELATED SECTIONS A. Section 08110 -Steel Doors and Frames. B. Section 08410 -Metal-Framed Storefronts: Hardware for same except cylinders; installation of cylinders. 1.03 REFERENCES A. DHI (LOCS) - Recommended Locations for Architectural Hardware for Standard Steel Doors and Frames; Door and Hardware Institute; 2004. B. DHI WDHS.3 -Recommended Locations for Architectural Hardware for Flush Wood Doors; Door and Hardware Institute; 1996. 1.04 SUBMITTALS A. See Section 01300 - Administrative Requirements, for submittal procedures. B. Shop Drawings: 1. Indicate locations and mounting heights of each type of hardware, schedules, catalog cuts,. C. Samples: Prior to preparation of hardware schedule: 1. Submit 1 sample of hinge, latchset, lockset, and closer illustrating style, color, and finish. 2. Samples will be returned to supplier. 1.05 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Hardware Supplier Qualifications: Company specializing in supplying commercial door hardware with three years of experience. 1.06 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND PROTECTION A. Package hardware items individually; label and identify each package with door opening code to match hardware schedule. 1.07 COORDINATION A. Coordinate the work with other directly affected sections involving manufacture or fabrication of internal reinforcement for door hardware. B. Fumish templates for door and frame preparation. C. Coordinate Owner's keying requirements during the course of the Work. PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.01 MANUFACTURERS 07128 / Navarro West Center 08710 - 1 DOOR HARDWARE Navarro West Center Welbourne Drive and Navarro Drive For Permit and Pricing March 12th, 2008 A. Hinges: 1. Hager Companies: www.hagerhinge.com. 2. Stanley Hardware: www.stanleyworks.com. B. Lock and Latch Sets: 1. Best Access Systems: www.bestlock.com. 2. Schlage: www.schlage.com. C. Push/Pulls: 1. Hager Companies: www.hagerhinge.com. 2. Hiawatha, Inc: www.hiawathainc.com. 3. Triangle Brass Manufacturing Co., Inc: www.trimcobbw.com. D. Exit Devices: 1. Von Duprin: www.vonduprin.com. E. Closers: 1. DORMA Group North America: www.dorma-usa.com/usa. 2. LCN: www.icnclosers.com. F. Door Stripping and Seals: 1. National Guard Products, Inc: www.ngpinc.com. 2. Pemko Manufacturing Co: www.pemko.com. 3. Zero International, Inc: www.zerointernational.com. 2.02 GENERAL REQUIREMENTS FOR DOOR HARDWARE PRODUCTS A. Provide products that comply with the following: 1. Applicable provisions of Federal, State, and local codes. B. Finishes: Identified in schedule at end of section. 2.03 KEYING A. Door Locks: Master keyed. 1. Include construction keying. B. Supply keys in the following quantities: 1. 5 master keys. 2. 3 change keys for each lock. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 EXAMINATION A. Verify that doors and frames are ready to receive work and dimensions are as indicated on shop drawings. 3.02 INSTALLATION A. Install hardware in accordance with manufacturer's instructions and applicable codes. B. Use templates provided by hardware item manufacturer. C. Mounting heights for hardware from finished floor to center line of hardware item: As listed in Schedule, unless otherwise noted: 1. For steel doors and frames: Comply with DHI "Recommended Locations for Architectural Hardware for Steel Doors and Frames." 2. For wood doors: Comply with DHI "Recommended Locations for Architectural Hardware for Wood Flush Doors." 3.03 ADJUSTING 07128 / Navarro West Center 08710 - 2 DOOR HARDWARE Navarro West Center For Permit and Pricing Welbourne Drive and Navarro Drive March 12th, 2008 A. Adjust work under provisions of Section 01700. B. Adjust hardware for smooth operation. 3.04 PROTECTION OF FINISHED WORK A. Protect finished Work under provisions of Section 01700. B. Do not permit adjacent work to damage hardware or finish. 3.05 SCHEDULE - Attached. END OF SECTION 07128 / Navarro West Center 08710 - 3 DOOR HARDWARE Navarro West Center Welbourne Drive and Navarro Drive SECTION 08800 GLAZING For Permit and Pricing March 12th, 2008 PART1 GENERAL 1.01 SECTION INCLUDES A. Glass. B. Glazing compounds and accessories. 1.02 RELATED SECTIONS A. Section 08410 - Metal -Framed Storefronts. 1.03 REFERENCES A. 16 CFR 1201 - Safety Standard for Architectural Glazing Materials; current edition. B. ASTM C 864 - Standard Specification for Dense Elastomeric Compression Seal Gaskets, Setting Blocks, and Spacers; 2005. C. ASTM C 920 - Standard Specification for Elastomeric Joint Sealants; 2005. D. ASTM C 1036 - Standard Specification for Flat Glass; 2006. E. ASTM C 1172 - Standard Specification for Laminated Architectural Flat Glass; 2003. F. ASTM C 1193 - Standard Guide for Use of Joint Sealants; 2005a. G. GANA (SM) - FGMA Sealant Manual; Glass Association of North America; 1990. 1.04 SUBMITTALS A. See Section 01300 -Administrative Requirements, for submittal procedures. B. Product Data on Glass Types: Provide structural, physical and environmental characteristics, size limitations, special handling or installation requirements. C. Product Data on Glazing Compounds: Provide chemical, functional, and environmental characteristics, limitations, special application requirements. Identify available colors. D. Samples: Submit two samples 12 x 12 inch (_ x _ mm) in size of glass units, showing coloration and design. 1.05 ENVIRONMENTAL REQUIREMENTS A. Do not install glazing when ambient temperature is less than 50 degrees F (10 degrees C). 1.06 WARRANTY A. See Section 01780 - Closeout Submittals, for additional warranty requirements. B. Provide a five (5) year warranty to include coverage for sealed glass units from seal failure, interpane dusting or misting, and replacement of same. C. Provide a five (5) year warranty to include coverage for delamination of laminated glass and replacement of same. PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.01 FLAT GLASS MATERIALS A. Manufacturers: 1. ACH GlassNersalux: www.versaluxglass.com. 07128 / Navarro West Center 08800 - 1 GLAZING Navarro West Center For Permit and Pricing Welbourne Drive and Navarro Drive March 12th, 2008 2. Pilkington Building Products North America: www.pilkington.com. 3. Substitutions: Refer to Section 01600 -Product Requirements. B. Clear Float Glass (Type GL-3): Clear, annealed. 1. Comply with ASTM C 1036, Type I, transparent flat, Class 1 clear, Quality 03 (glazing select). C. Safety Glass (Type GL-4): Clear; annealed. 1. Laminated with 0.060 inch (1.52 mm) thick plastic interlayer; comply with ASTM C 1172 2. Comply with 16 CFR 1201 test requirements for Category II. 2.02 GLAZING COMPOUNDS A. Butyl Sealant: Single component; Shore A hardness of 10 to 20; black color; non -skinning. B. Polysulfide Sealant: Two component; chemical curing, non -sagging type; ASTM C 920, Type M, Grade NS, Class 25, Uses M, A, and G; cured Shore A hardness of 15 to 25; color as selected. C. Silicone Sealant: Single component; chemical curing; capable of water immersion without loss of properties; non -bleeding, non -staining; ASTM C 920, Type S, Grade NS, Class 25, Uses M, A, and G; cured Shore A hardness of 15 to 25; color as selected. 2.03 GLAZING ACCESSORIES A. Setting Blocks: Neoprene, 80 to 90 Shore A durometer hardness, ASTM C 864 Option I. Length of 0.1 inch for each square foot (25 mm for each square meter) of glazing or minimum 4 inch (100 mm) x width of glazing rabbet space minus 1/16 inch (1.5 mm) x height to suit glazing method and pane weight and area. B. Spacer Shims: Neoprene, 50 to 60 Shore A durometer hardness, ASTM C 864 Option I. Minimum 3 inch (75 mm) long x one half the height of the glazing stop x thickness to suit application, self adhesive on one face. C. Glazing Gaskets: Resilient silicone extruded shape to suit glazing channel retaining slot; ASTM C 864 Option I; black color. D. Glazing Clips: Manufacturer's standard type. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 PREPARATION A. Clean contact surfaces with solvent and wipe dry. B. Prime surfaces scheduled to receive sealant. C. Install sealants in accordance with ASTM C 1193 and FGMA Sealant Manual. D. Install sealant in accordance with manufacturer's instructions. 3.02 INSTALLATION - EXTERIOR/INTERIOR DRY METHOD (GASKET GLAZING) A. Place setting blocks at 1/4 points with edge block no more than 6 inches (150 mm) from comers. B. Rest glazing on setting blocks and push against fixed stop with sufficient pressure on gasket to attain full contact. C. Install removable stops without displacing glazing gasket; exert pressure for full continuous contact. END OF SECTION 07128 / Navarro West Center 08800 - 2 GLAZING Navarro West Center For Permit and Pricing Welbourne Drive and Navarro Drive March 12th, 2008 SECTION 08830 MIRRORS 07128 / Navarro West Center 08830 - 1 MIRRORS Navarro West Center Welbourne Drive and Navarro Drive SECTION 09260 GYPSUM BOARD ASSEMBLIES For Permit and Pricing March 12th, 2008 PART1 GENERAL 1.01 SECTION INCLUDES A. Metal stud wall framing. B. Metal channel ceiling framing. C. Acoustic insulation. D. Gypsum wallboard. E. Joint treatment and accessories. 1.02 REFERENCES A. ASTM C 475/C 475M - Standard Specification for Joint Compound and Joint Tape for Finishing Gypsum Board; 2002. B. ASTM C 645 - Standard Specification for Nonstructural Steel Framing Members; 2007. C. ASTM C 665 - Standard Specification for Mineral -Fiber Blanket Thermal Insulation for Light Frame Construction and Manufactured Housing; 2006. D. ASTM C 754 - Standard Specification for Installation of Steel Framing Members to Receive Screw -Attached Gypsum Panel Products; 2004. E. ASTM C 840 - Standard Specification for Application and Finishing of Gypsum Board; 2007. F. ASTM C 1002 - Standard Specification for Steel Self -Piercing Tapping Screws for the Application of Gypsum Panel Products or Metal Plaster Bases to Wood Studs or Steel Studs; 2004. G. ASTM C 1396/C 1396M - Standard Specification for Gypsum Board; 2006a. H. ASTM E 72 - Standard Test Methods of Conducting Strength Tests of Panels for Building Construction; 2005. I. GA-216 - Application and Finishing of Gypsum Board; Gypsum Association; 2007. 1.03 SUBMITTALS A. See Section 01300 - Administrative Requirements, for submittal procedures. B. Product Data: Provide data on metal framing. C. Test Reports: For all stud framing products that do not comply with ASTM C 645 or C 754, provide independent laboratory reports showing maximum stud heights at required spacings and deflections. 1.04 QUALITY ASSURANCE PART PRODUCTS 2.01 GYPSUM BOARD ASSEMBLIES A. Provide completed assemblies complying with ASTM C 840 and GA-216. 2.02 METAL FRAMING MATERIALS 07128 / Navarro West Center 09260 - 1 GYPSUM BOARD ASSEMBLIES Navarro West Center Welbourne Drive and Navarro Drive For Permit and Pricing March 12th, 2008 A. Non-Loadbearing Framing System Components: ASTM C 645; galvanized sheet steel, of size and properties necessary to comply with ASTM C 754 for the spacing indicated, with maximum deflection of wall framing of U240 at 5 psf (240 Pa). 1. Exception: The minimum metal thickness and section properties requirements of ASTM C 645 are waived provided steel of 40 ksi (275 MPa) minimum yield strength is used, the metal is continuously dimpled, the effective thickness is at least twice the base metal thickness, and maximum stud heights are determined by testing in accordance with ASTM E 72 using assemblies specified by ASTM C 754. 2. Studs: "C shaped with flat or formed webs with knurled faces. 3. Runners: U shaped, sized to match studs. 4. Ceiling Channels: C shaped. 5. Furring: Hat -shaped sections, minimum depth of 7/8 inch (22 mm). B. Ceiling Hangers: Type and size as specified in ASTM C 754 for spacing required. 2.03 GYPSUM BOARD MATERIALS A. Gypsum Wallboard: ASTM C 1396/C 1396M. Sizes to minimize joints in place; ends square cut. 1. Regular Type: a. Application: Use for vertical surfaces, unless otherwise indicated. b. Thickness: 5/8 inch (16 mm). c. Edges: Tapered. 2. Fire Resistant Type: Complying with Type X requirements; UL or WH rated. a. At Assemblies Indicated with Fire -Rating: Use type required by indicated tested assembly; if no tested assembly is indicated, use Type X. b. Edges: Tapered. B. Water -Resistant Gypsum Backing Board: ASTM C 1396/C 1396M; ends square cut. 1. Application: Vertical surfaces behind thinset tile, except in wet areas. 2. Edges: Tapered. C. Exterior Gypsum Soffit Board: ASTM C 1396/C 1396M; sizes to minimize joints in place; ends square cut. 1. Application: Ceilings and soffits in protected exterior areas, unless otherwise indicated. 2. Edges: Tapered. 2.04 ACCESSORIES A. Acoustic Insulation: ASTM C 665; preformed glass fiber, friction fit type, unfaced. B. Joint Materials: ASTM C 475 and as recommended by gypsum board manufacturer for project conditions. 1. Ready -mixed vinyl -based joint compound. 2. Chemical hardening type compound. C. Screws: ASTM C 1002; self -piercing tapping type; cadmium -plated for exterior locations. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 EXAMINATION A. Verify that project conditions are appropriate for work of this section to commence. 3.02 FRAMING INSTALLATION A. Metal Framing: Install in accordance with ASTM C 754 and manufacturer's instructions. B. Suspended Ceilings and Soffits: Space framing and furring members at 24 inches (600 mm) on center. 07128 / Navarro West Center 09260 - 2 GYPSUM BOARD ASSEMBLIES Navarro West Center Welbourne Drive and Navarro Drive For Permit and Pricing March 12th, 2008 1. Level ceiling system to a tolerance of 1/1200. 2. Install bracing as required at exterior locations to resist wind uplift. C. Studs: Space studs as indicated. 1. Extend partition framing to structure where indicated and to ceiling in other locations. 2. Partitions Terminating at Ceiling: Attach ceiling runner securely to ceiling track in accordance with manufacturer's instructions. D. Openings: Reinforce openings as required for weight of doors or operable panels, using not less than double studs at jambs. 3.03 ACOUSTIC ACCESSORIES INSTALLATION A. Acoustic Insulation: Place tightly within spaces, around cut openings, behind and around electrical and mechanical items within partitions, and tight to items passing through partitions. B. Acoustic Sealant: Install in accordance with manufacturer's instructions. 3.04 GYPSUM BOARD INSTALLATION A. Comply with ASTM C 840. Install to minimize butt end joints, especially in highly visible locations. B. Single -Layer Non -Rated: Install gypsum board inmost economical direction, with ends and edges occurring over firm bearing. C. Installation on Metal Framing: Use screws for attachment of all gypsum board. D. Moisture Protection: Treat cut edges and holes in moisture resistant gypsum board with sealant. 3.05 JOINT TREATMENT A. Finish gypsum board in scheduled areas in accordance with levels defined in ASTM C 840 and as scheduled below. 1. Above Finished Ceilings Concealed From View: Level 1. 2. Utility Areas and Areas Behind Cabinetry: Level 2. 3. Walls and Ceilings to Receive Flat or Eggshell Paint Finish: Level 4. B. Tape, fill, and sand exposed joints, edges, and comers to produce smooth surface ready to receive finishes. 1. Feather coats of joint compound so that camber is maximum 1/32 inch (0.8 mm). 3.06 TOLERANCES A. Maximum Variation of Finished Gypsum Board Surface from True Flatness: 1/8 inch in 10 feet (3 mm in 3 m) in any direction. END OF SECTION 07128 / Navarro West Center 09260 - 3 GYPSUM BOARD ASSEMBLIES Navarro West Center For Permit and Pricing Welbourne Drive and Navarro Drive March 12th, 2008 SECTION 09300 TILE PART1 GENERAL 1.01 SECTION INCLUDES A. Tile for floor applications. B. Tile for wall applications. C. Cementitious backer board as tile substrate. D. Ceramic accessories. E. Ceramic trim. 1.02 REFERENCES A. ANSI A108 Series/A118 Series/A136.1 -American National Standard Specifications for the Installation of Ceramic Tile (Compendium); 2005. 1. ANSI A108.1a - American National Standard Specifications for Installation of Ceramic Tile in the Wet -Set Method, with Portland Cement Mortar; 2005. 2. ANSI A108.1 b - American National Standard Specifications for Installation of Ceramic Tile on a Cured Portland Cement Mortar Setting Bed with Dry -Set or Latex Portland Cement Mortar; 1999 (R2005). 3. ANSI A108.1 c -Specifications for Contractors Option: Installation of Ceramic Tile in the Wet -Set Method with Portland Cement Mortar or Installation of Ceramic Tile on a Cured Portland Cement Mortar Bed with Dry -Set or Latex Portland Cement Mortar; 1999 (R2005). 4. ANSI A108.4 - American National Standard Specifications for Installation of Ceramic Tile with Organic Adhesives or Water Cleanable Tile Setting Epoxy Adhesive; 1999 (R2005). 5. ANSI A108.5 - American National Standard Specifications for Installation of Ceramic Tile with Dry -Set Portland Cement Mortar or Latex -Portland Cement Mortar; 1999 (R2005). 6. ANSI A108.6 - American National Standard Specifications for Installation of Ceramic Tile with Chemical Resistant, Water Cleanable Tile -Setting and -Grouting Epoxy; 1999 (R2005). 7. ANSI A108.8 - American National Standard Specifications for Installation of Ceramic Tile with Chemical Resistant Furan Resin Mortar and Grout; 1999 (R2005). 8. ANSI A108.9 - American National Standard Specifications for Installation of Ceramic Tile with Modified Epoxy Emulsion Mortar/Grout; 1999 (R2005). 9. ANSI A108.10 - American National Standard Specifications for Installation of Grout in Tilework; 1999 (R2005). 10. ANSI A108.11 -American National Standard for Interior Installation of Cementitious Backer Units; 1999 (R2005). 11. ANSI A118.1 - American National Standard Specifications for Dry -Set Portland Cement Mortar; 1999 (R200.5). 12. ANSI A118.4 - American National Standard Specifications for Latex -Portland Cement Mortar; 1999 (R2005). 13. ANSI A118.7 - American National Standard Specifications for Polymer Modified Cement Grouts for Tile Installation; 1999 (R2005). 14. ANSI A118.9 - American National Standard Specifications for Test Methods and Specifications for Cementitious Backer Units; 1999 (R2005). 15. ANSI A137.1 - American National Standard Specifications for Ceramic Tile; 1988. B. TCA (HB) Handbook for Ceramic Tile Installation; Tile Council of North America, Inc.; 2007. 1.03 SUBMITTALS A. See Section 01300 -Administrative Requirements, for submittal procedures. 07128 / Navarro West Center 09300 - 1 TILE Navarro West Center Welbourne Drive and Navarro Drive For Permit and Pricing March 12th, 2008 B. Samples: Mount tile and apply grout on two plywood panels, minimum 18 x 18 inches (450 x 450 mm) in size illustrating pattern, color variations, and grout joint size variations. C. Manufacturer's Certificate: Certify that products meet or exceed specified requirements. 1.04 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Installer Qualifications: Company specializing in performing tile installation, with minimum of 5 years of documented experience. 1.05 ENVIRONMENTAL REQUIREMENTS A. Maintain ambient and substrate temperature of 50 degrees F (10 degrees C) during installation of mortar materials. 1.06 EXTRA MATERIALS A. Provide 10 sq. ft (1 sq. m) of each size, color, and surface finish of the specified. PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.01 TILE A. Manufacturers: All products by the same manufacturer. 1. Dal -Tile Corporation: www.daltile.com. 2. Substitutions: See Section 01600 - Product Requirements. B. Ceramic Mosaic Tile: ANSI A137.1, and as follows: 1. Moisture Absorption: 0 to 0.5 percent. 2. Size and Shape: 2 inch square (50 mm square). 3. Edges: Cushioned. 4. Surface Finish: Unglazed. 5. Colors: As scheduled. C. Glazed Wall Tile: ANSI A137.1, and as follows: 1. Moisture Absorption: 3.0 to 7.0 percent. 2. Size and Shape: 4-1/4 inch (108 mm) square. 3. Edges: Cushioned. 4. Surface Finish: High gloss. 5. Colors: As scheduled. 6. Trim Units: Matching surface bullnose, cove, and base shapes in sizes coordinated with field tile. 2.02 TRIM AND ACCESSORIES A. Ceramic Accessories: Glazed finish, same color and finish as adjacent field tile; same manufacturer as tile. B. Ceramic Trim: Matching bullnose, double bullnose, cove base, and cove ceramic shapes in sizes coordinated with field tile. 1. Manufacturer: Same as for tile. 2.03 MORTAR MATERIALS A. Manufacturers: 1. Bonsal: www.bonsal.com. 2. Bostik, Inc: www.bostik-us.com. 3. Custom Building Products: www.custombuildingprodUcts.com. 4. Substitutions: See Section 01600 - Product Requirements. B. Mortar Bond Coat Materials: 07128 / Navarro West Center 09300 - 2 TILE Navarro West Center For Permit and Pricing Welbourne Drive and Navarro Drive March 12th, 2008 1. Dry -Set Portland Cement type: ANSI A118.1. 2. Latex -Portland Cement type: ANSI A118.4. 2.04 GROUT MATERIALS A. Manufacturers: 1. Bonsal: www.bonsal.com. 2. Bostik, Inc: www.bostik-us.com. 3. Custom Building Products: www.custombuildingproducts.com. 4. Substitutions: See Section 01600 - Product Requirements. B. Grout: Polymer modified cement grout, sanded or unsanded, as specified in ANSI A118.7. 1. Color: As selected. 2.05 ACCESSORY MATERIALS A. Cementitious Backer Board: ANSI A118.9; High density, cementitious, glass fiber reinforced, 1/2 inch (13 mm) thick; 2 inch (50 mm) wide coated glass fiber tape for joints and corners. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 EXAMINATION A. Verify that sub -floor surfaces are dust -free and free of substances which would impair bonding of setting materials to sub -floor surfaces. B. Verify that concrete sub -floor surfaces are ready for tile installation by testing for moisture emission rate and alkalinity; obtain instructions if test results are not within limits recommended by tile manufacturer and setting materials manufacturer. 3.02 PREPARATION A. Protect surrounding work from damage. B. Vacuum clean surfaces and damp clean. C. Seal substrate surface cracks with filler. Level existing substrate surfaces to acceptable flatness tolerances. D. Install cementitious backer board in accordance with ANSI A108.11 and board manufacturer's instructions. Tape joints and comers, cover with skim coat of dry -set mortar to a feather edge. 3.03 INSTALLATION - GENERAL A. Install tile and thresholds and grout in accordance with applicable requirements of ANSI A108.1 through All 08.13, manufacturer's instructions, and TCA Handbook recommendations. B. Lay tile to pattern indicated. Do not interrupt tile pattern through openings. C. Cut and fit tile to penetrations through tile, leaving sealant joint space. Form comers and bases neatly. Align floor joints. D. Place tile joints uniform in width, subject to variance in tolerance allowed in tile size. Make joints watertight, without voids, cracks, excess mortar, or excess grout. E. Form internal angles square and external angles bullnosed. F. Install ceramic accessories rigidly in prepared openings. G. Sound tile after setting. Replace hollow sounding units. H. Keep expansion joints free of adhesive or grout. Apply sealant to joints. I. Allow tile to set for a minimum of 48 hours prior to grouting. 07128 / Navarro West Center 09300 - 3 TILE Navarro West Center For Permit and Pricing Welboume Drive and Navarro Drive March 12th, 2008 J. Grout tile joints. Use standard grout unless otherwise indicated. K. Apply sealant to junction of tile and dissimilar materials and junction of dissimilar planes. 3.04 INSTALLATION - FLOORS - THIN -SET METHODS A. Over interior concrete substrates, install in accordance with TCA Handbook Method F113, dry -set or latex-portland cement bond coat, with standard grout, unless otherwise indicated. 3.05 INSTALLATION - WALL TILE A. Over gypsum wallboard on wood or metal studs install in accordance with TCA Handbook Method W243, thin -set with dry -set or latex-portland cement bond coat, unless otherwise indicated. 3.06 CLEANING A. Clean tile and grout surfaces. 3.07 PROTECTION OF FINISHED WORK A. Do not permit traffic over finished floor surface for 4 days after installation. END OF SECTION 07128 / Navarro West Center 09300 - 4 TILE Navarro West Center Welbourne Drive and Navarro Drive SECTION 09511 SUSPENDED ACOUSTICAL CEILINGS For Permit and Pricing March 12th, 2008 PART1 GENERAL 1.01 SECTION INCLUDES A. Suspended metal grid ceiling system. B. Acoustical units. 1.02 REFERENCES A. ASTM C 635 - Standard Specification for the Manufacture, Performance, and Testing of Metal Suspension Systems for Acoustical Tile and Lay -in Panel Ceilings; 2004. B. ASTM E 1264 - Standard Classification for Acoustical Ceiling Products; 1998 (Reapproved 2005). 1.03 SUBMITTALS A. See Section 01300 - Administrative Requirements, for submittal procedures. B. Shop Drawings: Indicate grid layout and related dimensioning. C. Samples: Submit two samples 6 x 6 inch (_)mm) in size illustrating material and finish of acoustical units. D. Samples: Submit two samples each, 12 inches mm) tong, of suspension system main runner. 1.04 ENVIRONMENTAL REQUIREMENTS A. Maintain uniform temperature of minimum 60 degrees F (16 degrees C), and maximum humidity of 40 percent prior to, during, and after acoustical unit installation. 1.05 PROJECT CONDITIONS A. Sequence work to ensure acoustical ceilings are not installed until building is enclosed, sufficient heat is provided, dust generating activities have terminated, and overhead work is completed, tested, and approved. B. Install acoustical units after interior wet work is dry. 1.06 EXTRA MATERIALS A. See Section 01600 - Product Requirements, for additional provisions. B. Provide 5 percent of total acoustical unit area of each type of acoustical unit for Owner's use in maintenance of project. PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.01 ACOUSTICAL UNITS A. Manufacturers: 1. Armstrong World Industries, Inc: www.armstrong.com. 2. CertainTeed Corporation: www.certainteed.com. 3. USG: www.usg.com. 4. Substitutions: See Section 01600 - Product Requirements. B. Acoustical Units - General: ASTM E 1264, Class A. 07128 / Navarro West Center 09511 - 1 SUSPENDED ACOUSTICAL CEILINGS Navarro West Center Welbourne Drive and Navarro Drive For Permit and Pricing March 12th, 2008 C. Acoustical Panels: Painted mineral fiber, ASTM E 1264 Type III, with the following characteristics: 1. Size: 24 x 24 inches (600 x 600 mm). 2. Thickness: 5/8 inches (15 mm). 3. Composition: Wet felted. 4. Density: 1.0 Ib/cu ft ( kg/cu cm). 5. NRC Range: 0.50 to 0.60, determined as specified in ASTM E 1264. 6. Edge: Square. 7. Surface Color: White. 8. Surface Pattern: Non -directional fissured. 9. Product: Hytone Baroque by Celotex. 10. Suspension System: Exposed grid. 2.02 SUSPENSION SYSTEM(S) A. Manufacturers: 1. Armstrong World Industries, Inc: www.armstrong.com. 2. Chicago Metallic Corporation: www.chicagometallic.com. 3. USG: www.usg.com. 4. Substitutions: See Section 01600 - Product Requirements. B. Suspension Systems - General: ASTM C 635; die cut and interlocking components, with stabilizer bars, clips, splices, perimeter moldings, and hold down clips as required. C. Exposed Steel Suspension System: Formed steel, commercial quality cold rolled; intermediate -duty. 1. Profile: Tee; 15/16 inch (24 mm) wide face. 2. Construction: Double web. 3. Finish: White painted. 2.03 ACCESSORIES A. Support Channels and Hangers: Galvanized steel; size and type to suit application, seismic requirements, and ceiling system flatness requirement specified. B. Perimeter Moldings: Same material and finish as grid. 1. At Exposed Grid: Provide L-shaped molding for mounting at same elevation as face of grid C. Touch-up Paint: Type and color to match acoustical and grid units. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 INSTALLATION - SUSPENSION SYSTEM A. Rigidly secure system, including integral mechanical and electrical components, for maximum deflection of 1:360. B. Locate system on room axis according to reflected plan. C. Install after major above -ceiling work is complete. Coordinate the location of hangers with other work. D. Provide hanger clips during steel deck erection. Provide additional hangers and inserts as required. E. Hang suspension system independent of walls, columns, ducts, pipes and conduit. Where carrying members are spliced, avoid visible displacement of face plane of adjacent members. 07128 / Navarro West Center 09511 -2 SUSPENDED ACOUSTICAL CEILINGS Navarro West Center Welboume Drive and Navarro Drive For Permit and Pricing March 12th, 2008 F. Where ducts or other equipment prevent the regular spacing of hangers, reinforce the nearest affected hangers and related carrying channels to span the extra distance. G. Do not support components on main runners or cross runners if weight causes total dead load to exceed deflection capability. H. Support fixture loads using supplementary hangers located within 6 inches (150 mm) of each comer, or support components independently. I. Do not eccentrically load system or induce rotation of runners. J. Perimeter Molding: Install at intersection of ceiling and vertical surfaces and at junctions with other interruptions. 1. Use longest practical lengths. 2. Overlap and rivet comers. 3.02 INSTALLATION - ACOUSTICAL UNITS A. Install acoustical units in accordance with manufacturer's instructions. B. Fit acoustical units in place, free from damaged edges or other defects detrimental to appearance and function. C. Fit border trim neatly against abutting surfaces. D. Install units after above -ceiling work is complete. E. Install acoustical units level, in uniform plane, and free from twist, warp, and dents. F. Cutting Acoustical Units: 1. Cut to fit irregular grid and perimeter edge trim. 2. Make field cut edges of same profile as factory edges. 3. Double cut and field paint exposed reveal edges. G. Install hold-down clips on panels within 20 ft (6 m) of an exterior door. END OF SECTION 07128 / Navarro West Center 09511 - 3 SUSPENDED ACOUSTICAL CEILINGS Navarro West Center Welbourne Drive and Navarro Drive SECTION 09680 CARPET For Permit and Pricing March 12th, 2008 PART1 GENERAL 1.01 SECTION INCLUDES A. Carpet, stretched -in, with cushion underlay. B. Accessories. 1.02 REFERENCES A. CRI 104 - Standard for Installation of Commercial Textile Floorcovering Materials; Carpet and Rug Institute; 2002. 1.03 SUBMITTALS A. See Section 01300 - Administrative Requirements, for submittal procedures. B. Product Data: Provide data on specified products, describing physical and performance characteristics; sizes, patterns, colors available, and method of installation. C. Samples: Submit two samples 12x_12_ inch (_x mm) in size illustrating color and pattern for each carpet and cushion material specified. 1.04 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Manufacturer Qualifications: Company specializing in manufacturing specified carpet with minimum three years documented experience. 1.05 EXTRA MATERIALS A. See Section 01600 -Product Requirements, for additional requirements. PART PRODUCTS 2.01 MANUFACTURERS A. Carpet: 1. Substitutions: See Section 01600 -Product Requirements. B. Cushion: 1. Substitutions: See Section 01600 - Product Requirements. 2.02 CARPET A. Carpet Type 1. See drawings. Commercial grade, submit sample, data, beige color. 2.03 CUSHION A. Cushion: Cellular rubber: 2.04 ACCESSORIES A. Sub -Floor Filler: Type recommended by carpet manufacturer. B. Tackless Strip: Carpet gripper, of type recommended by carpet manufacturer to suit application, with attachment devices. C. Seam Adhesive: Recommended by manufacturer. D. Contact Adhesive: Compatible with carpet material; releasable type. 07128 / Navarro West Center 09680 - 1 CARPET Navarro West Center Welbourne Drive and Navarro Drive PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 EXAMINATION For Permit and Pricing March 12th, 2008 A. Verify that sub -floor surfaces are smooth and flat within the tolerances specified for that type of work and are ready to receive carpet. B. Verify that concrete sub -floor surfaces are ready for carpet installation by testing for moisture emission rate and alkalinity; obtain instructions if test results are not within limits recommended by carpet manufacturer and adhesive materials manufacturer. 3.02 PREPARATION A. Remove sub -floor ridges and bumps. Fill minor or local low spots, cracks, joints, holes, and other defects with sub -floor filler. B. Apply, trowel, and float filler to achieve smooth, flat, hard surface. Prohibit traffic until filler is cured. C. Clean substrate. 3.03 INSTALLATION - GENERAL A. Install carpet and cushion in accordance with manufacturer's instructions and CRI 104. B. Verify carpet match before cutting to ensure minimal variation between dye lots. C. Lay out carpet and locate seams in accordance with shop drawings: 1. Locate seams in area of least traffic, out of areas of pivoting traffic, and parallel to main traffic. 2. Do not locate seams perpendicular through door openings. 3. Align run of pile in same direction as anticipated traffic and in same direction on adjacent pieces. 4. Locate change of color or pattern between rooms under door centerline. 5. Provide monolithic color, pattern, and texture match within any one area. D. Install carpet tight and flat on subfloor, well fastened at edges, with a uniform appearance. 3.04 STRETCHED -IN CARPET A. Install tackless strips with pins facing the wall around entire perimeter, except across door openings. Use edge strip where carpet terminates at other floor coverings. B. Space tackless strips slightly less than carpet thickness away from vertical surfaces, but not more than 3/8 inch (9 mm). C. Install cushion in maximum size pieces using spot adhesive to adhere to sub -floor. D. Lay out cushion so that seams will be perpendicular to, or offset from, minimum 6 inches (150 mm) from carpet seams. E. Butt cushion edges together and tape seams. F. Trim cushion tight to edge of tackless strip and around projections and contours. G. Double cut carpet seams, with accurate pattern match. Make cuts straight, true, and unfrayed. Apply seam adhesive to all cut edges immediately. H. Join seams by hand sewing. Form seams straight, not overlapped or peaked, and free of gaps I. Following seaming, hook carpet onto tackless strip at one edge, power stretch, and hook firmly at other edges. Follow manufacturer's recommendations for method and amount of stretch. 07128 / Navarro West Center 09680 - 2 CARPET Navarro West Center For Permit and Pricing Welbourne Drive and Navarro Drive March 12th, 2008 J. Trim carpet neatly at walls and around interruptions. Tuck edges into space between tackless strip and wall. END OF SECTION 07128 / Navarro West Center 09680 - 3 CARPET Navarro West Center Welbourne Drive and Navarro Drive SECTION 09900 PAINTS AND COATINGS For Permit and Pricing March 12th, 2008 PART 1 GENERAL 1.01 SECTION INCLUDES A. Surface preparation. B. Field application of paints. C. See Schedule - Surfaces to be Finished, at end of Section. 1.02 REFERENCES A. 40 CFR 59, Subpart D - National Volatile Organic Compound Emission Standards for Architectural Coatings; U.S. Environmental Protection Agency; current edition. B. ASTM D 16 - Standard Terminology for Paint, Related Coatings, Materials, and Applications; 2003. C. ASTM D 4442 - Standard Test Methods for Direct Moisture Content Measurement of Wood and Wood -Base Materials; 1992 (Reapproved 2003). 1.03 DEFINITIONS A. Conform to ASTM D 16 for interpretation of terms used in this section. 1.04 SUBMITTALS A. See Section 01300 - Administrative Requirements, for submittal procedures. B. Product Data: Provide data on all finishing products, including VOC content. C. Samples: Submit two painted samples, illustrating selected colors and textures for each color and system selected with specified coats cascaded. Submit on tempered hardboard, 12 x 12 inch ( x mm) in size. D. Manufacturer's Instructions: Indicate special surface preparation procedures. E. Maintenance Data: Submit data on cleaning, touch-up, and repair of painted and coated surfaces. 1.05 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Applicator Qualifications: Company specializing in performing the work of this section with minimum three years experience. 1.06 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND PROTECTION A. Deliver products to site in sealed and labeled containers; inspect to verify acceptability. B. Container Label: Include manufacturer's name, type of paint, brand name, lot number, brand code, coverage, surface preparation, drying time, cleanup requirements, color designation, and instructions for mixing and reducing. C. Paint Materials: Store at minimum ambient temperature of 45 degrees F (7 degrees C) and a maximum of 90 degrees F (32 degrees C), in ventilated area, and as required by manufacturer's instructions. 07128 / Navarro West Center 09900 -1 PAINTS AND COATINGS Navarro West Center Welbourne Drive and Navarro Drive 1.07 ENVIRONMENTAL REQUIREMENTS For Permit and Pricing March 12th, 2008 A. Do not apply materials when surface and ambient temperatures are outside the temperature ranges required by the paint product manufacturer. B. Do not apply exterior coatings during rain or snow, or when relative humidity is outside the humidity ranges required by the paint product manufacturer. C. Minimum Application Temperatures for Latex Paints: 45 degrees F (7 degrees C) for interiors; 50 degrees F (10 degrees C) for exterior; unless required otherwise by manufacturer's instructions. D. Provide lighting level of 80 ft candles (860 Ix) measured mid -height at substrate surface. PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.01 MANUFACTURERS A. Paints: 1. Benjamin Moore & Co: www.benjaminmoore.com. B. Substitutions: See Section 01600 - Product Requirements. 2.02 PAINTS AND COATINGS - GENERAL A. Paints and Coatings: Ready mixed, except field -catalyzed coatings. Prepare pigments: 1. To a soft paste consistency, capable of being readily and uniformly dispersed to a homogeneous coating. 2. For good flow and brushing properties. 3. Capable of drying or curing free of streaks or sags. B. Volatile Organic Compound (VOC) Content: 1. Provide coatings that comply with the most stringent requirements specified in the following: a. 40 CFR 59, Subpart D—National Volatile Organic Compound Emission Standards for Architectural Coatings. 2. Determination of VOC Content: Testing and calculation in accordance with 40 CFR 59, Subpart D (EPA Method 24), exclusive of colorants added to a tint base and water added at project site; or other method acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction. C. Chemical Content: The following compounds are prohibited: 1. Aromatic Compounds: In excess of 1.0 percent by weight of total aromatic compounds (hydrocarbon compounds containing one or more benzene rings). 2. Acrolein, acrylonitrile, antimony, benzene, butyl benzyl phthalate, cadmium, di (2-ethylhexyl) phthalate, di-n-butyl phthalate, di-n-octyl phthalate, 1,2-dichlorobenzene, diethyl phthalate, dimethyl phthalate, ethylbenzene, formaldehyde, hexavalent chromium, isophorone, lead, mercury, methyl ethyl ketone, methyl isobutyl ketone, methylene chloride, naphthalene, toluene (methylbenzene), 1,1,1-trichloroethane, vinyl chloride. 2.03 PAINT SYSTEMS - EXTERIOR A. Paint ME-OP-3A - Ferrous Metals, Unprimed, Alkyd, 3 Coat: 1. One coat of alkyd primer. 2. Gloss: Two coats of alkyd enamel. B. Paint ME-OP-2A - Ferrous Metals, Primed, Alkyd, 2 Coat: 1. Touch-up with rust -inhibitive primer recommended by top coat manufacturer. 2. Gloss: Two coats of alkyd enamel. C. Paint MgE-OP-3A - Galvanized Metals, Alkyd, 3 Coat: 1. One coat galvanize primer. 07128 / Navarro West Center 09900 - 2 PAINTS AND COATINGS Navarro West Center Welbourne Drive and Navarro Drive For Permit and Pricing March 12th, 2008 2. Gloss: Two coats of alkyd enamel. D. Paint E-Pav - Pavement Marking Paint: 1. White: One coat, with reflective particles. 2.04 PAINT SYSTEMS -INTERIOR A. Paint WI-OP-3A - Wood, Opaque, Alkyd, 3 Coat: 1. One coat alkyd primer sealer. 2. Semi -gloss: Two coats of alkyd enamel. B. Paint MI-OP-3A - Ferrous Metals, Unprimed, Alkyd, 3 Coat: 1. One coat of alkyd primer. 2. Semi -gloss: Two coats of alkyd enamel. C. Paint MgI-OP-3A - Galvanized Metals, Alkyd, 3 Coat: 1. One coat galvanize primer. 2. Semi -gloss: Two coats of alkyd enamel. D. Paint GI-OP-3L - Gypsum Board/Plaster, Latex, 3 Coat: 1. One coat of latex primer sealer. 2. Eggshell: For walls, two coats of latex enamel. 3. Flat: For ceilings, two coats of latex paint. 2.05 ACCESSORY MATERIALS A. Accessory Materials: Linseed oil, shellac, turpentine, paint thinners and other materials not specifically indicated but required to achieve the finishes specified; commercial quality. B. Patching Material: Latex filler. C. Fastener Head Cover Material: Latex filler. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 EXAMINATION A. Verify that surfaces are ready to receive Work as instructed by the product manufacturer. B. Examine surfaces scheduled to be finished prior to commencement of work. Report any condition that may potentially affect proper application. C. Test shop -applied primer for compatibility with subsequent cover materials. D. Measure moisture content of surfaces using an electronic moisture meter. Do not apply finishes unless moisture content of surfaces are below the following maximums: 1. Plaster and Gypsum Wallboard: 12 percent. 2. Interior Wood: 15 percent, measured in accordance with ASTM D 4442. 3.02 PREPARATION A. Surface Appurtenances: Remove electrical plates, hardware, light fixture trim, escutcheons, and fittings prior to preparing surfaces or finishing. B. Surfaces: Correct defects and clean surfaces which affect work of this section. Remove or repair existing coatings that exhibit surface defects. C. Marks: Seal with shellac those which may bleed through surface finishes. D. Impervious Surfaces: Remove mildew by scrubbing with solution of tetra -sodium phosphate and bleach. Rinse with clean water and allow surface to dry. ' E. Gypsum Board Surfaces to be Painted: Fill minor defects with filler compound. Spot prime 07128 / Navarro West Center 09900 - 3 PAINTS AND COATINGS Navarro West Center For Permit and Pricing Welbourne Drive and Navarro Drive March 12th, 2008 defects after repair. F. Asphalt, Creosote, or Bituminous Surfaces to be Painted: Remove foreign particles to permit adhesion of finishing materials. Apply latex based sealer or primer. G. Galvanized Surfaces to be Painted: Remove surface contamination and oils and wash with solvent. Apply coat of etching primer. H. Uncoated Steel and Iron Surfaces to be Painted: Remove grease, mill scale, weld splatter, dirt, and rust. Where heavy coatings of scale are evident, remove by hand wire brushing or sandblasting; clean by washing with solvent. Apply a treatment of phosphoric acid solution, ensuring weld joints, bolts, and nuts are similarly cleaned. Prime paint entire surface; spot prime after repairs. Shop -Primed Steel Surfaces to be Finish Painted: Sand and scrape to remove loose primer and rust. Feather edges to make touch-up patches inconspicuous. Clean surfaces with solvent. Prime bare steel surfaces. Re -prime entire shop -primed item. J. Interior Wood Items to Receive Opaque Finish: Wipe off dust and grit prior to priming. Seal knots, pitch streaks, and sappy sections with sealer. Fill nail holes and cracks after primer has dried; sand between coats. Back prime concealed surfaces before installation. K. Wood Doors to be Field -Finished: Seal wood door top and bottom edge surfaces with clear sealer. L. Metal Doors to be Painted: Prime metal door top and bottom edge surfaces. 3.03 APPLICATION A. Apply products in accordance with manufacturer's instructions. B. Do not apply finishes to surfaces that are not dry. Allow applied coats to dry before next coat is applied. C. Apply each coat to uniform appearance. Apply each coat of paint slightly darker than preceding coat unless otherwise approved. D. Vacuum clean surfaces of loose particles. Use tack cloth to remove dust and particles just prior to applying next coat. 3.04 FINISHING MECHANICALAND ELECTRICAL EQUIPMENT A. Remove unfinished louvers, grilles, covers, and access panels on mechanical and electrical components and paint separately. B. Reinstall electrical cover plates, hardware, light fixture trim, escutcheons, and fittings removed prior to finishing. 3.05 SCHEDULE - SURFACES TO BE FINISHED A. Do Not Paint or Finish the Following Items: 1. Items fully factory -finished unless specifically noted. 2. Fire rating labels, equipment serial number and capacity labels. B. Paint the surfaces described in PART 2, Paint Systems Articles. C. Mechanical and Electrical: Use paint systems defined for the substrates to be finished. 1. Paint all conduit and boxes occurring in finished areas to match background surfaces, unless otherwise indicated. 2. Paint shop -primed items occurring in finished areas. 3. Paint interior surfaces of air ducts that are visible through grilles and louvers with one coat of flat black paint to visible surfaces. 07128 / Navarro West Center 09900 - 4 PAINTS AND COATINGS Navarro West Center For Permit and Pricing Welbourne Drive and Navarro Drive March 12th, 2008 4. Paint dampers exposed behind louvers, grilles, and convector and baseboard cabinets to match face panels. END OF SECTION 07128 / Navarro West Center 09900 - 5 PAINTS AND COATINGS Navarro West Center Welbourne Drive and Navarro Drive SECTION 10160 METAL TOILET COMPARTMENTS For Permit and Pricing March 12th, 2008 PART1 GENERAL 1.01 SECTION INCLUDES A. Metal toilet compartments. B. Urinal and Vestibule screens.. 1.02 REFERENCES A. ASTM A 653/A 653M - Standard Specification for Steel Sheet, Zinc -Coated (Galvanized) or Zinc -Iron Alloy -Coated (Galvannealed) by the Hot -Dip Process; 2006a. 1.03 SUBMITTALS A. See Section 01300 -Administrative Requirements, for submittal procedures. PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.01 MANUFACTURERS A. Metal Toilet Compartments: 1. Global Steel Products Corp; Product : www.globalpartitions.com. 2. Substitutions: Section 01600 - Product Requirements. 2.02 MATERIALS A. Steel Sheet: Hot -dipped galvanized steel sheet, ASTM A 653/A 653M, with G90/Z275 coating. 2.03 COMPONENTS A. Toilet Compartments: Baked enamelled steel, floor -mounted unbraced. B. Doors, Panels, and Pilasters: Sheet steel faces, pressure bonded to sound deadening core, formed and closed edges, mitered and welded comers ground smooth. 2.04 FINISHING PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 INSTALLATION A. Install partitions secure, rigid, plumb, and level in accordance with manufacturer's instructions. B. Maintain 3/8 to 1/2 inch (9 to 13 mm) space between wall and panels and between wall and end pilasters. C. Attached panel brackets securely to walls using anchor devices. D. Attach panels and pilasters to brackets. Locate head rail joints at pilaster center lines. 3.02 ERECTION TOLERANCES A. Maximum Variation From True Position: 1/4 inch (6 mm). 3.03 ADJUSTING A. Adjust and align hardware to uniform clearance at vertical edge of doors, not exceeding 3/16 inch (5 mm). B. Adjust hinges to position doors in partial opening position when unlatched. Return out swinging doors to closed position. 07128 / Navarro West Center 10160 - 1 METAL TOILET COMPARTMENTS Navarro West Center For Permit and Pricing Welbourne Drive and Navarro Drive March 12th, 2008 END OF SECTION 07128 / Navarro West Center 10160 - 2 METAL TOILET COMPARTMENTS Navarro West Center For Permit and Pricing Welbourne Drive and Navarro Drive March 12th, 2008 PART1 GENERAL 1.01 SECTION INCLUDES A. Stationary dock shelters. PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.01 MANUFACTURERS 2.02 COMPONENTS PART 3 EXECUTION SECTION 11164 DOCK SEALS AND SHELTERS END OF SECTION 07128 / Navarro West Center 11164 - 1 DOCK SEALS AND SHELTERS Navarro West Center Welbourne Drive and Navarro Drive SECTION 11165 DOCK BUMPERS For Permit and Pricing March 12th, 2008 PART1 GENERAL 1.01 SECTION INCLUDES A. Dock bumpers of reinforced rubber with attachment frame. PART PRODUCTS 2.01 COMPONENTS A. Bumpers: Fabric reinforced rubber pads, ozone resistant, laminated and compressed in position with two galvanized steel rods with threaded ends, washers and nuts; between 3 x 2-1/2 x 1/4 inch (75 x 60 x 6 mm) galvanized steel angle end plates: PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 INSTALLATION A. Install dock bumpers in accordance with manufacturer's instructions. B. Set plumb and level. END OF SECTION 07128 / Navarro West Center 11165 - 1 DOCK BUMPERS Navarro West Center Navarro Drive and Welbourne Drive SECTION 00110 INDEX OF DRAWINGS T0.0 Title Sheet ES Existing Survey G1.1 Accessibility Sheet G1.2 Accessibility Sheet C1.0 Paving Plan C2.0 Erosion Control Plan C3.0 Erosion Control Details C4.0 Grading Plan C5.0 Paving Details C6.0 Drainage Area Map C7.0 Drainage Calculations C8.0 Utility Plan LP1 Landscape Plan LP2 Landscape Details A1.0 Site Plan A1.1 Floor Plan A1.2 Reflected Ceiling plan A1.3 Roof Plan A1.4 Enlarged Floor Plan A2.1 Elevations A4.1 Wall Sections A4.2 Wall Sections A4.3 Wall Sections A4.4 Wall Sections A4.5 Wall Sections A5.1 Section Details A5.2 Section Details A5.3 Plan Details A5.4 Site Plan Details A6.1 Schedules S1.1 General Notes S2.1 Foundation Plan S3.1 Roof Framing Plan S4.1 Foundation Details S4.2 Foundation Details S5.1 Framing Details S5.2 Framing Detail's P1.1 Plumbing Plan & Details P1.2 Plumbing Plan & Details E1.0 Floor Plan Lighting E2.0 Floor Plan Power E3.0 Floor Plan Lighting & Power E4.0 One Line Diagram & Panels M1.1 Mechanical Floor Plan For Construction March 12th, 2008 M2.1 Mechanical Details Index of Drawings 00110 Navarro West Center Navarro Drive and Welbourne Drive For Construction March 12th, 2008 Index of Drawings 00110 ARCHITECTS L.L.P. March 12, 2008 BACK COVER